imageRUNNER+25452535+series+Service+Manual en 9.0 PDF

Revision 9.
imageRUNNER 2545/2535
series
Service Manual
Introduction
Introduction
Important Notices
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products.
This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does
not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products.
When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the
need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new
edition of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the consent of Canon Inc.
Copyright CANON INC. 2009
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Explanation of Symbols
The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.
Symbols
Explanation
Symbols
Check.
Explanation
Remove the claw.
1x
Check visually.
Insert the claw.
1x
Check a sound.
Push the part.
Introduction
Symbols
Explanation
Symbols
Explanation
Disconnect the connector.
Connect the power cable.
Connect the connector.
Disconnect the power cable.
Remove the cable/wire from the

cable guide or wire saddle.
Turn on the power.
Install the cable/wire to the cable

guide or wire saddle.
Turn off the power.
Remove the screw.
Loosen the screw.
1x
1x
1x
1x
1x
1x
Install the screw.
1x
Tighten the screw.
1x
Cleaning is needed.
Measurement is needed.
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and
mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams,
represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol, the arrow
indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit
door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".
(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations
of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of
the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and
major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service
Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine.
Contents
Contents
Safety Precautions...............................................................................................1
Laser Safety........................................................................................................................................ 2
Handling of Laser System................................................................................................................... 2
Turn Power Switch ON........................................................................................................................2
Power Supply...................................................................................................................................... 3
Safety of Toner....................................................................................................................................3
About Toner..........................................................................................................................................3
Toner on Clothing or Skin...................................................................................................................... 4
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery............................................................................................. 4

Notes Before Servicing........................................................................................................................4
Points to Note at Cleaning...................................................................................................................4
Notes On Assembly/Disassembly....................................................................................................... 5
Notes on Assembly / Disassembly..........................................................................................................5
1. Product Overview.............................................................................................6
Product Lineup.................................................................................................................................... 7
Host machine........................................................................................................................................7
Option.................................................................................................................................................. 8
Features............................................................................................................................................ 10
Product feature................................................................................................................................... 10
Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 11
Specifications..................................................................................................................................... 11
Power supply Specifications.................................................................................................................12
Weight / Size...................................................................................................................................... 12
Productivity.........................................................................................................................................12
Paper type.......................................................................................................................................... 13
Name of Parts................................................................................................................................... 15
External View......................................................................................................................................15
Cross Sectional View...........................................................................................................................16
Operation...........................................................................................................................................17
Power Switch......................................................................................................................................17
Control Panel......................................................................................................................................17
2. Technical Explanation................................................................................... 19
Basic Configuration........................................................................................................................... 20
Functional Configuration...................................................................................................................... 20
Basic Sequence.................................................................................................................................. 20
Original Exposure System.................................................................................................................21

Overview............................................................................................................................................ 21
Controls..............................................................................................................................................23
Controller System..............................................................................................................................37
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 37
Controls..............................................................................................................................................39
Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................... 49
Contents
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 49
Controls..............................................................................................................................................51
Image Formation System.................................................................................................................. 56

Overview............................................................................................................................................ 56
Controls..............................................................................................................................................59
Fixing System....................................................................................................................................69
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 69
Controls..............................................................................................................................................71
Pickup/Feed System......................................................................................................................... 80
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 80
Controls..............................................................................................................................................85
Embedded RDS................................................................................................................................ 93
Product Overview................................................................................................................................93
E-RDS Setup...................................................................................................................................... 93
FAQ................................................................................................................................................... 99
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................. 99
Service cautions................................................................................................................................104
3. Periodical Service........................................................................................ 105

Consumable Parts and Cleaning Parts........................................................................................... 106
Cleaning Parts.................................................................................................................................108
4. Disassembly/Assembly............................................................................... 109
List of Parts..................................................................................................................................... 110
List of Covers....................................................................................................................................110
List of Main Units...............................................................................................................................112
List of Clutches/Solenoids..................................................................................................................113
List of Motors.................................................................................................................................... 115
List of Fans....................................................................................................................................... 116
List of Switches................................................................................................................................. 117
List of Lamp,Heater,others................................................................................................................. 118
List of Sensors.................................................................................................................................. 119
List of PCBs......................................................................................................................................121
External / Internal Cover..................................................................................................................123

Removing the Reader Left Cover....................................................................................................... 123
Removing the Reader Front Cover..................................................................................................... 123
Removing the Support Cover............................................................................................................. 123
Removing the Delivery Tray............................................................................................................... 123
Removing the Front Cover................................................................................................................. 124
Removing the Lower Left Cover......................................................................................................... 124
Removing the Left Cover................................................................................................................... 125
Removing the Inside Base Cover....................................................................................................... 126
Installing the Inside Base Cover......................................................................................................... 126
Removing the Left Rear Cover........................................................................................................... 127
Removing the Toner Supply Cover..................................................................................................... 127
Removing the Reader Right Cover..................................................................................................... 128
Removing the Platen Glass................................................................................................................128
Removing the Reader Rear Cover......................................................................................................129
Removing the Rear Cover (Right).......................................................................................................129
ii
Contents
Removing the Rear Cover (Left)......................................................................................................... 130
Removing the Rear Right Cover (Upper).............................................................................................130
Removing the Rear Right Cover (Lower).............................................................................................130
Removing the Lower Rear Cover........................................................................................................131
Removing the Cassette 2 Rear Cover.................................................................................................131
Main Unit......................................................................................................................................... 132

Removing the Right Cover Assembly..................................................................................................132
Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly........................................................................................... 133
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit...................................................................................................... 134
Removing the Toner Supply Assembly................................................................................................135
Removing the CCD Unit.....................................................................................................................136
Removing the Platen Glass................................................................................................................139
Removing the ADF Scan Glass.......................................................................................................... 139
Removing the Control Panel Assembly............................................................................................... 140
Removing the Multi Pickup Assembly................................................................................................. 141
Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts................................................................. 143

Removing the Transfer Roller.............................................................................................................143
Removing the Separation Static Charge Eliminator..............................................................................143
Removing the Waste Toner Container................................................................................................ 143
Removing the Drum Unit....................................................................................................................144
Removing the Developing Assembly...................................................................................................144
Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller...........................................................................................145
Removing the Manual Feed Separation Pad....................................................................................... 145
Removing the Fixing Unit................................................................................................................... 146
Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller................................................................................................. 146
Removing the Cassette Feed Roller................................................................................................... 146
Removing the Cassette Separation Roller...........................................................................................146
Removing the Idler Gear (For China Only).......................................................................................... 147
Clutch / Solenoid............................................................................................................................. 148

Removing the Clutch (CL1/CL2/CL3).................................................................................................. 148
Motor............................................................................................................................................... 149
Removing the Main Motor (M1).......................................................................................................... 149
Removing the Fixing Motor (M2).........................................................................................................149
Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Motor (M3).......................................................................................150
Removing the Duplex Feed Motor (M4)...............................................................................................151
Removing the Shutter Motor (M8).......................................................................................................151
Removing the No.1 Delivery Motor (M9)............................................................................................. 152
Removing the Reversal Motor (M10).................................................................................................. 154
Removing the Scanner Motor (M21)................................................................................................... 154
Fan.................................................................................................................................................. 156
Removing the Paper Edge Cooling Fan (Rear) (FAN1)........................................................................ 156
Removing the Paper Edge Cooling Fan (Front) (FAN2)........................................................................156
Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FAN6)................................................................................156
Switch..............................................................................................................................................158
Removing the Front Door Switch (SW2)..............................................................................................158
Removing the Cassette Size Detection Switch (SW6/ SW7)................................................................. 159
Lamp,Heater,others.........................................................................................................................161
Removing the Fixing Film Unit............................................................................................................161
Removing the Pressure Roller............................................................................................................164
PCB................................................................................................................................................. 166
Removing the Main Controller PCB.................................................................................................... 166
iii
Contents
Removing the Reader Relay PCB.......................................................................................................166
Removing the Power Supply PCB...................................................................................................... 167
Removing the DC Controller PCB.......................................................................................................167
Removing the HVT PCB.................................................................................................................... 168
Removing the Option Power Supply PCB............................................................................................168
Removing the Heater PCB................................................................................................................. 169
Removing the RAM PCB....................................................................................................................169
5. Adjustment................................................................................................... 172
Overview......................................................................................................................................... 173
Adjustment when replacing parts........................................................................................................173
Image position adjustment................................................................................................................. 173
Basic Adjustment.............................................................................................................................175
Image position adjustment................................................................................................................. 175
Adjustment when Replacing the Parts............................................................................................ 177

Original Exposure..............................................................................................................................177
Main Controller..................................................................................................................................179
Laser Exposure System.....................................................................................................................180
6. Troubleshooting...........................................................................................181
Initial Check.....................................................................................................................................182
Initial check items list.........................................................................................................................182
Test Print......................................................................................................................................... 184

Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 184
Select the test print TYPE.................................................................................................................. 184
Troubleshooting Items.....................................................................................................................185
Troubleshooting items list.................................................................................................................. 185
Image Faults..................................................................................................................................... 185
Version Upgrade............................................................................................................................. 190

Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 190
Procedure.........................................................................................................................................191
Service Call Request Function........................................................................................................ 194
7. Error/Jam/Alarm........................................................................................... 195
Outline............................................................................................................................................. 196
Error Code.......................................................................................................................................197
Error Code Details.............................................................................................................................197
FAX Error Code................................................................................................................................ 206
Jam Code........................................................................................................................................ 210

Main Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 210
DADF-AA1........................................................................................................................................212
Inner Finisher-B1...............................................................................................................................213
Alarm Code..................................................................................................................................... 214

Alarm Code Details........................................................................................................................... 214
8. Service Mode................................................................................................ 216

Overview......................................................................................................................................... 217
Outline of Service Mode.....................................................................................................................217
iv
Contents
Using the Mode.................................................................................................................................218
Setting of Bit Switch...........................................................................................................................218
Back-Up........................................................................................................................................... 219
Service Label.................................................................................................................................... 219
Details of Service Mode.................................................................................................................. 220

#SSSW.............................................................................................................................................220
#MENU.............................................................................................................................................233
#NUMERIC.......................................................................................................................................234
#SCAN............................................................................................................................................. 242
#PRINT............................................................................................................................................ 263
#NETWORK..................................................................................................................................... 271
#CODEC.......................................................................................................................................... 274
#SYSTEM.........................................................................................................................................274
#ACC............................................................................................................................................... 282
#COUNTER......................................................................................................................................283
#LMS............................................................................................................................................... 284
#E-RDS............................................................................................................................................ 288
#REPORT........................................................................................................................................ 289
#DOWNLOAD...................................................................................................................................294
#CLEAR........................................................................................................................................... 295
#DISPLAY........................................................................................................................................ 296
#ROM...............................................................................................................................................296
#TEST MODE...................................................................................................................................296
Remote UI Service Mode................................................................................................................ 306

Function Overview.............................................................................................................................306
How to Use....................................................................................................................................... 307
Report Display Function.....................................................................................................................307
9. Installation.................................................................................................... 309
How to check this Installation Procedure........................................................................................ 310
Illustrations Used in This Procedure....................................................................................................310
Symbols in the Illustration.................................................................................................................. 310
Checking before Installation............................................................................................................ 311

Checking Power Supply.....................................................................................................................311
Checking the Installation Environment................................................................................................ 311
Checking Installation Space............................................................................................................... 311
Points to Make Before Installation.......................................................................................................311
Option Installation Sequence..............................................................................................................312
Unpacking....................................................................................................................................... 313
Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials.......................................................... 313
Checking the Contents.................................................................................................................... 314

Installation Procedure......................................................................................................................316
Installing the Toner Bottle.................................................................................................................. 316
Installing the Drum Unit......................................................................................................................316
Installing Trays..................................................................................................................................318
Setting the Cassettes.........................................................................................................................319
Installing Other Parts......................................................................................................................... 320
Connecting the Cord..........................................................................................................................322
Initial Settings (Start Setup Guide)......................................................................................................323
Checking the Print Image...................................................................................................................323
Contents
Setting the Cassette Heater (if equipping with the cassette heater)....................................................... 324
Document Tray-J1...........................................................................................................................325
Points to Note before Installation........................................................................................................ 325
Checking the Contents...................................................................................................................... 325
Installation Procedure........................................................................................................................ 326
Card Reader-F1.............................................................................................................................. 328

Checking before Installation............................................................................................................... 328
Registering the Card IDs....................................................................................................................334
Serial Interface Kit-J2...................................................................................................................... 336

Copy Control Interface Cable-A1.................................................................................................... 339

System Upgrade RAM-C1...............................................................................................................342

Cst Heater Kit-J1............................................................................................................................. 345

Checking Before Installation...............................................................................................................345
Checking after Installation..................................................................................................................351
Reader Heater Unit......................................................................................................................... 352

Checking the Contents (For 230V)......................................................................................................352
Checking the Parts to be Installed (For 120V)......................................................................................352
Cassette Heater Unit-37..................................................................................................................359

Drum Heater-C1.............................................................................................................................. 372

APPENDICES....................................................................................................381
Service Tools...................................................................................................................................382
Special Tools.................................................................................................................................... 382
Oils and Solvents.............................................................................................................................. 382
General Circuit Diagram..................................................................................................................383

General Circuit Diagram.................................................................................................................... 383
vi
Safety Precautions
Laser Safety.......................................... 2
Handling of Laser System..................... 2
Turn Power Switch ON..........................2
Power Supply........................................ 3
Safety of Toner......................................3
Notes When Handling a Lithium
Battery............................................... 4
Notes Before Servicing......................... 4
Points to Note at Cleaning.................... 4
Notes On Assembly/Disassembly......... 5
Safety Precautions
Laser Safety
Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam
cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
Therefore this machine is classified in Class 1 laser products that are regarded as safe during normal use according to
International Standard IEC60825-1.
Handling of Laser System

This machine is classified in Class 1 laser products.
However, inside the machine, Class 3B laser beam is emitted and is hazardous when entered into an eye.
When servicing the area around the laser assembly, be sure to turn off the main power.
If you must service while the power is turned on, be sure to keep the followings:
- Do not use a screwdriver or tools that have a high level of reflectance in the laser path.
- Remove watches and rings before starting the work. (They can reflect the laser beam, possibly hitting an eye.)
The machine's covers that confine laser beam radiation are identified by means of warning label (Figure). If you must open the
cover, be sure not to enter the laser beam into an eye during the work.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).
Diese Maschine ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet.
Innerhalb der Maschine wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt und es ist gefhrlich, wenn dieser Strahl in die
Augen gert.
Bei Servicearbeiten am oder in der Nhe des Laserteils zuerst das Hauptgert abschalten.
Bei Servicearbeiten, die unbedingt bei eingeschaltetem Gert durchgefhrt werden mssen, auf jeden Fall die folgenden
Vorsichtsmanahmen beachten.
- Keine stark reflektierenden Schraubenzieher oder hnliche Werkzeuge direkt in den Lichtpfad des Laserstrahls bringen.
- Vor Beginn der Arbeit Uhren, Ringe und hnliche Gegenstnde abnehmen. (Reflektierende Laserstrahlen knnten sonst in die
Augen geraten.)
Die Gerte-Abdeckungen, die Laserstrahlen reflektieren knnen, werden durch einen besonderen Warnaufkleber
gekennzeichnet (siehe Bild).
Muss die Abdeckung geffnet werden, besondere Vorsicht walten lassen, damit der Laserstrahl nicht in die Augen gert.
Turn Power Switch ON

The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control energy saver key.
The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power mode, sleep mode).
Safety Precautions
Control panel
power switch
Main power switch
Power Supply
CAUTION:
1. As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in a fire or electrical shock. If an
extension cord must be used, however, use one for local rated voltage and over, untie the cord binding, and insert the
power plug completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power cord and the
extension cord.
2. The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
Safety of Toner
About Toner
The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
CAUTION:
Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.
Safety Precautions
Toner on Clothing or Skin

If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it off with water.
Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the fibers of the cloth.
Toner is easy to react with plastic material, avoid contact with plastic.
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery

CAUTION:
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950).
CAUTION:
Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr.
Gebrauchte Batterien gem der Anleitung beseitigen.
Notes Before Servicing

CAUTION:
At servicing, be sure to turn off the power source according to the specified steps and disconnect the power plug.
CAUTION:
Do not turn off the power switch when downloading is under way. Turning off the main power switch while downloading is
under way can disable the machine.
Points to Note at Cleaning

CAUTION:
When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that the component of solvent is
vaporized completely before assembling.
Safety Precautions
Notes On Assembly/Disassembly
Notes on Assembly / Disassembly
Follow the items below to assemble/disassemble the device.
1. Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assembling/disassembling works.
2. If not specially instructed, reverse the order of disassembly to reinstall.
3. Ensure to use the right screw type (length, diameter, etc.) at the right position when assembling.
4. To keep electric conduction, binding screws with washers are used to attach the grounding wire and the varistor. Ensure to
use the right screw type when assembling.
5. Unless it is specially needed, do not operate the device with some parts removed.
6. Never remove the paint-locked screws when disassembling.
7. During disassembly, reassembly or transportation of the printer, remove the cartridge if required.
When the cartridge is out of the printer, put it in a protective bag even in a short period of time to prevent the adverse effect
of light.
8. Ground yourself by touching the metal part of the printer before handling the PCB to reduce the possibility of damage caused
by static electricity.
9. When you replace the part that the rating plate or the product code label is attached, be sure to remove the rating plate or
the product code label and put it to the new part.
Product Overview
Product Lineup...................................... 7
Features.............................................. 10
Specifications...................................... 11
Name of Parts..................................... 15
Operation............................................ 17
1. Product Overview
Product Lineup
Host machine
Host machine configuration

Host machine configuration
Reader + DADF (standard or optional) + Printer
Model type
imageRUNNER 2545
imageRUNNER 2535
Print Speed
45ppm
35ppm
Positioning
Target machine: imageRUNNER 3235/3225/2030/2025 Series
imageRUNNER 2545 / 2535

Underlined (2-digit) numeric figures indicate print speed (ppm: print per minute).
1. Product Overview
Option
Pickup delivery / image reading options
[19]
[6]
[7]
[2]
[5]
[17]
[16]
[14]
[1]
[18]
[4]
[3]
[15]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[8]
[9]
No.
Product name
Remarks and condition
DADF-AA1
Inner Finisher Additional Tray-B1
Inner Finisher-B1
Built-in finisher Power Supply Unit-U1 is required.
Reader Heater Unit-H1
Cst Heater Kit-J1 is required.
Platen Cover Type Q
Document Tray-J1
FL Cassette-AJ1
FL Cassette-AK1
10
Cassette Heater Unit-37
11
CST. Feeding Unit-AE1
12
Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1
13
Inner 2Way Tray-G1
14
Cst Heater Kit-J1
15
Drum Heater-C1
16
Power Supply Unit-U1
17
ADF Access Handle-A1
18
2 Way Unit-B1
19
Stamp Unit-B1
For host machine delivery additional tray.

1. Product Overview
Function expanding option

[1]
[2]
[4]
[8]
[6]
[5]
[7]
No.
[3]
Product name
Remarks and condition
Card Reader-E1 or Card Reader-F1
Card Reader Attachment-D3
Super G3 Fax Board-AG1
USB Application 3-Port Interface Kit-A1
Serial Interface Kit-J2
System Upgrade RAM-C1
Copy Control Interface Cable-A1
Barcode Printing Kit-B1
PCL Printer Kit-AF1 is required.
PCL Printer Kit-AF1
512MB RAM should be installed.

In the case of 256MB, System Upgrade RAM-C1 (512MB) is needed.
PS Printer Kit-AF1
Card Reader Attachment-D3 is required.
Color Send Kit-Y1

Color Send Searchable PDF Kit-C1
1. Product Overview
Features
Product feature
Fixing film
- Stainless steel is adopted
for the heatsink to improve
(efficiency of) heat
radiation.
Waste toner container

- User replaceable
High-speed support
Low running cost
Drum unit
- Highly-durable OPC drum is
adopted.
Laser scanner unit

- Capable of 1200 dpi
- 4-beam laser
High image quality

Low running cost
High image quality

High-speed support
10
1. Product Overview
Specifications
Specifications
Item
Specifications
Copyboard
Stream reading, original fixed reading
Body
Desktop
Light source type
LED (white)
Photosensitive medium
OPC drum (30 mm dia)
Image reading method
CCD
Reproduction method
Indirect electrostatic method
Exposure method
Laser exposure system
Charging method
Roller charge
Development method
Dry single component projection developing
Transfer method
By transfer roller
Separation method
Curvature and static eliminator
Pickup method
Cassette: Retard separation method

Manual feed pickup tray: Pad separation method
Fixing method
On demand
Delivery method
Face down delivery (in-body delivery)
Reproduction ratio
25% to 400%
Drum cleaning method
By cleaning blade
Toner type
Magnetic negative charge toner
Toner replenish method
Toner cartridge
Remarks
Toner level detection function Yes

Top margin
2.5 -/+ 1.5 mm
Left margin
2.5 -/+ 1.5 mm
Non-image width (leading

edge)
2.5 -/+ 1.5 mm
Non-image width (left edge)
2.5 -/+ 1.5 mm
Warm-up time
At power ON: 30 sec or less
Number of gradations
256 gradations
Reading resolution
600 dpi x 600 dpi
Writing resolution
1200 dpi x 1200 dpi
First print time
3.9 sec or less
Paper type (Cassette 1/3/4)
Weight: 64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2

Type: Plain, Recycled, Color (64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2), 3-hole punch
Paper type (Cassette 2)
Weight: 64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2

Type: Plain, Recycled, Color (64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2), 3-hole punch, Envelopes* (No.10 (COM10), ISO-B5, Monarch, ISO-C5, DL)
* Using the feeder: 2.5 -/+ 2.0

mm
* The optional Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1 is required.
Paper type (Manual feed pick- Weight: 64 g/m2 to 128 g/m2

up tray)
Type: Plain, Recycled, Color (64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2), 3-hole punch, Bond
(75 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), Heavy Paper 1 (81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), Heavy Paper
2 (91 g/m2 to 105 g/m2), Heavy Paper 3 (106 g/m2 to 128 g/m2), Transparencies, Labels, Envelopes (No.10 (COM10), ISO-B5, Monarch, ISOC5, DL)
Paper size (Cassette 1/3/4)
Standard size (A4, A4R, A3, A5R, B4, B5, B5R, LTR, LTTR, LG,
279mmX432mm(11"X17"), STMTR,EXEC,8K,16K,16KR)
Paper size (Cassette 2)
Standard size (A4, A4R, A3, A5R, B4, B5, B5R, LTR, LTTR, LG,
279mmX432mm(11"X17"), STMTR) Envelopes* (No.10 (COM10),
ISO-B5, Monarch, ISO-C5, DL)
Paper size (Manual feed pick- Standard size (A4, A4R, A3, A5R, B4, B5, B5R, LTR, LTTR, LG,
up tray)
279mmX432mm(11"X17"), STMTR)
Free size (99 mm x 297 mm to 148 mm x 432 mm) Envelopes (No.10
(COM10), ISO-B5, Monarch, ISO-C5, DL)
11
* The optional Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1 is required.
1. Product Overview
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Pickup capacity
Cassette: 550 sheets

Manual feed pickup tray: 100 sheets (80g/m2)
Duplex method
Through path duplex
Acoustic noise
imageRUNNER 2545:
operation: 74.75 dB or less *1 / stand-by: 53.00 dB or less
imageRUNNER 2535:
operation: 71.25 dB or less *1 / stand-by: 53.00 dB or less
Ozone
Max: 0.035 ppm or less
Dimensions (W x D x H)
565mm x 680mm x 806mm (with the platen cover)

565mm x 689mm x 907mm (with the feeder)
Weight
Max (with the feeder, double cassette and 2 way unit):

Approx. 78.8 kg
Min (with the platen cover and double cassette):
Approx 69.5 kg
(80g/m2)
*1 Except for china model.

China model: 71.00 dB or less
(operation)
Power supply Specifications

Item
Specifications
Power supply rating
imageRUNNER 2545/2535 (US):

120 - 127 V AC, 50Hz/60Hz, 9.3 A
imageRUNNER 2545/2535 (Except US):
220 - 240 V AC, 50Hz/60Hz, 4.2 A
Power consumption Maximum power consumption
120 - 127 V model: Approx. 1.690 kW

220 - 240 V model: Approx. 1.827 kW
At the time of printing
120 - 127 V model: Approx. 920.6 Wh(Reference)

220 - 240 V model: Approx. 851.2 Wh(Reference)
At the time of sleep (Deep Sleep)
120 - 127 V model: Approx. 1.0W or less(Reference)

220 - 240 V model: Approx. 1.5W or less(Reference)
Weight / Size
Product name
Width
(mm)
Depth (mm)
Height
(mm)
Weight Approx. (kg)
(with the platen cover)
565
680
806
70 * with the double cassette
(with the feeder)
565
689
907
78 * with the double cassette and 2 way unit
DADF-AA1
565
540
137
7.9
Inner Finisher-B1
416
554
295
12.5
2 Way Unit-B1
444
550
236
2.5
CST. Feeding Unit-AE1
565
650
248
24
Inner 2Way Tray-G1
426
413
109
0.6
Card Reader-E1
88
100
32
0.295
Cassette Module-W1
565
650
97
12.8
Copy Card Reader-F1
96
88
40
0.2
Productivity
Size
A4
Mode
1-sided
Paper
type
Plain paper
Paper basis
weight(g/m2
)
)
64-90
imageRUNNER
2545
Cassette
45
Manual feed
pickup tray
30
12
2535
Cassette
35
Manual feed
pickup tray
30
1. Product Overview
Size
A4
Mode
Paper
type
1-sided
2-sided
(with the 2 way unit)
Paper basis
weight(g/m2
)
)
2-sided
(with the 2 way unit)
Cassette
2535
Manual feed
pickup tray
Cassette
Manual feed
pickup tray
30
30
28
28
Plain paper
44
29
34
29
31
21
24
21
Heavy Pa- 81-105

per
106-128
Plain paper
22
15
22
15
Heavy Pa- 91-105

per
106-128
14
14
14
14
Plain paper
21
14
21
14
15
10
15
10
64-80
2-sided
Plain pa(without the 2 way unit) per
1-sided
2545
Heavy Pa- 91-105

per
106-128
Heavy Pa- 81-105

per
106-128
A3
imageRUNNER
64-80
64-90
64-80
Heavy Pa- 81-105

per
106-128
2-sided
Plain pa(without the 2 way unit) per
64-80
Heavy Pa- 81-105

per
106-128
Paper type
For free size paper, refer to the table below.
Type
Feeding direction (mm)
Free size
148 to 432
Width direction (mm)

99 to 297
Pickup
Usable paper types are shown.
Paper type
(g/m2)
Size
Manual
feed pickup tray
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3 Cassette 4
with the en- without the

velope feed- envelope
er
feeder
Plain (64 to 90)

Color (64 to 90)
Recycled (64 to 90)
Bond (75 to 90)
A4, A4R, A3, A5R,

B4, B5, B5R, LTR,
LTTR, LGL,
279mmX432mm
(11"X17"), STMTR
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Heavy Paper (91 to

128)
A4, A4R, A3, A5R,

B4, B5, B5R, LTR,
LTTR, LGL,
279mmX432mm
( 11"X17"), STMTR
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Labels
A4, B4, LTR
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Transparencies
A4, LTR
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
3-hole punch
LTR
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Envelopes
No.10 (COM10),
ISO-B5, Monarch,
ISO-C5, DL
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
13
1. Product Overview
Paper type
(g/m2)
Free size
Size
99 mm x 297 mm to
148 mm x 432 mm
Manual
feed pickup tray
Yes
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3 Cassette 4
with the en- without the

velope feed- envelope
er
feeder
No
No
14
No
No
No
1. Product Overview
Name of Parts
External View
[2]
[3]
[17]
[1]
[18]
[19]
[4]
[21]
[5]
[25]
[6]
[16]
[15]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[20]
[26]
[24]
[23]
[28]
No.
Part name
[27]
[22]
No.
Part name
[1]
Reader left cover
[15]
Rear left cover
[2]
DADF (standard or optional)
[16]
Toner supply cover
[3]
Reader front cover
[17]
Reader right cover
[4]
Control panel
[18]
Platen glass
[5]
Support cover
[19]
Reader rear cover
[6]
Delivery tray
[20]
Rear cover (right)
[7]
Front cover
[21]
Rear cover (left)
[8]
Cassette 1
[22]
Right cover (upper rear)
[9]
Cassette 2 (standard or optional)
[23]
Right cover (lower rear)
[10]
Cassette 3 (option)
[24]
Manual feed pickup tray
[11]
Cassette 4 (option)
[25]
Right cover
[12]
Lower left cover
[26]
Lower rear cover
[13]
Left cover
[27]
Cassette 2 rear cover
[14]
Inside base cover
[28]
Main power switch
15
1. Product Overview
Cross Sectional View

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[29]
No.
[28]
[27]
Part name
[26]
No.
Part name
[1]
CCD unit
[16]
Registration roller
[2]
ADF reading glass
[17]
Manual feed pickup roller
[3]
Platen glass
[18]
Pickup roller (cassette 1)
[4]
Toner bottle
[19]
Vertical path roller 1
[5]
Drum unit
[20]
Feed roller (cassette 1)
[6]
Drum cleaning unit
[21]
Separation roller (cassette 1)
[7]
Delivery roller
[22]
Vertical path roller 2
[8]
2 way unit
[23]
[9]
Fixing outlet roller
[24]
[10]
Fixing film unit
[25]
[11]
Pressure roller
[26]
Primary charging roller
[12]
Duplex feed roller 1
[27]
Developing unit
[13]
Photosensitive drum
[28]
Sub hopper
[14]
Duplex feed roller 2
[29]
Laser scanner unit
[15]
Transfer roller
16
1. Product Overview
Operation
Power Switch
Types of power switch
Control panel power switch
Main power switch
This machine is equipped with the Main Power Switch and Control Panel Power Switch.
1. Main Power Switch
This switch is used to turn OFF / ON the power of host machine.
2. Control Panel Power Switch
This switch is to shift the machine to power-save mode or to restore it to normal mode.
How to turn ON / OFF the power and points to note

To turn off the power, turn off the Main power Switch. (Conventional shutdown sequence operation is not required.)
After power-off (After the Main power Switch is turned off), do not reactivate the Main power Switch until a screen disappears.
do not turn off the power while download is processing.
Control Panel
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[17] [16] [15]
[18]
No.
Part name
No.
Part name
[1]
Touch panel display
[10]
Stop key
[2]
Display Contrast dial
[11]
Start key
[3]
COPY key
[12]
Main Power Indicator
[4]
SEND key
[13]
Error Indicator
[5]
SCAN/OPTIONS key
[14]
Processing/Data Indicator
[6]
Control Panel Power Switch (Sub Power Supply)
[15]
Clear key
17
1. Product Overview
No.
Part name
No.
Part name
[7]
Additional Function key
[16]
Log in/Out key
[8]
Volume Control key
[17]
Numeric keys
[9]
Counter Check key
[18]
Reset key
Main Menu
Functions
Key
Copy
COPY key
Send or Fax
SEND key
Remote Scan
SCAN/OPTIONS key
System Monitor
[System Monitor]
Location
Control Panel
Touch Panel Display
The Send function is available only when the Color Send Kit-Y1 is activated.
The Fax function is available only when the Super G3 Fax Board-AG1 is activated.
Difference of main menu

imageRUNNER 2030/2025 Series
Copy
Copy
Send or Fax
Send or Fax
Scan
Scan or Direct print
System Monitor
System Monitor
Settings / Registration menu

[6]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[9]
[4]
[5]
[1]
Common Settings
[6]
Copy Settings
[2]
Timer Settings
[7]
Communications Settings
[3]
Adjustment/Cleaning
[8]
Printer Settings
[4]
Report Settings
[9]
Address Book Settings
[5]
System Settings
Difference of Settings / Registration menu

Common Settings
Common Settings
Timer Settings
Timer Settings
Adjustment/Cleaning
Adjustment/Cleaning
Report Settings
Report Settings
System Settings
System Settings
Copy Settings
Copy Settings
Printer Settings
Printer Settings
18
Technical
Explanation
Basic Configuration............................. 20
Original Exposure System...................21
Controller System................................37
Laser Exposure System...................... 49
Image Formation System.................... 56
Fixing System......................................69
Pickup/Feed System........................... 80
Embedded RDS.................................. 93
2. Technical Explanation
Basic Configuration
Functional Configuration
The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional system blocks; document exposure system block, controller
system block, laser exposure system block, image formation system block, fixing system block and pickup/feed system block.
Document exposure system
Reader relay PCB
CCD
Exposure lamp
Controller system
Option
board
Main
controller
Delivery
Duplexing
feed
Fixing
system
DC
controller
Fixing
Laser exposure system
Transfer
Laser scanner unit
Image
formation
system
Pickup/feed
system
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Flow of paper
Flow of signal
Laser beam
Basic Sequence
Sequence at Power-On
Reader
ON
Scanner motor
STBY
Backwarding
Forwarding
LED
Light-ON
ON
CCD HP sensor
CCD adjustment
Print sequence
Reader (Book mode, 1 original)
Copy start
Scanner motor
LED
CCD HP sensor
End
In reading
Backwarding
Forwarding
Backwarding
Forwarding
Light-ON
ON
ON
Shading correction
White board duct detection control
20
Pickup
Original Exposure System

Overview
Specifications/controls/functions
The major specifications, controls and functions of the original exposure system are described below.
Item
Specification/function
Original exposure
Remarks
Indirect exposure by LED (LED & photoconductive body)
Original scan
In book mode
Scan by movement of CCD
In ADF mode
Stream reading with CCD fixed
Read resolution
B/W: 600 dpi (main scanning) x 600 dpi (sub scanning)

(Color SEND): 300 dpi (sub scanning)
Gradation
256 gradation
Carriage position detection
CCD HP sensor (S22)
Magnification
25% to 400%
Magnification
Main scanning di- Image is processed on main controller PCB

rection
Sub scanning di- In book mode: speed change by carriage travel, image
rection
process on main controller PCB *1
In ADF mode: original feed speed change, image process
on main controller PCB *1
Lens
Gauss lens
CCD
Number of lines: 4 (R, G, B, B/W)
*1 Controls differ depending on

magnifications.
Refer to [Magnifications] for more
informat
Number of pixels: 7500 x 3 color lines, 7500 x 1 B/W line

Maximum original read width: 304mm
CCD unit drive control
By scanner motor (M21)
Original size detection In book mode
Main scanning direction: by CCD

Sub scanning direction: by reflection sensor (AB/INCH)
In ADF mode
Main scanning direction: by photo interrupter on DADF

Sub scanning direction: by photo interrupter on DADF
Major Components
Following shows major components of document exposure system.
M21
PCB2
H5
S26
S28
S25
S24/29
S21
S22
H5
CCD unit
Item
Notation
Scanner motor
M21
Pulse motor: controls the carriage drive
CCD HP sensor
S22
Detects CCD home position
21
Item
Notation
Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor

(front)
S21
Ends original size identification with the copy board cover at 5 deg
Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor

(rear)
S26
Detects the copyboard cover open/close.

Starts original size identification with the copy board cover at 30 deg.
Original Size Sensor 0
S24
Helps identify original size(AB, INCH/AB/K, A)
S29
Helps identify original size(INCH/A)
S25/28
Helps identify original size(AB, INCH/AB/K, INCH/A, A)
CCD unit
Indirect exposure by LED (LED & photoconductive body)
Reader Heater (Option)
H5
Prevents condensation on the copyboard glass
Reader relay PCB
PCB2
Controls the reader unit drive and image process
Reader Relay PCB

The function configuration of reader controller PCB is described below.
J503
J501
J504
J512
J511
IC3
J505
J502
J507
J508
J506
J509
Jack No
Description
J501
Communication with main controller PCB
J502
Communication with CCD
J503
Communication with DADF
J504
Communication with DADF
J505
Connection to copyboard cover open/close sensor and CCD HP sensor
J506
Connection to Scanner motor
J507
Receives power from the machine (printer unit)
J508
Not used
J509
Connection to original size sensor (0A/0B/1)
J511
Power supply to DADF
J512
Communication with main controller PCB
Basic Sequence
Basic Sequence at Power-On
ON
( Scanner motor)
(LED)
(CCD
HPsensor)
STBY
B
F
Light-ON
ON
CCD adjustment
Footnote
F: Scanner motor moves forward (toward right).
B: Scanner motor moves backward (toward left).
Light-ON: LED on CCD unit lights-on.
ON: When CCD HP sensor (photo interrupter type) detects.
22
Basic Sequence at Start Key ON (book mode/1 original)

Copy start
B
(Scanner motor)
End
In reading
F
B
Light-ON
(LED)
(CCD HP
sensor )
ON
ON
Shading correction
Footnote
Basic Sequence at Start Key ON (ADF mode/1 original)

Copy start
(Scanner motor)
Dust detection control
F F F
(CCD HP
sensor )
B F
B F
Light-ON
(LED)
End
In stream reading
F
F B F
Light-ON
ON
Shading correction
Dust detection control

This is activated when any of the following conditions is true.
Dust has been detected in all 3 locations at previous 1 job.
Dust detection could not be activated due to JAM etc at previous job.
Footnote
Controls
Controlling the Scanner Drive System
Overview
Parts configuration of scanner drive is described below.
23
Scanner motor (M21)
Reader relay PCB (PCB2)
Carriage drive belt
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor (S26)
Sensor light
block plate
Forward
Backward
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor (S21)
CCD unit
CCD HP sensor (S22)
Guide shaft
Scanner motor (M21) drive signal

Turns on/off the motor and controls its direction/speed of rotation.
CCD HP sensor (S22) detection signal
Checks if CCD is at home position.
Copyboard cover open/closed sensor (front: S21/rear: S26) detection signal
Detects the open/close status of the copyboard cover
Scanner Motor Control

Scanner motor driver turns on/off the motor and controls its direction/speed of rotation according to the signals from CPU.
Main controller PCB
3.3V
CPU
Reader relay PCB

+5V +24V
OPM_ENB
OPM_CLK
OPM_CWB
MOT_VREF
OPM_STB
NOTE:
The scanning speed of this machine is as follows.
Black/white (600dpi x 600dpi):249.5mm/sec
Color SEND(600dpi x 300dpi):173.2mm/sec
24
Motor
driver
1
2
3
4
A*
B*
A
B
M21
1. Forward movement when scanning an image
CCD operation is controlled by the following sensors when scanning the image.
Start position
position
Original
trailing edge
Original
leading edge
Normal speed
Acceleration
Stop
Deceleration
Shift
speed
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Shift distance
[1]Acceleration area: Accelerates until a speed suited to the selected mode is reached
[2] Run-up speed area: Run-up margin to ensure a stable speed.
[3] Image reading area: Reads an image at a specific speed.
[4] Deceleration area: Decelerates and stops promptly once the image end is reached.
2. Backward movement after scanning an image

After scanning an image, CCD moves backward to CCD shading position at a specific speed (249.5 mm/sec).
CCD
Overview
The machine uses the CCD to expose and read an image and the image is read on a line-byline basis.
CCD features 4 lines (R, G, B, B/W) and B/W line is used in B/W copy and R, G, B lines are used at color scan.
CCD overview
1. Integrated scanning configuration; CCD, lens, light source and mirror are integrated.
2. CCD elemental size: 4.7 m
3. Lens diameter: 18mm dia
4. Light source: LED
5. Effective number of pixel: 7500 pix x 3 color lines, 7500 pix x 1 B/W line
[Optical path from LED]
The light generated from LED is reflected by an original and by the 5 mirrors. And then it is irradiated to the CCD through the
lens.
25
LED lens cover

LED (light source)
Photoconductive
body
26
Lens
LED (light source)
mirror
No.4
mirror No.3
mirror
No.2
mirror No.1
mirror
No.5
Lens
CCD
Red (R) line
Green (G) line
Blue (B) line
Black & White (B/W) line
Items
Description
CCD
Receives the reflected light that has gone through the lens and converts it into electric signal to output it.
Lens
Collects the light reflected by an original.
LED(light source)
Light source to expose an original to laser
mirror No. 1 - 5
Return the light
Enlargement/Reduction
Magnifications in Main Scanning Direction
In book mode/ADF mode
An image is read at 100% in main scanning direction. Magnification variation and its data process are controlled on main
controller PCB.
Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction

To vary the magnification of sub scanning direction, the machine operates as below depending on the original reading methods
and the magnifications.
27
1. Magnifications in book mode
To suite the selected rate of magnification, the machine changes the speed of original reading and executes data processing
on main controller PCB.
e.g.) Reduction to 25%: an original is read at 249.5mm/s, and the data is processed for 25% reduction (skipping for 4/1) by
the main controller PCB.
e.g.) at 100%: an original is read at 249.5mm/s.
Operation
Magnifications
25% to 50%
Speed change of original reading (mm/ sec)
249.5
Digital magnification process (%) on the main control- 25 to 50

ler PCB
50.1% to 199.9%
200% to 400%
249.5
124.7
50.1 to 199.9
100 to 200
2. Magnifications in ADF mode

To suite the selected rate of magnification, the machine changes the speed of original reading and executes data processing
on main controller PCB.
e.g.) Reduction to 25%: an original is read at 249.5mm/s and the data is processed for 25% reduction (skipping 4/1) by the
main controller PCB.
e.g.) Enlargement to 200%: an original is read at 124.7mm/s and the data is processed for 100% direct reproduction by main
controller PCB.
Operation
agnifications
25% to 50%
Speed change of original reading (mm/ sec)
249.5
Digital magnification process (%) on the main controller 25 to 50

PCB
50.1% to 199.9%
200% to 400%
249.5
124.7
50.1 to 199.9
100 to 200
Detecting the Size of Originals

Overview
The machine identifies the original size by the combination of measurement result of reflection light from the reflection sensor
and specific points of CCD. Also to identify it accurately even though an original moves when ADF is closed, the machine measures
2 points for each size.
Main scanning direction: CCD (AB type: 8 points measurement, inch type: 6 points measurement)
Sub scanning direction: Reflection type photo sensor (AB type: 1 point, inch type: 1 point (original sensor 2 is not used.))
The followings are the procedures of original size identification.
1. External light search (main scanning direction only)
According to the LED status, the machine identifies the CCD level of each detection position in main scanning direction.
2. Output level detection of each sensor
The machine turns on the LED on CCD unit and measures the CCD level of each detection position in main scanning direction.
Also, turns on the LED on reflection type photo sensor in sub scanning direction and measures the sensor output.
The original size is identified by the combination of these output result.
Control Details
For main scanning direction, the machine moves the CCD unit to the following CCD original detection positions according to the
location of original to measure the CCD level of each detection position. For sub scanning direction, the machine uses the original
sensor 0, 1 to identify sizes.
28
Inch type
AB type
Original sensor 0
Original sensor 1
Original detection
position 1
STMTR
Original detection
position 1
B6
Original detection
position 2
A5
Original detection
B5
position 3
Original detection
position 4
B5R
Original detection
position 2
STMT
A4R
B4
Original detection
position 3
LTR
A3
A4
LTRR
LGL
279.4431.8mm
(11"17")
CCDoriginal detection position
1. 2 points original detection at each detection position

For each point of measurement in main scanning direction, the machine checks the presence/absence of an original with
reference to the CCD output at 2 points near the point of measurement.
* The machine checks if the signal is changed or not from ADF (pressure plate) open to close at both points of 1A and 1B.
Change in the signal: Yes
Change in the signal: No
Judgment is done by the measurement results of 1A and 1B, and it indicates the presence
of original if either point shows absence (absence). It indicates absence
of original if both signals show Yes (presence).
Borderline of
original size
approx 13mm
approx 4mm
1A=additional
detection point 1
1B=conventional
detection point 2
Borderline of
original size
Change
1A
Result of detection
1B
Yes
Yes
Original absence
No
Yes
Original presence
Yes
No
Original presence
No
No
Original presence
29
2. Priority on the front sensor
When checking the measurements for main scanning direction, if the absence of an original is indicated at the rear while the
presence of an original is indicated at the front, the machine will give priority to the indication at the front.
Rear
side
Original sensor 0
Position of
detection 1
Position of
detection 2
Position of
detection 3
Position of
detection 4
Front
side
B5
CCD original
detection position
In case of B5 size original

Position of detection
Result of detection
Result of identification
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Detection Operation Overview

1. Standby state (The following is in case that the AB type, A4R size is set.)
CCD unit: shading position
LED: OFF
Original sensor: OFF
CCD unit
Original sensor
Position of detection 1
ADF
Reader unit
Copyboard glass
2. ADF opened
CCD unit: moves to original detection position
LED: OFF
(External
light)
30
3. ADF closed
CCD unit: in original detection position
LED: OFF to ON
Original sensor: in original detection operation
With the ADF angle at 25 deg or less, the external light is blocked at the original width area. Then, the machine
determines that the original is absent at the points that the external light is detected (external light search operation).
When the original mount sensor (rear) detects [close], original size detection is started. In this case, B5/B4/A4/A3 size
is eliminated at this point.
After external light search, LED is turned ON at main scanning side and the CCD checks the reflection light (4 points).
For sub scanning direction, original sensor detects the size.
External
light
25
4. ADF fully closed (5 deg or less)

LED: ON
Original sensor: in original detection operation
For 2 sec from the original mount sensor (front) detected [close], this monitors the changes of output level of each
sensor. The machine determines that the original is present in the position where the level is not changed.
The machine identifies the original size by the combination of level changes at 5 points (in case of AB type size).
31
5. Standby status (waiting for start key)
LED: OFF
Inch type
ABtype
Original
size
CCD detection position
CCD detection position
1
A B
2
A B
3
A B
4 Original
A B sensor 0
Original
size
A3
11"17"
B4
LGL
A4R
LTRR
A4
LTR
B5
STMTR
B5R
STMT
A5
Absent
B6
1
A B
2
A B
3 Original
A B sensor 1
No change Changed
Absent
NOTE:
Related Service Mode:
Select the following service mode to determine whether to detect the original size:
SCAN > READER > OPTION > USER > SIZE-DET
<Setting value>
0: The original size is not detected.
1: The original size is detected.
Perform the following procedure to switch between AB and inch configuration.
1. SCAN > SCAN SW > SW06 > Bit2
Set the value to 1 about the above service mode, and then turn the power switch to off and then on.
2. SCAN > READER > OPTION > BODY > SENS-CNF
<Setting value>
0: AB configuration
1: Inch configuration
To enable the correct paper selection, change the following setting of the paper size group if necessary.
3. SYSTEM > SYSTEM Numeric > 057
<Setting value>
1: AB configuration
2: A configuration
4: AB / Inch configuration
Dirt Sensor Control

Overview
The machine changes the original read point or executes image correction depending on the presence/absence of dust on the
stream reading glass or the platen roller of the ADF to prevent the dust from showing up in the output. These operations are
carried out only when the ADF is in use and, in addition, is closed.
32
[Control timing]
At the end of a job
Between sheets (for each reading of a sheet)
At the start of a job (only when any of the following conditions is true.)
Dust detected at all points of detection at the end of the previous job
Dust detection failed to end normally at the end of the previous job (e.g., ADF opened)
Main power
switch
ON
WMUP
Start key
ON
STBY
1st
SCAN
Dust detection
control
Dust detection
control
2nd
SCAN
Dust detection
control
[Particulars of control]
At the end of a job (dust detection)
CCD checks the light reflected by the surface of the platen roller of the ADF at the read point to detect the presence/absence
of dust. Presence of dust is detected at points A, B, and C in this order. The point where least dust is detected will be used
as the read position for the next job.
The point selected here will be used as the read position for the next job.
At the start of a job (dust bypass)
Presence of dust is detected at points A, B, and C in this order in the same manner as at the end of the job. Read will take
place at the point where least dust is detected.
33
Between sheets
The machine does not move CCD.
It reads the original using the position determined at the end or start of a job; however, if the presence of dust is still detected
at the position, the machine will execute image correction.
Platen roller
0.5mm
0.5mm
A B C
Stream
reading glass
LED
Lens
CCD
NOTE:
<Service Mode>
(Lv1) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR > DFDST-L1
(used to adjust the dust detection level between sheets)
(Lv1) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR > DFDST-L2
(used to adjust the dust detection level at the end of a job)
Image Processing
Overview
The functions of image processing systems PCB are described below.
Main controller PCB
CCD drive, analog image process, A/D conversion, shading correction (executed per each job), shading adjustment
(executed at power-on)
CCD PCB
Analog image process, A/D conversion
The machine uses the main controller PCB to process images for every single image line.
Specific functions are as follows.
Main controller PCB
Shading correction
CCD PCB (inside CCD unit)
CCD drive
CCD output gain correction, offset correction
34
CCD PCB
CCD(4lines )
Main controller PCB

Analog image
signal
CCD
control
signal
ASIC
CCD drive
control
Analog image
process
- gain correction
- offset
correction
Gain
correction
data
EEP-ROM
CPU
SRAM
A/D
conversion
Digital
image
signal
Shading
correction/
adjustment
CCD/AP PCB
Digital image
signal
CCD Drive
The machine's CCD sensor is a 4-line linear image sensor consisting of 7500 pixels. After completion of photoelectric conversion
in the light-receiving block, the signals are output to the analog front end PCB unit on CCD PCB in parallel for each channel (R,
G, B, B/W) of the CCD array.
Red(R)line
Green(G)line
Blue(B)line
Black & white(B/W)line
Expanse
Light-receiving block
Output
L
L H H L H L
H H H L
Gain Correction and Offset Correction of CCD Output

The analog video signal generated by the CCD is corrected so that it will have a specific level (gain correction); moreover, the
output voltage occurring in the absence of incident light is also corrected so that it will have a specific level (offset correction).
A/D Conversion of CCD Output

The corrected analog video signal is converted into a digital signal that is suited to the voltage level of individual pixels by the A/
D converter.
Shading Correction (Overview)

The output of the CCD is not necessarily even for the following factors even when the density of the original is uniform:
1. Variation in the sensitivity of the CCD among pixels
2. Variation in the intensity of the rod lens array
3. Variation in the intensity of light that goes through the center and surroundings of lens
4. Variation in the intensity of light at the center and surroundings of LED
5. LED deterioration
The machine executes shading correction to even out the output of the CCD.
Shading correction may be the shading correction executed for each job.
Shading Correction
The machine executes the shading correction for every scan made.
35
In this correction, the analog image process unit on CCD PCB digitalizes the LED light reflected by the standard white board.
After the reflected light is digitalized, it is held in the shading correction circuit on main controller PCB as a shading coefficient.
Shading correction circuit compares the stored target value with the shading coefficient. The difference between the two will be
held as the shading correction value for use in correcting variation among CCD pixels when scanning the original, thus evening
out the density levels of the image.
CCD output
Features after correction
Target value
Features before correction
Measurement
value
White
Original density
Standard white plate
36
Controller System
Overview
Functional Configuration
Main controller PCB

SD card slot
Ethernet port
USB port(D)
USB port(H)
Image memory
(SO-DIMM)
Secondary battery
Item
Details
Main controller PCB
System control/memory control/printer unit output image processing control, reader unit input image
processing, card reader interface, image processing for FAX, USB extension hub interface
Image memory (SO-DIMM)
Temporary saving of image data.

Capacity: 256MB (maximum 512 MB )
Flash ROM
Stores system software.

Boot ROM: 16 MB
Program ROM: 128 MB
SRAM
Stores user data / service data information
USB port
USB2.0 device I/F, USB2.0 host I/F
Ethernet port
Ethernet I/F
SD card slot
SD I/F
Secondary battery
Installed only in the machine supporting the FAX or the SEND function.
Secondary battery used for image backup in case of power failure (It lasts one hour when charged
for two hours.)
37
Main controller PCB

J8141
J8109
J8113
J8110
J8106
J8114
J8111
J8104
J8142
BAT1
J8150
SW3
J8143
J8118
J8148 J8115
J8112
J8147
J8146
J8116
J8134
J8125
J8127
Connector No.
Function
J8104
USB port (device)
J8106
SO-DIMM slot
J8109
ROM board slot (for market-related measures)
J8110
SD card connector
J8111
LAN connector
J8112
DC controller PCB connector
J8113
Reader unit connector
J8114
Control panel connector
J8115
SOFT counter board connector
J8116
SOFT ID board connector
J8117
Control card connector
J8118
Serial interface connector
J8119
Card reader connector
J8124
Secondary battery unit connector
J8125
Power supply connector
J8127
NCU board connector
J8134
Pseudo CI connector
J8140
Serial interface connector
J8141
Reader unit connector
J8142
Laser scanner unit connector
J8143
Laser scanner unit connector
J8146
Pseudo CI connector
J8147
NCU board connector
J8148
Modem board connector
J8149
Speaker connector
J8150
USB (Host) connector USB hub kit connection
BAT1
Lithium battery for RTC Life: About 10 years
SW3
Used to turn off the power when replacing the SO-DIMM.
38
J8119
J8149
J8117
J8140
J8124
Controls
Flow of Image Data
Other iR machine
Original
A
Copy
Scan
Image data
Print output
- SEND
- FAX
- PullScan
- E-Mail
- PDL Print
PC
Construction of the Image Processing Module
DC controller PCB
Reader relay PCB
Main controller PCB
Reader unit input
image processing block
Printer unit output image

processing block
Processes the image data

read by the reader unit.
Processes image data for

output to the printer unit.
SO-DIMM
- image memory
- program (temporary storage)
39
Reader Unit Input Image Processing

Reader unit
Main controller PCB
Enlargement/reduction
Edge emphasis
-intensify-to-density conversion
-density adjustment (F adjustment)
-gamma correction
Binary processing (error diffusion)
To compression/expansion/editing block
Compressio/ Extesion/ Editing Block

Main controller PCB
Reader image
processing block
PDL image
processing block
SO-DIMM
Enlargement/
reduction
Compression
Rotation
Expansion
Integration
to printer unit output image processing block
40
Printer unit Output Image Processing

Main controller PCB
Compression/expansion/editing block
Binary density conversion
Enlargement/reduction
Smoothing
To DC controller PCB
Flow of Image Data According to Copy Functions

Reader unit
Main controller PCB
Image processing block for reader unit
SO-DIMM
Data rotation
Data compression
Data expansion
Image processing block for printer unit
DC controller PCB
41
Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function

Reader unit
Main controller PCB
SO-DIMM
Data expansion
USB2.0
Data rotation
Resolution conversion
Ethernet port
(compression data)
To network
Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission

Reader unit
Main controller PCB
SO-DIMM
Data compression
Data rotation
Data expansion
Image processing block for FAX
Super G3 Fax Board
42
Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function

Super G3 Fax Board
Main controller PCB
Image processing block for fax
SO-DIMM
Data rotation
Data compression
Data expansion
Image processing block for printer unit
DC controller PCB
Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function

Ethernet
Main controller PCB
PDL
Rendering processing block

SO-DIMM
Compression/expansion
/editing block
Processing block for printer unit
DC controller PCB
Software counter
The timing at which the count is incremented differs depending on the following:
Printing mode (single-sided/double sided (2nd side) or double sided (1st side))
Target of delivery (inner finisher)
43
Target of delivery
Print mode
Single-sided/Doublesided
(2nd side)
Double-sided (1st side)
Count-up timing
Host machine
1st delivery tray
No.1 delivery sensor (S12)
2nd delivery tray
No. 2 delivery sensor (S42)
Inner finisher
Duplex feed sensor (S7)
Inner finisher inlet sensor (S1)
Fan
Overview
Fan layout
FAN3
FAN4
FAN1
FAN2
FAN6
No.
Name
Function
Error code
FAN1
Paper edge cooling fan

(rear)
FAN2

(front)
Blows air to both ends of the fixing film to cool the sections E806-0001
where paper is not fed when paper narrower than the A4 width E805-0002
(297 mm) is fed.
E806-0003
E805-0004
FAN3
Exhaust fan (rear)
Cools the fixing unit.
E805-0000
E805-0001
FAN4
Exhaust fan (front)
Cools the fixing unit.
E805-0002
E805-0003
FAN6
Power supply cooling fan
Cools the power supply.
E804-0000
E804-0001
44
WUP
STBY
PTINT
INI

(rear) (FAN1)
(front) (FAN2)
LSTR
STBY
*1
Exhaust fan (rear)

(FAN3)
Exhaust fan (front)
(FAN4)
*1
60sec
Power supply cooling fan

(FAN6)N6)
Full-speed
*2
*3
: 1/2-speed
*1:The fan intermittently operates every second.

*2: When the width of the last paper is narrower than the A4 size (297 mm), the fans operate when the difference in temperature
between sub thermistors TH1 and TH2 becomes 20 degree or less. When the width of the last paper is wider than the A4 size
(297 mm), the fans operate for 10 seconds after completion of printing.
*3: The fan operates at 1/2 speed only when the machine enters the standby mode after running for more than 8 minutes for
fixing.
Paper edge cooling fan (rear)/(front) control

Purpose
These fans are used to prevent the sections where paper is not fed from heating excessively when narrow paper (narrower than
the A4 size (297 mm)) is fed.
They cool the paper passed through the fixing unit, preventing it from sticking to the surrounding parts during delivery.
Overview
When paper narrower than the A4 width (297 mm) is fed, the air outlet of the paper edge cooling fan (rear)/(front) opens to blow
air to both ends of the fixing film, thus cooling the sections where paper is not fed.
When paper wider than the A4 width (297 mm) is fed, the air outlet of the paper edge cooling fan (rear)/(front) closes to cool the
paper that has passed through the fixing unit.
Control sequence
1. The shutter motor (M8) is driven and the home position of the edge cooling shutter is detected with the shutter HP sensor
(S10).
2. The opening width of the edge cooling shutter is determined according to the paper size.
3. After completion of adjustment of the paper feed temperature for the first sheet, the paper edge cooling fans (rear)/(front)
(FAN1/FAN2) start operating intermittently every second.
* The opening width of the shutter is changed, the rotational speed is increased to the full speed, or the fans are stopped
according to the difference in temperature between sub thermistors TH1 and TH2.
4. When the width of the last paper is narrower than the A4 size (297 mm), the fans stop when the difference in temperature
between sub thermistors TH1 and TH2 becomes 20 degree or more.
When the width of the last paper is wider than the A4 size (297 mm), the fans stop after operating for 10 seconds after
completion of printing.
45
Shutter (rear)
Film unit
Shutter HP
sensor (S10)
Shutter motor (M8)

Shutter (front)
FAN1
FAN2
Power supply
Internal power supply ( except the Europe model )
+24VR
ADF
Reader relay PCB
+24VR
+5VR
+5VC
+3.3V
+24VR
+5VR
+5VC
Main SW
Reader heater
+24V
Heater
PCB
Low-voltage
power supply
circuit
+5Vcircuit
Cassette heater
+5VC
+24VR
+3.3V
+5VC
+13VR
+24VR
Power
supply PCB
Drum heater
CCD unit
+24VU
+3.3V
+5VC
Interlock
switch (SW2)
+24VR
+24VR
USB HUB Kit
+24VR
Regulator
+12VC
Main controller PCB

DC controller PCB
+24VR
+24VU
+5VR
+24VR
+24VR
Regulator
Option
46
Laser scanner
unit
Inner finisher
No.2 deleivery
unit
+3.3V
+24VR
+24VS
VH PCB
+5VC
+3.3V
+5VR
+3.3V
+5VR
+24Vcircuit
Fixing heater
Modem PCB
+24VR
Regulator
Option
power supply
PCB
+12VR
+5VC
+1.8V
+5VR
Cassette
pedestal
+24VU
+3.3V
HVT PCB
Internal power supply ( In the case of the Europe model )
+24VR
ADF
Reader relay PCB
Main SW
SW drive circuit
+24VR
+5VR
+5VC
+3.3V
+5VC
+24VR
+3.3V
+5VC
+13VR
+24VR
Power
supply PCB
Environment SW
CCD unit
+24VU
+3.3V
+5VC
Interlock
switch (SW2)
+24VR
+24VR
USB HUB Kit
+24VR
Regulator
+12VC
Main controller PCB

DC controller PCB
+12VR
+5VC
+24VR
Reader heater
Low-voltage
power supply
circuit
+24V
+5Vcircuit
Cassette heater
+24VR
+24VU
+5VR
+24VR
+5VR
+3.3V
+5VR
+24VR
Regulator
+1.8V +5VR
+24VU
+3.3V
+24VS
Inner finisher
Option
Connection to Options
Reader/ADF
Inner finisher
Wiring inside
the machine
2-cassette pedestal
The inner finisher is connected to the 2-cassette pedestal with the connectors inside the covers.
It is connected to the ADF with a cable outside the machine.
47
No.2 deleivery
unit
+3.3V
+24Vcircuit
Option
power supply
PCB
Laser scanner
unit
+24VR
Regulator
Fixing heater
VH PCB
+5VC
+3.3V
Drum heater
Heater
PCB
Modem PCB
Cassette
pedestal
HVT PCB
Energy-saving Function
- Press of energy-saving key - Detection of off-hook
- Occurrence of job
- Detection of off-hook
- Occurrence of service call
- Occurrence of service call
- 10 seconds after
completion of job or
network communication
Energy-saving
mode
Sleep 2
Sleep 1
Standby
mode
Press of power switch
on control panel
- Press of energy-saving key

- Lapse of auto sleep time
- Lapse of 2 minute
after completion of job
- Network, alarm, FAX reception

- Press of power switch on
control panel
Standby mode
The machine is operating or ready to start operating with all power supplies provided.
Energy-saving mode
Only the LCD backlight for the control panel is turned off. The machine enters this mode when auto sleep timer is activated in
the user mode or the energy-saving key is pressed.
Sleep 1
The controller is powered but the engine is not powered.
Sleep 2
The controller is not powered.
The sleep 2 mode is transitioned to the sleep 1 mode when the following event occurs:
Start of print job
Press of power switch on control panel
FAX reception
Heater operating condition

Cassette heater
Turning on the environment heater
switch
Reader heater
Drum heater
Standby mode
OFF
OFF
ON
Printing
OFF
OFF
OFF
Turning off the main power

switch
ON
ON
ON
Sleep mode
ON
ON
ON
48
Laser Exposure System

Overview
Specifications/Controls/Functions
Laser light
The number of laser light
Output
10mW
Wave length
775nm to 899nm (Infrared laser)
Scanner motor
Motor type
DC brushless motor
The number of rotation
Approx 27000 rpm/16000 rpm (2-speed control)
Type of bearing
Oil
Polygon mirror
The number of facet
6 ( 40)
Controls
Synchronous control
Main scanning direction synchronous control
Laser intensity control
APC control
Others
Laser ON/OFF control

Laser scanner motor control
Laser shutter control
Main Configuration Parts

[1]
[3]
[2]
No.
[4]
Name
Function
[1]
Laser Unit
Emits laser
[2]
Polygon mirror
Scans the laser light in the main scanning direction
[3]
BD mirror
Reflects the laser light in the BD PCB direction
[4]
BD PCB
Generates the BD signa
49
Control System Configuration

Controls for the laser exposure system are mainly performed by the DC controller PCB and image PCB.
Laser driver PCB
J602
J1
BD PCB
Scanner motor PCB
BD signal
Image signal
Laser control signal
J601
Scanner motor control signal
J2
J208
DC Controller PCB
Main Controller PCB

J8143
J8142
Image signal
Signal name
Function
DATA C+
C laser image data signal entry
DATA C-
C laser image data signal entry
DATA B-
B laser image data signal entry
DATA B+
B laser image data signal entry
DATA A-
A laser image data signal entry
DATA A+
A laser image data signal entry
DATA D+
D laser image data signal entry
DATA D-
D laser image data signal entry

Signal name
Function
CTRL0-0
A/B laser control signal
CTRL0-1
CTRL0-2
CTRL1-0
C/D laser control signal
CTRL1-1
CTRL1-2
50
Scanner motor control signal
Signal name
Function
POLYGON_M_FG*
FG output signal
POLYGON_M_ACC*
Motor speed-up signal
POLYGON_M_DEC*
Motor speed-down signal
BD signal
Signal name
Function
BD
BD signal
Basic Sequence
Initial rotation INTR):After the control panel key is ON, the machine starts the scanner motor and rotates the laser scanner motor
until it reaches the number of target rotation while keepingall laser OFF. Once it reaches the target, the machine enters standby mode. (FG control)
If pressing the start key before the control panel key is ON*, standby time gets shorter after the scanner motor reaches the
target.Print (PRINT)]
When copy start key is ON, the machine drives A laser. After BD PCB detects A laser, the machine performs the APC (laser
intensity) control of each laser. Oncethe BD signal reaches the specified cycle, the machine is ready to print. Image data is output
from the main controller based on the synchronous signal and laser isemitted corresponding to it.
<In the case of A4, 1 sheet>
Control panel key ON
(Start key ON 1 )
STBY
Start key ON
INTR
PRINT
STBY
BD control
Speed down
Lighton
Light off
Waiting in FG control
Laser scanner
motor
Speed up
PVREQ signal
Laser
Light off
Light off
: BD detection/APC control
: AP control
BD
BD
Image per 1 line
Laser A
Laser A
Laser B
Laser B
Laser C
Laser C
Laser D
Laser D
1: BD signal is generated based on A laser light. Only A laser light reaches BD sensor
on BD PCB and B/C/D laser does not reach.
Controls
Controlling the Laser Activation Timing
Laser ON/OFF Control
Laser ON/OFF control is dependent on the combination of the laser control signal (A/B laser: CNT1-0/1-1/1-2, C/D laser:
CNT0-0/0-1/0-2) from the image PCB.
<A laser/B laser>
51
CNT1-2
Laser status
CNT1-1
CNT1-0
A Laser
B Laser
ON (For APC control)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Video signal entry arrowed
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
<C laser/D laser>

CNT1-2
Laser status
CNT1-1
CNT1-0
C Laser
D Laser
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CTRL_1-2
CTRL_1-1
CTRL_1-0
CTRL_0-2
CTRL_0-1
CTRL_0-0
J8142
Main Controller PCB
Main Scanning Synchronous Control

Main scanning synchronous control is operated at synchronous PCB based on BD synchronous signal.
Based on BD signal that is formed from A laser light detected by BD PCB, BD synchronous signal for each laser is formed inside
image PCB.
Image data written in the line memory is read out by the readable signal (RE_A, RE_B, RE_ C, RE_D) according to the 4 phase
differences formed inside the delayPCB based on the BD synchronous signal (BD_SYNCH) and is sent to the laser driver.
52
BD signal
[6]
J8143
J8142
[1]
BD_SYNCH
[2]
[2]
RE_A
[3]
RE_B
[3]
[4]
[2]
[2]
RE_C
[3]
RE_D
[3]
[5]
Main Controller PCB
No.
Part name
No.
Part name
[1]
Synchronous PCB
[4]
VDO
[2]
Delay PCB
[5]
VDO signal process unit
[3]
Line memory
[6]
Laser driver PCB
RE_A/B/C/D
Readable signal
BD_SYNCH
BD synchronous signal
NOTE:
Regarding BD signal formation
Not B laser but A laser only reaches BD sensor on BD PCB. BD signal is formed based on A laser light.
Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light

APC Control
The machine monitors the laser light that is emitted to the built-in photo diode of laser diode and adjusts the laser to appropriate
intensity.
Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor

From when the laser scanner motor starts and the laser scanner motor reaches the number of target rotation to before image
formation starts, the machine controlsthe rotation speed by referring to the laser scanner motor rotation speed signal (FG signal).
During image formation, it controls the laser scanner motor rotationspeed based on BD signal.
Laser scanner motor rotation speed is controlled by speed-up signal (ACC signal) and speeddown signal (DEC signal).
53
DEC
FG
ACC
J208
DC Controller PCB
Laser Shutter Control

When the right door opens, laser shutter will be closed by laser shutter link that works in conjunction with the right door and the
laser light is blocked. Also, whenthe front door or right door open is detected, laser scanner motor and the laser emission will be
turned OFF.
[1]
[2]
DOOR CLOSED
[3]
DOOR OPEN
[1]
[3]
[2]
No.
[1]
[2]
Part name
[1]
Laser shutter
[2]
Laser shutter link (works in conjunction with the right door)
54
No.
[3]
Part name
Laser unit
55
Image Formation System

Overview
Specifications of Image Formation System
tem
Photosensitive drum
Primary
charging
Developing
Specifications/Mechanism/Method
Material
OPC high durability drum (E-drum)
Drum diameter
30
Cleaning method
Cleaning blade
Process speed
230mm/sec (at cassette pickup) 137mm/sec (at manual feeder pickup)
Charging method

AC bias constant voltage control: approx. 550 to 2600Vp-p
DC bias constant voltage control: approx. -400 to -800V
DC bias switch control (variable according to environment sensor detection)
roller diameter
14
Charging method
Brush roller (10)
Developing method
Dry one-component jumping development

AC bias constant voltage control: approx. 800Vp-p
DC bias control: approx. -300 to -700V
DC bias switch control (variable according to density setting, environment sensor detection)
Developing cylinder diam- 20

eter
Transfer
Separation
Waste toner
Toner
Magnetic negative toner
Toner level detection
Toner detection by toner level sensor (inside sub hopper and developing unit)
Transfer method
Transfer roller
DC constant current control: approx. 20 A
Cleaning bias control: -2700V (DC constant voltage control)
DC current level control (variable according to environment sensor detection, paper type,
paper width, source of paper)
Roller diameter
16
Charging method
Cleaning bias application
Separation method
Static separation (Static eliminator) + Curvature separation DC constant voltage control:

-2800V (high bias), -2300 (low bias)
Collected into waste toner box
Waste toner box capacity: approx. 750g
Major Components of Image Formation System

The major components of image formation system are described below.
56
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[14]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[13]
[12]
No.
[10]
[11]
Name
Function
[1]
Toner cartridge
Cartridge filled with the toner for supply
[2]
Drum unit
Unit consisting of the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, etc.
[3]
Brush roller
Rotates in connection with the primary charging roller to clean its surface.
[4]
Rotates in connection with the photosensitive drum to cause it negatively charged.
[5]
Cleaning blade
Scrapes off the residual toner on the photosensitive drum.
[6]
Waste toner feed screw
Feeds the toner scraped off by the cleaning blade to the waste toner box.
[7]
Photosensitive drum
Forms images on the surface of the photosensitive drum.
[8]
Static eliminator
Applies negative charge to the back of paper to cause it separated from the photosensitive drum.
[9]
Transfer roller
Applies positive charge to the back of a paper to cause the toner to be transferred to
it.
[10]
Developing cylinder
Transfers the toner in the developing unit to the photosensitive drum.
[11]
Developing unit
Unit consisting of the developing cylinder, developing blade, etc.
[12]
Toner feed screw (Inside developing

unit)
Feeds the toner supplied from the sub hopper into the developing unit.
[13]
Toner feed screw (Inside sub hopper)
Feeds the toner supplied from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
[14]
Sub hopper
Stores the toner supplied from the toner cartridge.
Image Formation Process

The image formation system of the machine mainly consists of the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, developing
cylinder, transfer charging roller, static eliminator, and cleaning blade. The image formation process around the drum unit contains
the six blocks.
57
Cleaning Blade
[6]
Photosensitive drum
Paper
[1]
[5]
Static eliminator
[2]
[3]
Transfer charging roller
[4]
Developing cylinder
No.
Image Formation Process
Description
[1]
Primary charging block
Charges the surface of the photosensitive drum to a uniform negative potential.
[2]
Laser exposure block
Exposes laser beam on the surface of the drum for charge neutralization to form the latent image
formation.
[3]
Developing block
Causes the negatively-charged toner on the developing cylinder to adhere to the latent image
formation on the surface of the photosensitive drum to form a visible image.
[4]
Transfer block
Applies positive charge to the back of a paper to transfer the toner on the drum to the paper.
[5]
Separation block
Separates a paper from the photosensitive drum with its elastic force and at the same time applies
negative charge to the back of paper to facilitate paper separation.
[6]
Drum cleaning block
Scrapes off the residual toner on the surface of the drum using the cleaning blade and feeds it to
the waste toner box.
Basic Sequence
The basic sequence is as follows.
Sequence of Operation (initial rotation)

Pickup from cassette
Pickup
ON
Main Motor (M1)

Primary charging AC bias
Primary charging DC bias
Laser
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Developing cylinder clutch (CL3)
Transfer bias
Static eliminator bias
58
Registration
ON
Pickup from manual feeder
Multi
ON
Registration
ON
Main Motor (M1)

Laser
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Transfer bias
Sequence of Operation (printing)

Registration
ON
Image write
end
Image formation sequence

(1st sheet)
Registration
ON
Image formation sequence
(2nd sheet and later)
Sheet-to-sheet
sequence
Main Motor (M1)

Primary charging
AC bias
Primary charging
DC bias
Laser
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Developing cylinder
clutch (CL3)
Transfer bias
Sequence of Operation (last rotation)

Image write
end
Main Motor (M1)

Laser
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
[1]
Transfer bias
In [1] above, a cleaning bias (-2700V) is applied.
Controls
Drum Unit
The drum unit mainly consists of the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, brush roller, cleaning blade, and waste toner
feed screw, and is driven by the main motor (M1).
59
Cleaning blade in contact with the photosensitive drum scrapes off the residual toner on its surface without being transferred to
a paper. The residual toner scraped off by the cleaning blade is fed from the toner ejection part into the waste toner box by the
waste toner feed screw. The primary charging roller is cleaned by the brush roller in contact with it.
Waste toner feed screw
Cleaning Blade
Brush roller
Toner ejection part
M1
Photosensitive drum
[1]
DC Controller PCB
No.
Part name
M1
Main motor
[1]
Main motor drive signal
Primary Charging Bias Control

The machine is directly charged by the charging roller. DC bias and AC bias that stabilized the charge is applied to the primary
charging roller.
Photosensitive drum
HVT PCB
Environment sensor
[2]
[1]
Primary DC bias
control circuit
Primary AC bias
control circuit
DC Controller PCB
No.
Part name
[1]
Primary charging bias control signal
[2]
Environment sensor detection signal
Constant voltage control of DC bias and AC bias

The DC bias and AC bias control circuits on the DC controller PCB control the DC bias and AC bias applied to the primary charging
roller to keep their voltage at the fixed level.
60
DC bias switch control

The DC bias output varies according to the environment detected by the environment sensor (HU1).
Developing Unit
The developing unit mainly consists of the developing cylinder, developing blade, toner agitation plate, and toner feed screw, and
driven by the main motor (M1) and developing cylinder clutch (CL3).
The toner supplied from the toner cartridge is fed into the drum unit by the toner feed screw and toner agitation plate. The toner
presence/absence in the drum unit is detected by the developing unit toner sensor (TS1) which is a magnetic permeability sensor.
Toner feed screw
Toner agitation plate
Developing Blade
TS1
Developing cylinder
CL 3
M1
[3]
[2]
[1]
DC Controller PCB
No.
Part name
No.
Part name
TS1
Developing unit toner sensor
[1]
Developing cylinder clutch drive signal
CL3
Developing cylinder clutch
[2]
M1
Main motor
[3]
Developing unit toner sensor detection signal
Developing Bias Control

The DC bias and AC bias are applied to the developing cylinder.
61
Photosensitive drum
Density Setting
Main Controller PCB
Environment sensor
HVT PCB
[3]
[2]
Developing cylinder
[1]
Developing DC bias
control circuit
Developing AC bias
control circuit
DC Controller PCB
No.
Part name
[1]
Developing bias control signal
[2]
[3]
Density setting signal
Constant voltage control of DC bias and AC bias

The DC bias and AC bias control circuits on the DC controller PCB control the DC bias and AC bias applied to the developing
cylinder to keep their voltage at the fixed level.
DC bias switch control

The DC bias output varies according to the environment or density setting detected by the environment sensor (HU1).
Toner Container
Outline
Toner cartridge is filled with toner and supplies to the drum unit.
Toner cartridge
The toner in the toner cartridge is fed to the sub hopper and then to the developing unit by the toner feed screw. The toner
presence/absence in the sub hopper is detected by the sub hopper toner sensor (TS2) which is a magnetic permeability sensor.
62
If the developing unit toner sensor (TS1) detects the absence of the toner in the developing unit, the hopper motor (M7) drives
to rotate the toner feed screw to feed toner in the sub hopper to the developing unit. Also, if the sub hopper toner sensor (TS2)
detects the absence of the toner in the sub hopper, the bottle motor (M7) drives to rotate the toner cartridge to feed the toner in
the toner cartridge to the sub hopper.
If the sub hopper toner sensor (TS2) keeps detecting the absence of the toner for more than the specified period of time, no toner
in the toner cartridge is assumed and the message to replace the toner cartridge will be displayed. Also, if the developing unit
toner sensor (TS1) keeps detecting the absence of the toner for more than the specified period of time, no toner in the developing
unit is assumed and a "No Toner" error message will be displayed.
Sub hopper
Toner feed screw
Route of toner supply
Toner cartridge
TS2
Toner feed screw

Developing unit
M6
M7
M1
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
DC Controller PCB
No.
Part name
No.
Part name
TS2
Sub hopper toner sensor
[1]
Sub hopper toner sensor detection signal
M1
Main motor
[2]
Bottle motor drive signal
M6
Hopper motor
[3]
M7
Bottle motor
[4]
Hopper motor drive signal
Toner Level Detection

Toner cartridge
Sub hopper
TS2
TS1
63
Developing unit
Toner level
Status
Message
Alarm
No
100 to 11%
No
TS2
Operation
When the sub hopper toner
sensor (TS2) detects absence
of toner, the bottle motor (M6)
is driven. Once the sub hopper
toner sensor (TS2) detects
presence of toner, the bottle
motor (M6) is stopped (to prevent toner leak).
TS1
10 to 1%
Replace the toner car- 10- 0020*2

tridge. (Continuous
printing is enabled.)*1
If the sub hopper toner sensor

(TS2) keeps detecting the absence of the toner for more
than 90 seconds after the drive
of the bottle motor (M6) has
been started, a message is displayed in the bottom of control
panel because the system determines that there is no toner
in the toner cartridge. This
state continues during printing
and the toner cartridge can be
replaced during printing. After
the Toner cartridge is replaced, the toner level returns
to 100%. NOTE: After "Replace the toner cartridge."
message is displayed, and approx. 2,000 sheets* are printed, *A4 6% image
Replace the toner car- No

tridge. (Job is stopped.)
If the developing unit toner

sensor (TS1) keeps detecting
the absence of the toner for
more than 40 sec after the
drive of the hopper motor (M7)
has been started, a message is
displayed in the bottom of control panel because the system
determines that there is no toner in the toner cartridge. The
print operation stops. After the
toner cartridge is replaced, the
toner level returns to 100%.
No
When detected a toner with

hopper toner sensor (TS2) and
developing unit toner sensor
(TS1) after the exchange of the
toner container, a signal is notified of. In addition, a toner residual quantity counter is initialized automatically.
TS2
TS1
0%
TS2
TS1
After exchange.
10- 0100*3
TS2
TS1
*1 Toner cartridge replacement warning

Whether or not to display the replacement warning message of the toner cartridge on the status area of LUI can be set in the
following service mode.
#SSSW> SW34> bit4
<Setting value>
0: Not display
1: Display [Default: 1]
*2 Prior delivery alarm
There are two kinds of following detection methods. The alarm is notified at the timing detected earlier.
Detection method 1
64
Set a detection timing. (Service mode> #PRINT> #PRINT NUMERIC> 171)
Detect it at a toner residual quantity counter (total of rotary time of the Hopper motor).
Set it at toner residual quantity 40-0%.
Detection method 2
Detect it in sub hopper toner sensor (TS2).
If the sub hopper toner sensor (TS2) keeps detecting the absence of the toner for more than 90 sec after the drive of the
bottle motor (M6) has been started, the detect.
(Toner residual quantity 10-1%)
*3 Exchange completion alarm
When detected a toner with two sensors (TS1/TS2) after the exchange of the toner container, a signal is notified of.
<Related error code>
E020-0000: The path between the sub hopper and the developing unit is clogged with toner.
E024-0000: The connector (J207) of developing unit toner sensor (TS1) is disconnected.
E024-0001: The developing unit toner sensor (TS1) is disconnected.
E025-0000: The connector (J207) of sub hopper toner sensor (TS2) is disconnected.
E025-0001: Failure of the bottle motor (M6)
Transfer Unit
The transfer unit mainly consists of the static eliminator and transfer roller which rotates in connection with the drum unit.
Static eliminator
Transfer Bias/Separation Static Eliminator Bias Control

DC bias is applied to the transfer roller and static eliminator.
65
Photosensitive drum
Static eliminator
Environment sensor
HVT PCB
[3]
[2]
Transfer bias
control circuit
[1]

control circuit
DC Controller PCB
No.
Part name
[1]
Separation static eliminator bias control signal
[2]
Transfer bias control signal
[3]
Transfer Bias Constant Current Control

The transfer bias control circuit on the DC controller PCB controls the transfer bias applied to the transfer roller to keep the
constant current.
Transfer bias level control

The transfer bias output varies according to the environment, paper type, paper width, and/or source of paper detected by the
environment sensor (HU1).
Cleaning Bias Control

To return the toner adhered on the transfer roller to the photosensitive drum, negative voltage is applied at the last rotation.
Separation Static Eliminator Bias Control

Either of the two types of negative voltage (low bias or high bias) is applied to the static eliminator depending on the print mode
and sequence for reducing electrostatic suction to facilitate separation of paper from the photosensitive drum.
Waste Toner Box

Outline
Residual toner adhered on the photosensitive drum without being transferred to a paper is scraped off by the cleaning blade in
contact with the photosensitive drum, then fed into the waste toner box by the waste toner feed screw.
The waste toner box is supported by a spring. If the waste toner box sinks down lower than specified with the weight of collected
toner, the waste toner full sensor (S17) detects the waste toner box full.
66
Drum unit
Waste toner box
S17
S17
No.
Part name
S17
Waste toner full sensor
Waste Toner Full Level Detection

Status
Detection timing
Detecting to
(location)
Alarm
Warning for full level of waste When the Switch is pressed Waste toner full
toner (Approx. 99% of the full and the total counter value sensor (S17)
criterion)
exceeds 50,000 sheets. *2
11-0010
Waste toner is near full. Printing is still possible.

(Continuous printing is enabled. Prepare a
waste toner container.)*1
Full level of waste toner (Full

criterion)
11-0001
Waste toner is full.

(Host machine is stopped. Replace the
waste toner container.)
When 2,000 sheets are

printed since the full level
warning.
The number of
prints
Message (Operation)
When the Switch is pressed Waste toner full

and the total counter value
fails 50,000 sheets *3
When replacing it for a new waste toner container after the waste toner full sensor detected presence of a waste toner container,
the internal counter for full detection is cleared automatically.
And the warning/indication message on the operation panel disappears.
When changed a collection toner container, the collection toner container part counter ( service mode:WST-TNR)is reset
automatically.
#COUNTER > DRBL-1 > WST-TNR
*1. Warning for full level of waste toner
Whether or not to display the preparation warning message of the waste toner container on the status area of LUI can be set in
the following service mode.
#SSSW > SW34 > bit3
<Setting value>
0: Not display
1 : Display [Default: 1]
67
*2. Prior delivery alarm
When detected waste toner full level detection condition (The sensor detects full level of waste toner and the total counter value
exceeds 50,000 sheets), notify of warning for full level of waste toner (message) and prior delivery alarm.
*3. Special full level detection
When attaching a waste toner container that has been used by the other machine, or the counter information is lost for some
reason, it is necessary to notify full level before an alert is given. (The counter shows less than 50,000 although the sensor detects
full level of waste toner) In such a case, it is determined as full level without an alert and the machine cannot continue printing.
Explain the user that there will be no alert when any of the above is executed.
68
Fixing System
Overview
Features
This machine introduces the on-demand fixing method.
Fixing delivery roller
Separation guide
Fixing heater
Fixing film
Fixing inlet guide
Pressure roller
Specifications
Item
Function/method
Fixing method
On-demand fixing
Fixing speed
Cassette feeding
233mm/sec (1/1-high speed: 0.8% speed-up)

230mm/sec (1/1-speed)
224mm/sec (1/1-slow speed: 3.1% speed-down)
Manual feeding
139mm/sec (1/1-high speed: 0.8% speed-up)

137mm/sec (1/1-speed)
133mm/sec (1/1-slow speed: 3.1% speed-down)
Fixing heater
Ceramic heater
Control temperature
Cassette feeding
225 deg C (plain paper) *1
Manual feeding
180 deg C (plain paper) *1
Temperature detection
By the main thermistors and the sub thermistors (front) and (rear)
Cleaning control
Cleaning sequence control
Edge heat rising prevention con- Paper edge cooling fans (front)/(rear) and sequence control
trol
Fixing loop control
Loop sensor
Protective Function
Main thermistor and Sub thermistors (front)/(rear) Thermo Switch (operating temperature: 250 deg C)
*1. Target temperature is specified depending on the fixing mode and the fixing temperature at the start of warm-up control.
69
Major parts configuration

Film unit
Pressure roller
Fixing outlet sensor (S19)

Thermo switch (TP1)
Main thermistor (TH3)
Fixing hiater (H1/H2)
Sub thermistor (front) (TH2)

Sub thermistor (rear) (TH1)
Part name
Function / method
---
Film unit
---
Pressure roller
Applying heat and pressure makes the toner image on paper fixed (fused).
H1/H2
Fixing heater
Ceramic heater
TH3
Main thermistor
To be in contact with the heater Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise
TH2
Sub thermistor (front)
To be in contact with the heater (non-feeding area) Temperature control, detection

of abnormal temperature rise, temperature detection/cooling control on the edges
TH1
Sub thermistor (rear)
To be in contact with the heater (non-feeding area) Temperature control, detection

of abnormal temperature rise, temperature detection/cooling control on the edges
TP1
Thermo Switch
Non-contact type with the heater To block AC electric power supply when a failure
is detected.
S19
Fixing outlet sensor
Jam detection
70
Controls
Fixing temperature control: overview
Fixing
temperature
STBY
INTR
Flying start
control
temperature
Startup
(warm-up
rotation)
control
temperature
PRNT
During-print
control
temperature
Sheet-t
o-sheet
control
temperature
Time
Command for
flying start
Command for
print start
Standby temperature control

To preheat the fixing assembly to reduce time for starting print.
Flying start temperature control
Print temperature control

To increase temperature to meet the fixing target temperature and keep the target temperature during printing.
Startup (warm-up rotation) temperature control
Sheet-to-sheet temperature control
Down sequence control

To prevent fixing failure due to rising temperature at the edge or fall in temperature. This control causes reduced the productivity
(through-put).
Down sequence when feeding small size paper
Down sequence when switching paper size
71
Standby temperature control

Fixing
temperature
STBY
INTR
PRNT
Flying start
control
temperature
Max. 10 sec
Time
Command for
flying start
Flying start temperature control

Purpose:
To reduce the print time (FPOT) of the 1st sheet
Starting conditions:
When opening the copyboard cover or ADF, and also the detection temperature of the main thermistor is less than 100 deg
C.
When the original sheet is set on the ADF tray, and also the detection temperature of the main thermistor is less than 100
deg C.
When the main power switch is turned ON or the machine condition is shift from the sleep mode to standby, and also the
detection temperature of the main thermistor is less than 180 deg C.
Control description:
The target control temperature is set to 155 deg C and the fixing motor starts to rotate with a half speed. The control continues
for maximum 10 seconds.
72

Fixing
temperature
STBY
INTR
Startup
(warm-up
rotation)
control
temperature
Command for
flying start
PRNT
During-print
control
temperature
Sheet-to
-sheet
control
temperature
Command for
print start
Startup (warm-up rotation) temperature control

To increase fixing temperature to be ready for printing after receiving the print-start command

To set optimal target temperature to prevent fixing failure or offset, and keep the specified target temperature during printing
1. Setting target temperature
Target temperature is specified depending on the paper type, paper size, elapsed time since the last control (including the
standby control) of fixing temperature and fixing temperature at the start of warm-up control.
2. Temperature control during printing
When the paper passes in the fixing unit, the fixing temperature is controlled to keep the target value (see the table on the
next page) according to the detection result of main thermistor.
3. Sheet-to-sheet distance temperature control
To prevent the excessive temperature rise and to save the power consumption, the target temperature is set 5 deg C low (in
case of plain paper *1) from the printing temperature.
*1. Set to 5, 15 or 20 deg C low according paper type
Target temperature during printing
The control temperature is determined according to the fixing mode or to the fixing temperature at the start of warm-up control.
The 12 modes are provided as the fixing mode for the selected feed table and paper type.
The following table is the control temperature when the fixing temperature is less than 55 deg C at the start of warm-up control.
Cassette feeding
Fixing mode
Setting
Target temperature (deg C)

1-sided/first of 2-sided
Second of 2-sided
Plain paper
Paper type 225
215
Thin paper
215
205
S-thin paper
210
200
Envelope
195
---
N1
180
170
N3
142
139
73
Manual feeding
Fixing mode
Setting
Target temperature (deg C)

1-sided/first of 2-sided
Thin paper
Second of 2-sided
Paper type 180
175
S-thin paper
170
165
Heavy paper
165
160
Heavy paper-H
185
180
Bond paper
190
185
OHP
190
185
Postcard
170
165
S-Postcard
195
---
Envelope
205
---
N1
195
---
N3
142
139
N3
142
139
NOTE:
<Related Service Mode>
Offset of fixing control temperature (High and low of control temperature)
PRINT > SW > 62
Control temperature during cassette feeding
PRINT > SW > 63
Control temperature in Heavy/Heavy-H/Bond paper modes
PRINT > SW > 166
Control temperature during manual feeding
PRINT > SW > 173
Control temperature for the second side of 2-sided copying
PRINT > SW > 179
Control temperature in Postcard/S-Postcard/Envelope modes
<Setting value>
0 to 2: +15 deg C
3 to 11: +12 to -15 deg C (each 3 deg C) [Default: 7]
12 to 14: -15 deg C
Down sequence control

Down sequence when feeding small size paper
Purpose:
To prevent temperature rise of non-feeding area in the case of continuous print of small size paper (less than A4 of length in width
direction), fixing offset or deterioration of fixing film.
When the detected temperature of sub thermistor (front) or (rear) reaches 255 deg C or higher for 400 msec continuously.
Operation:
Temperature is reduced by making wider sheet-to-sheet distance with the maximum 4 steps to control the temperature at lower
than the target temperature for normal print.
Fixing
mode
Plain paper
Thin paper
S-thin paper
Step
B4
LGL
B5
EXE
A4R
LTRR
A5R
B5R
EXE-R
Free size
Postcard
Envelope
Normal
26
45
32
20
13
---
---
20
20
20
18
---
---
12
12
12
14
---
---
10
10
10
14
---
---
14
---
---
74
Fixing
mode
Step
Heavy paper Normal
Postcard
S-Postcard
Envelope
B5
EXE
A4R
LTRR
A5R
B5R
EXE-R
Free size
Postcard
Envelope
17
30
21
17
13
---
---
12
20
20
14
---
---
10
12
12
14
---
---
10
10
14
---
---
14
---
---
17
25
17
17
13
---
---
12
20
12
14
---
---
10
12
10
14
---
---
10
14
---
---
14
---
---
Normal
13
25
14
17
13
---
---
12
20
12
14
---
---
10
12
10
14
---
---
10
14
---
---
14
---
---
Normal
---
---
---
---
---
18
---
---
---
---
---
---
14
---
---
---
---
---
---
10
---
---
---
---
---
---
10
---
---
---
---
---
---
10
---
Normal
---
---
---
---
---
14
---
---
---
---
---
---
10
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Normal
---
---
---
---
---
---
12
---
---
---
---
---
---
10
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Heavy-H pa- Normal

per
1
Bond paper
OHP
B4
LGL
Completion conditions:
When the fixing temperature reaches 175 deg C and lower for 400 msec continuously, the productivity returns to normal.
Normal
1st Step
2nd Step
3rd Step
4th Step
Shift (Conditions: 255deg C, 400msec)

Return (Conditions: 175deg C,400msec)
75
NOTE:
PRINT > SW > 64
Setting for down sequence start temperature when feeding small size paper
<Setting value>
0: +20 deg C
1: +10 deg C
2: 0 deg C [Default: 2]
3: -10 deg C
4: -20 deg C
Down sequence when switching paper size

Purpose:
This down sequence prevents temperature rise of non-feeding area: there can be possible fixing offset or wrinkle of the succeeding
paper due to increased temperature of non-feeding area of the preceding paper when continuously making prints or feeding wider
length of paper than the preceding paper.
Non-feeding area
Film
A4R
A4
Non-feeding area
If the temperature difference between sub thermistor (front) and main thermistor or between sub thermistor (rear) and main
thermistor exceeds 20 deg C (*1) when switching to the paper which has longer width than the preceding paper
Operation:
Pickup of the succeeding paper and power distribution to the heater are stopped as well to decrease the fixing temperature.
When the temperature difference between sub thermistor (front) and main thermistor or between sub thermistor (rear) and main
thermistor reaches 20 deg C and less (*1)
*1. It is different according to setting value of the user mode (Special mode S or Rotation/collation adjustment).
User mode related to fixing grade

The fixing grade is affected by some special modes in user mode which change the control temperature or productivity. The
related modes are as follows.
User mode
Summary
Special Mode N
The fixing mode is changed
(To prevent a curl and jam in high when either of the plain/ recyhumidity)
cled/ color/ 3-hole paper is selected in the control panel. The
productivity is reduced and fixing grade is improved.
Special Mode P
Setting value
Temperature control/ productivity
Off
(Default)
Normal temperature control (Plain

paper mode)
Auto
(Fixing grade is improved)
Fixing mode (plain paper mode and

N1 mode (*1)) is changed automatically according to the environment
(temperature/ humidity).
Manual (Medium)
N1 mode temperature control
Manual (High)
N3 mode (*3) temperature control
The fixing mode is changed

Off
when either of the plain/ recy- (Default)
76
Normal temperature control (Plain

paper mode)
User mode
Summary
Setting value
Temperature control/ productivity
(To prevent a curl of thin paper/ cled/ color/ 3-hole paper is serecycle paper)
lected in the control panel. The
productivity is reduced and fixing grade is improved.
Medium
Thin paper mode temperature control
High
S-thin paper mode temperature

control
Special Mode G
The productivity is reduced
(To increase the fixing grade for and fixing grade is improved.
heavy paper)
Off
(Default)
Normal control
On
The productivity is reduced by 4

sheets or 5 sheets.
Special Mode G
The down sequence time is re(To increase the productivity dur- duced when switching the paing down sequence)
per size. The fixing grade is reduced and productivity is improved. (*3)
Off
(Default)
Temperature difference between

the main and sub thermistors to
start the paper feeding: 20 deg C
On
(Productivity is improved)

Special Mode F
(To reduce the wait time during
rotation/ collation adjustment
mode)
Image Priority
(Default)

Speed Priority 1
(Productivity is improved)

Speed Priority 2
(Productivity is improved more)

The down sequence time is reduced in the collation adjustment mode. The fixing grade is
reduced and productivity is improved.
*1. N1 mode: "Normal temperature control" -24 deg C (when the cassette feeding, and the fixing temperature is 100 deg C or
more at the start of warm-up control.)
*2. N3 mode: "Normal temperature control" -48 deg C (when the cassette feeding, and the fixing temperature is 100 deg C or
more at the start of warm-up control.)
*3. The setting of rotation/collation mode is given priority to over this setting.
Fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence

Purpose:
To prevent the dirt of the pressure roller causing the dirt of the paper back side.
When the detected temperature of sub thermistor (front) or (rear) is higher 18 deg C or more than the one of the main thermistor.
Operation:
After completion of the last rotation, the temperature control is executed so that the fixing heater turns on and the toner on the
pressure roller is melted to transfer it to the fixing film. After transferring the toner to the fixing film, the fixing motor is rotated
slightly to shift the nip area, so that re-transferring the toner to the pressure roller is prevented.
This sequence is finished when either following condition is satisfied.
After 5 seconds (maximum 10 sec) from shifting to the pressure roller cleaning sequence.
When the next job is started during the pressure roller cleaning sequence.
Fixing film edge cooling control

When making prints with the paper that the width is shorter than A4, to prevent temperature rise of non-feeding area, the fan
attached near the fixing assembly sends air and cools to the front and rear side of the fixing film.
For details of the fixing film edge cooling control, see Technology > Controller System > Controls > Fan.
Paper loop amount control before fixing

Purpose:
To get a proper image by avoiding a shock when the trailing edge of paper comes out of the registration roles, an appropriate
paper loop is formed between transfer roller and fixing roller.
77
Pressure roller
Fixing film
Sensor: OFF
Drum
Registration
roller
Loop sensor(S6)
Sensor: ON
Transfer roller
This control is performed at every paper feeding.
Operation:
The fixing motor drive speed is controlled as follows by detecting the paper loop between transfer roller and fixing roller with the
loop sensor.
1. The fixing motor drive speed is reduced by 3.1% when the reading edge of paper is fed 35mm from the transfer roller. The
reduced speed is kept until the loop sensor is turned on by the formed paper loop.
2. After detecting the ON condition of the loop sensor for 50 msec continuously, the fixing motor drive speed is increased by
0.8% compared with the process speed. The increased speed is kept until the loop sensor is turned off by the deleted paper
loop.
3. After detecting the OFF condition of the loop sensor for 50 msec continuously, the fixing motor drive speed is reduced by
3.1% compared with the process speed. The reduced speed is kept until the loop sensor is turned on by the formed paper
loop.
4. Repeat steps 2) and 3). The fixing motor drive speed is increased by 0.8% compared with the process speed when the trailing
edge of paper reaches 65 mm before coming out of the registration roller.
5. When continuously making prints, return to step 1). When making a single print, shift to the last rotation.
Protection features
Code
E000
E002
The temperature detected by the main thermistor does not rise to the specified value during startup Yes
control.
Fixing unit temperature rise detection

0000
The reading of the main thermistor is 250 deg C or more continuously for 200 msec.
Yes
0001
The hardware circuit detects overheating of the main or sub thermistor for 200 msec.
Yes
0002
The reading of the sub thermistor is 295 deg C or more continuously for 200 msec.
Yes
Fixing unit temperature insufficient rise

0000
1.The reading of the main thermistor is less than 115 deg C continuously for 400 msec 1.3 sec after Yes
it has indicated 100 deg C.
2.The reading of the main thermistor is less than 150 deg C continuously for 400 msec 1.3 sec after
E003
Low fixing temperature detection after standby
E004
Thermistor disconnection detection error
0000
0000
E014
E261
Error Clear
Fixing temperature abnormal rise

0001
E001
Description
The reading of the main thermistor is less than 140 deg C continuously for 400 msec or more.
When disconnection is detected with connector (J214) for 30 sec continuously.
Yes
No
Unstable rotation of the Fixing Motor (M2)

0001
Detection is executed every 100 msec after the start of motor rotation; however, the drive detection
signal is absent for 2 sec.
0002
During motor rotation, detection is executed every 100 msec; however, the drive signal is absent 5 No
times in sequence.
Error in Zero Cross
78
Code
E261
0000
Description
Zero Cross failed to be detected for 500ms or more while the relay was ON.
* The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
CAUTION:
CLEAR > ENGIN > ERRCLR
Error code clear
79
Error Clear
No
Pickup/Feed System
Overview
Specification
Item
Description
Paper storage method
Front loading method
Pickup method
Cassette
Retard separation method
Manual feed
pickup tray
Pad separation method
Cassette
550 sheets (80 g/m2), 650 sheets (64 g/m2)
Manual feed
pickup tray
100 sheets (80 g/m2), 100 sheets (64 g/m2)
Paper stack capacity
Paper feed reference

Paper size
Center reference
Cassette 1/3/4 A4, A4R, A3, A5R, B4, B5, B5R, LTR, LTTR, LG, 11" x 17", STMTR
Cassette 2
A4, A4R, A3, A5R, B4, B5, B5R, LTR, LTTR, LG, 11"" x 17"",
* The optional Envelope FeedSTMTR, Envelopes* (No.10 (COM10), ISO-B5, Monarch, ISO-C5, er Attachment-D1 is required.
DL)
Manual feed
pickup tray
A4, A4R, A3, A5R, B4, B5, B5R, LTR, LTTR, LG, 11" x 17", STMTR,
Free size (99 mm x 297 mm to 148 mm x 432 mm), Envelopes (No.
10 (COM10), ISO-B5, Monarch, ISO-C5, DL)
Paper grammage Cassette

Manual feed
pickup tray
Paper size switch Cassette
Manual feed
pickup tray
Duplexing method
Remarks
64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
64 g/m2 to 128 g/m2
By the user
By the user
Through path
80
Parts Configuration
Arrangement of Rollers
[19]
[20]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
No.
Part name
No.
Part name
[1]
[11]
Duplexing/feeding roller 1
[2]
[12]
Fixing pressure roller
[3]
Vertical path slave roller 1
[13]
Fixing film
[4]
[14]
Fixing outlet roll 1
[5]
Manual feed pull-up roller
[15]
Fixing outlet roll 2
[6]
[16]
Duplexing inlet roller
[7]
Registration roller
[17]
Vertical path slave roller 2
[8]
Transfer roller
[18]
Tray 1 delivery roller
[9]
Duplexing/feeding roller 2
[19]
Tray 2 delivery roller
[10]
Drum
[20]
Reversing roller
81
Arrangement of Sensors
S40
S42
S12
S19
S6
S7
S5
S9
S1
S4 S3
S2
No.
Part name
No.
Part name
S1
Cassette 1 pickup sensor
S7
Duplex feed sensor
S2
Cassette 1 paper sensor
S9
Manual feeder paper sensor
S3
Cassette 1 paper level sensor A
S12
No.1 delivery sensor
S4
Cassette 1 paper level sensor B
S19
S5
Pre-registration sensor
S40
Reversal sensor
S6
Loop sensor
S42
No. 2 delivery sensor
82
Route of Drive
M9
SL4
M10
2 Way Unit
M2
SL5
M4
M1
CL1
CL2
M3
SL2
SL1
No.
Part name
No.
Part name
M1
Main motor
SL1
Pickup solenoid
M2
Fixing motor
SL2
Manual feed pickup solenoid
M3
Cassette 1 pickup motor
SL4
reversal solenoid
M4
Duplex feed motor
SL5
No.2 delivery solenoid
M9
No.1 delivery motor
CL1
Registration clutch
M10
Reversal motor
CL2
Manual feed pickup clutch
83
Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ 2 Way Unit/ inaner 2 way tray)
Reversing point
Delivery to tray 2
(option)
Delivery to tray 1
Pickup from
manual feeder
Pickup from cassette 1
84
Diagram of Paper Paths (w/o 2 Way Unit)
Reversing point
Delivery to tray 1
Pickup from
manual feeder
Pickup from cassette 1
Controls
Overview
Duplex Feed Control
Fixing / Registration
Assembly
Multi-Purpose Pickup
Assembly
Cassette Pickup
Assembly
85
Area
Detection, Control
Cassette Pickup Assembly
Outline
Paper Level / Presence Detection
Paper Size / Cassette Presence Detection
Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly
Outline
Paper Presence Detection
Paper Size Detection
Fixing / Registration Assembly
Registration Control
Duplex / Delivery Assembly
Duplex Feed Control
JAM Detection
JAM Detection
Cassette Pickup Assembly

Overview
The paper inside the cassette is held up by the lifter plate.
When pickup takes place, the pickup solenoid (SL1) is turned on, and the pickup roller is moved down. When the pickup roller
comes into contact with the surface of paper, the sheet is picked up by rotation of the roller.
Only a single sheet of paper picked up is moved to the feed path by the feed roller and the separation roller, and moved as far
as the registration roller by the pickup vertical path roller.
The pickup vertical path roller, pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller are driven by the cassette pickup motor (M1).
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[5]
No.
Part name
No.
Part name
[1]
Pickup roller
[4]
Pickup vertical path roller
[2]
Feed roller
[5]
Lifter plate
[3]
Separation roller

Paper size of the cassette can be automatically detected by adjusting the position of the guide plate.
Concavo-convex area of the cassette dial is switched when the guide plate is shifted and two Size Switches on a printer are
switched. Length and width are detected according to the ON / OFF combination of switches. As long as standard paper, both
AB type and inch type can be used. However, size should be found manually on the check screen for the combination of A5Rand STMT-R or the combination of B5-R and EXEC.
SW6
SW7
86
Cassette size
switch (SW7)
Rear
detection
rink
Rear guide plate
Detection
dial
Detection
dial Cassette size
switch (SW6)
Side guide plate
Width
Length
Cassette size
switch (SW6)
Width detection
1
Length detection
B5
257.0
182.0
ON
ON
EXEC
267.0
184.0
ON
ON
16K
270.0
195.0
ON
ON
ON
A5-R
148.5
210.0
ON
ON
ON
ON
A4
297.0
210.0
ON
ON
ON
STMT-R
139.7
215.9
ON
ON
ON
ON
LTR
279.4
215.9
ON
ON
ON
ON
B5-R
182.0
257.0
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
LTR-R
215.9
279.4
ON
ON
ON
A4-R
210.0
297.0
ON
ON
ON
LGL
215.9
355.6
ON
ON
ON
ON
B4
257.0
364.0
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
8K
270.0
390.0
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
A3
297.0
420.0
ON
ON
ON
87
Width
Length
Width detection
1
LDR
279.4
431.8
2
ON
Length detection
ON
3
ON
4
ON
Also, the cassette presence is detected when the size switch is pushed. (If no switch is pushed, it is determined as no cassette.)
Setting method when the size detection patterns are overlapped

ASize should be found manually on the check screen for the combination of A5-Rand STMT-R or the combination of B5-R and
EXEC.
Specify the ecognition method for the special paper with user setting.
The setting size is indicated below.
PRINT> CST> CASX> CSTX-UY> Number
X shows Cassette Number. Y shows size category. (X, Y is one of the number 1/2/3/4.)
U-size.
Size
U1
26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 36: A-OFI, 24: FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 30: A-LTRR, 42: FA4, 34: G-LGL 0: default
U2
32: G-LTR-R, 34: G-LGL, 23: K-LGL-R, 0: default
U3
22: K-LGL, 31: G-LTR, 29: A-LTR, 0: default
U4
28: B-OFI, 0: default
Paper level sensor

Paper level in a cassette is detected with the sensor indicated below.
Cassette 1 paper
sensor (S2)
Cassette 1 paper
level sensor A (S3)
Flag
Cassette 1 paper
level sensor B (S4)
Paper sensor flag
Lifter gear
Tray
No.
Part name
S2
Cassette 1 paper sensor
S3
Cassette 1 paper level sensor A
S4
Cassette 1 paper level sensor B
88
If the paper is full
Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A
Cassette 1 Paper
Level Sensor B
Paper
OFF OFF
If the paper is approx.half
Paper
Cassette 1 Paper
Level Sensor B
OFF ON
If the paper is a little
Cassette 1 Paper
Level Sensor B
Paper
Cassette 1 Paper Sensor
ON ON
Flag
Paper tray
If the paper is absent
Cassette 1
paper level
sensor A
Cassette 1
paper level
sensor B
Cassette 1
paper sensor
Paper level
OFF
OFF
OFF
100% to 50%
ON
OFF
OFF
50% to 50 sheets
ON
ON
OFF
50 sheet or less
---
---
ON
no paper
Display
Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly

Overview
The paper in the tray of the manual feed pickup unit is forced against the manual feed pickup roller by the work of the pickup
guide plate, and only a single sheet of paper is separated and moved into the machine by the work of the manual feed pickup
roller and the separation pad.
89
Pickup guide plate
Side guide
Manual feed pickup tray
Manual feed
pickup roller
Separation pad
Pressure spring
Paper Presence Detection

The paper presence is detected by the Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Presence Sensor.
When the paper absence is detected, if there is the same size & same type paper exists in other cassette, auto cassette change
is executed.

This machine does not have the paper size detection detection function. The user must set the size of the paper in the multi
manual feed tray using the operation panel, or the user must register a fixed size in the user mode.Image masking area is regulated
based on the result of paper width detection so that the image to be reproduced does not beyond the paper width.
Fixing / Registration Assembly

Registration Control
The registration roller is driven by the main motor (M1).
In between the registration roller and the main motor is the registration clutch (CL1), servicing to turn on and off the registration
roller so that the paper will be matched in relation to the image on the drum at correct registration.
M1
CL1
Registration roller
Duplex / Delivery Assembly

Duplex Feed Control
On this machine, the paper is revered outside the machine with using the reverse mouth.
Active reverse mouth is determined depending on whether or not the 2 way unit is installed.
Installing the 2 way unit makes the entire paper path longer resulting in higher productivity as the number of sheet circulation is
increased.
Following is the number of sheet circulation by size.
Without 2way unit
90
No.1 delivery tray
Paper length: longer than 230mm
Paper length: less than 230mm
With 2way unit

No.1 delivery tray
All size
No.2 delivery tray
M9
SL4
M10
Reverse mouth 2
2 Way Unit
SL5
M4
Reverse mouth 1
S7
Reverse mouth 1
with 2 way unit
Reverse mouth 2
without 2 way unit
Detecting Jams
Jam Code
Type
Sensor Name
Sensor ID
0101
Delay jam
S1
0105
Delay jam
S5
0107
Delay jam
S19
0108
Delay jam
S12
0109
Delay jam
S42
010A
Delay jam
Reversal sensor
S40
010D
Delay jam
Duplex feed sensor
S7
0201
Stationary jam
S1
0205
Stationary jam
S5
0207
Stationary jam
S19
0208
Stationary jam
S12
0209
Stationary jam
S42
020A
Stationary jam
Reversal sensor
S40
020D
Stationary jam
Duplex feed sensor
S7
0A01
Power-on jam
S1
0A05
Power-on jam
S5
91
Jam Code
Type
Sensor Name
Sensor ID
0A07
Power-on jam
S19
0A08
Power-on jam
S12
0A09
Power-on jam
S42
0A0A
Power-on jam
Reversal sensor
S40
0A0D
Power-on jam
Duplex feed sensor
S7
0D91
Wrong size specified
S5
92
Embedded RDS
Product Overview
Overview
EMBEDDED RDS(hereafter, referred to as E-RDS) is a network module embedded with customer's device, and enables eMaintenance/ imageWARE Remote (Remote Diagnosis System), which can collects and transmits status changes, counter
values, error log and consumable information such as toner low/ out of the device to UGW via Internet.
The following device information / status can be monitored.
Service Mode Counter (Billing counts)
Parts Counter
Mode Counter
Firmware Info.
Device Condition log
Service Call Error log
Jam log
Status changes (Toner low/ out, etc.)
Internet
Firewall
Communication with UGW using HTTPS/SOAP
UGW
Proxy server
DNS server
Intranet
Features and benefits

Since high confidentiality is required for the information shown above, it performs communication between a device and a server
using HTTPS/SOAP protocol.
E-RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front-end processing of e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote
system without attaching any extra hardware equipment.
E-RDS Setup
To monitor a Copier/ MFP with e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote, the following settings are required.
Advance preparations
1. Advance confirmation
Confirm with the UGW administrator that the device to be monitored with e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote is registered
in the UGW.
2. Advance preparations
Interview the user's system administrator in advance to find out the following information about the network.
Information item 1
IP address settings
Automatic setting (DHCP, RARP, BOOTP)
Manual setting IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to be set
93
Information item 2
Is there a DNS server in use?
If there is a DNS server in use, find out the following.
Primary DNS server address
Secondary DNS server address
Information item 3
Is there a proxy server?
If there is a proxy server in use, find out the following.
Proxy server address
Port No. for proxy server
Information item 4
Is proxy server authentication required?
If proxy server authentication is required, find out the following.
User name and password required for proxy authentication
Network settings
Based on the results of the information obtained in (2) Advance preparations, make the iR device network related settings in
accordance with the following procedures.
IP Address Settings
a. Move on to Settings/ Registration > System Settings > Network Settings > TCP/IP Settings > IPv4 Settings > IP Address
Settings.
b. Set the IP address, based on the information obtained under (2) Advance preparations, Information item 1, described above.
For automatic acquisition, select from [DHCP], [RARP], [BOOTP].
For manual setting, set the following by numeric keys.
IP Address Example) 172. 001. 016. 200
Subnet Mask Example) 255. 255. 255. 0
Gateway Address Example) 172. 001. 016. 254
c. Press [OK].
d. Press [Done].
94
DNS Settings
e. Move on to Settings/ Registration > System Settings > Network Settings > TCP/IP Settings > IPv4 Settings > DNS Server.
f. Set the DNS settings, based on the information obtained under (2) Advance preparations, Information item 2, described above.
Select DNS Server Address Settings, if IP addresses are specified directly.
1) Select Primary DNS Server, and then set the DNS server address.
Example) 172. 001.016. 010
2) If secondary DNS server is set, select and set Secondary DNS Server address.
3) press [OK].
If DNS host name is used, select DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings, and then specify the host name.
If a DHCP server is established and DNS Dynamic Update Settings is not applied, reserve the fix IP address to said device.
g. Press [Done].
Proxy Settings
h. If proxy server is set, move on to Setting/ Registration > System Settings > Network Settings > TCP/IP Settings > Proxy Settings.
95
i. Set the Proxy Settings, based on the information obtained under (2) Advance preparations, Information item 3, described above.
1) Select [ON] in Use Proxy.
2) Select Server Address, and then set the Proxy server address.
Example) proxy.canon.com
3) Enter Port Number.
Example) 80 (1- 65535)
4) If proxy authentication is required, press [Authentication Settings].

5) Set the Proxy Authentication Settings, based on the information obtained under (2) Advance preparations, Information item 4,
described above.
Select [ON] in Use Proxy Authentication.
Enter User name and Password, and then press [OK].
6) Press [OK].
j. Press [Done].
k. Press Reset button to quit the Setting/ Registration.
l. Turn the device power OFF/ ON.
Steps to E-RDS Settings

Locations of the user interface which performs E-RDS Settings from the servicemode is as follows.
#E-RDS > E-RDS SWITCH
#E-RDS > RGW-ADDRESS
#E-RDS > RGW-PORT
#E-RDS > COM-TEST
96
#E-RDS > COM-LOG
#CLEAR > ERDS-DAT
#CLEAR > CA-KEY
Item
String format
Description
#E-RDS > E-RDS

SWITCH
1 byte
0: Disable/ 1:Enable e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system to send device information, counter data, error statuses to the UGW.
Default value is 0 (not in use)
129 bytes
(SJIS not allowed)
URL of UGW (default) :

https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
#E-RDS > RGW-PORT
2 bytes
The UGW Port Number by default : 443

Validation: 1~ 65,535
#E-RDS > COM-TEST
Perform Communication test with UGW and set "OK"/ "NG" as the result
#E-RDS > COM-LOG
Detailed communication log displays the last 5 error information, consisting of data,
error code, and error reasons up to now
Max 5 latest loggings retained
Max 128 characters for Error information.
#CLEAR > ERDS-DAT
Reset E-RDS settings
#CLEAR > CA-KEY
After executing #CLEAR > CA-KEY, if the power is turned OFF and then ON, CA certificate file is automatically installed.
The example of the service mode indication screen
2. .H\
(5'6
(5'66:,7&+
(5'6

.H\
(5'6
5*:$''5(66
2. .H\
5*:$''5(66$
KWWSVDXJZGHYL
2. .H\
5*:3257

.H\
(5'6
5*:3257

.H\
(5'6
&207(67
2. .H\
(5'6
&207(672.
2. .H\
1R(FRGH)

.H\
(5'6
&20/2*
Hereafter, the procedure of enabling E-RDS application is shown.

a. Enter servicemode and select #CLEAR > ERDS-DAT, and then touch [OK].
After executing the procedure a. (#CLEAR > ERDS-DAT), install or delete the CA certificate file as necessary, and then turn OFF
and then ON the power.
Installation of CA certificate file: Use SST to install.
Deletion of CA certificate file: Execute #CLEAR > CA-KEY. (CA certificate file is automatically installed.)
97
b. Select #E-RDS SWITCH,and set value "1" then touch [OK].
The communication with UGW is enabled by the above setting.
0 : OFF( initial value): e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote is disabled.
1 : ON: e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote is enabled
CAUTION:
The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT and RGW-ADR in servicemode must not be change unless there are specific
instructions to do so. Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
c. Select COM-TEST and then touch [OK]. This initiates the communication test between the device and the UGW. If the
communication is successful, OK is displayed. If NG (failed) appears, refer to the troubleshooting guide and repeat until OK! is
displayed.
NOTE:
The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the communication log. By performing the
communication test with UGW, E-RDS acquires schedule information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation.
Communication log
(1) COM-LOG
#E-RDS COM-LOG
Move on to COM-TEST by using Left/ Right allow key.
The maximum 5 records logged
Only for the head portion of the error details written on COM-LOG is displayed.
(2) Details of communication log
You can use communication log to verify that a detailed error code SOAP method name, etc. are displayed at the time of
communication test failure.
By pressing ? key or OK key, progressive information (generating date/ time of error) is displayed.
Error details will be displayed when OK key is again pressed in the state line where generating time is displayed.
Error information: within maximum 128 character strings (NULL is not included).
Refer to the error list for the message strings displayed on the COM-LOG.
Initializing E-RDS settings

It is possible to return E-RDS Settings to factory-shipments value.
1) Select #CLEAR ERDS-DAT by using Left/ Right allow key.
2) When [OK] is touched, a confirmation message "OK?" is displayed.
3) If agree upon initialization, following E-RDS settings, internal data, and Alarm filtering information will be purged.
#E-RDS > E-RDS SWITCH
#E-RDS > RGW-PORT
#E-RDS > COM-LOG
CAUTION:
In case of replacing the CA certificate file, even #CLEAR is executed, the status is not returned to the factory default.
When installing the certificate file other than the factory default CA certificate file, it is required to delete the certificate file
after E-RDS initialization and install the factory default CA certificate file.
98
FAQ
Q1: Registration information of an E-RDS is once deleted from the UGW server, and is reregistered after that. If a communication
test is not carried out, then device information on the UGW becomes invalid.
A1: When registration of the E-RDS is deleted from the UGW, the status will be changed to that the communication test has not
completed because related information has lost from a database. So, device information will also become invalid if that condition
will be left for seven days without carrying out the communication test.
Q2: A communication test with the UGW results NG!
A2: On the conditions which have not changed a server's address or port number, the following cases can be considered in the
case where a communication test serves as NG.
1. Name resolution was failed due to an incorrect host name or DNS server has been halted.
2. Network cable is blocked off.
3. Proxy server settings is not correct.
Q3: Let me know the interval of data transmitting from E-RDS to the UGW, and what data size is sent to the UGW?
A3: The schedule of data transmitting, the start time are determined by settings in the UGW side. The timing is once per 16 hours
by default, and counter data volume could be maximum 250 bytes.
Q4: Does error-retry carry out at the time of a communication error with the UGW?
A4: The retry of SOAP communication is performed as follows. As for postAlert data, three times of data which failed transmitting
to the UGW by some external causes can be stored in RAMDISK, and will be resent at the predetermined intervals. Moreover,
the data which failed in transmission is resent at the predetermined intervals at the time of SOAP transmitting error generating
at the time of a jam log and service call log transmission.
Q5: How many log-data can be stored?
A5: Up to 5 log records can be accumulated. The data size of error information is maximum 128 bytes.
Q6: Although Microsoft ISA as a proxy server is introduced, the authentication check is failed. Can E-RDS adopt with Microsoft
ISA?
A6: "Integrated" authentication is used for Microsoft ISA though, E-RDS must comply with "Basic." Therefore if you can change
to "Basic" authentication on the server, the authentication with E-RDS can be done.
Q7: Can I turn the device power off during the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system operation?
A7: While operating the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system, the power of the device must be ON. If power OFF is
needed, do not leave the device power OFF for long time. It will become "Device is busy, try later" errors if the power supply of
network equipment such as HUB is made prolonged OFF.
Q8: Describe about the behavior of E-RDS while enabling the Real Deep Sleep functionality.
A8: While being in Real Deep Sleep, and if data to be sent is in E-RDS, the system wakes up asleep, then starts to send the data
to the UGW. The system also waits for completion of data transmission and let the device to shift to asleep status again. However,
transition time to the Real Deep Sleep depends on the device, and the transition to sleep won't be done if the next data
transmission will be done within 10 minutes.
Q9: Is E-RDS compatible with Section counter (Department counter)?
A9: No, E-RDS does not support Section counter.
Q10: Is E-RDS operation possible to a device which used IPv6?
A10: It depends on UGW side, however IPv6 has not been supported by UGW3.0.
Troubleshooting
When the communication test with UGW is NG, trouble shooting is performed according to the following steps.
No.1 A communication test (COM-TEST) results NG
99
Causes: Initial settings or network conditions is incomplete.
Remedy1:
1. Check network connections
Is the status indicator LED for the HUB port to which the main unit is connected ON?
YES: Proceed to Step 2).
NO: Check that the network cable is properly connected.
2. Confirm loop back address
a) Settings/ Registration > System Settings > Network Settings > TCP/ IP Settings > IPv4 Settings > PING Command. Input
127.0.0.1, and touch the Start button.
Is the response from the host displayed?

NO: There is a possibility that the main unit's network settings are wrong. Check the details of the IPv4 settings once more.
3. Confirmation from another PC connected to same network.
a) Request the user to ping the main unit from a PC connected to same network.
Does the main unit respond?
NO: Confirm the details of the main unit's IP address and subnet mask settings.
4. Confirm DNS connection
a) Settings/ Registration > System Settings > Network Settings > TCP/ IP Settings > IPv4 Settings > DNS Server > DNS
Server Address Settings, and note down both the primary and secondary DNS server addresses.
b) Press Reset key.
c) Settings/ Registration > System Settings > Network Settings > TCP/ IP Settings > IPv4 Settings > PING command. Input
the primary DNS server noted down in step a) as the IP address, and then touch Start.
YES: Proceed to Remedy2.
NO: Input the secondary DNS server noted down in step a) as the IP address, and then touch Start.
YES: Proceed to Remedy2.
NO: There is a possibility that the DNS server address is wrong. Reconfirm the
address with the user's system administrator.
Remedy2: Troubleshooting using communication log
a) Enter Servicemode > #E-RDS > COM-LOG, and the following communication log will be displayed. Maximum 5 records are
logged.
No:1 Ecode:840F2003
2009 01/09 17:27
b) Select a log line and touch OK, then move on to log details.
100
*Network is not rea
dy , try later : get
No.2 A communication test results NG! even if network setting is set properly.
Cause: No proper firmware has been installed, or E-RDS settings have not been completed.
Remedy: The following points should be checked.
1. Check the firmware compatibility of device.
2. Check network conditions such as proxy server settings and so on.
3. Check E-RDS setting.
a) Check the communication log from COM-LOG.
b) If RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT setting has changed, restore default value by Servicemode > #CLEAR > ERDS-DAT.
c) If CA certificate file has changed, restore the original certificate file installed at the factory shipment to the device by using
a service support tool.
No.3 There was a log, indicating "Network is not ready, try later (No.22)" in error details of COM-LOG list.
Causes: A certain problem occurred in networking.
Remedy: Check and take actions mentioned below.
1. Check networking conditions and connections.
2. Turn on the power supply of a device and perform a communication test (Servicemode > #E-RDS > COM-TEST about 60
seconds later.
No.4 "Unknown error" is displayed though a communication test has done successfully.
Causes: A certain problem was in the server side, or possibly a network load has been added.
Remedy: The following points should be checked.
1. Change data transmission schedules, and then see how things going.
2. Try again after a period of time. If the same error persists, check the UGW status with a network and UGW administrator.
Error code and strings

The error information appeared to a communication test log is as follows. ( Here, "server" means UGW)
By error list, error No.1 and No.2 display only an error character strings.
Error No 3 henceforth, these are displayed in the following form.
[*][Error character strings] : [Method name] [Server side detailed error]
*: Error character strings head "*" is added to the error generated by the communication
test.
No.
Code
Error character strings
Causes
Remedy
0500 0003 SUSPEND: Communication test is not

performed.
The communication test had not been Select and perform Servicemode >
performed, though E-RDS is enabled. #E-RDS > COM-TEST.
0xxx 00f2 Event Registration is Failed
Processing (event processing) within

the device has failed.
8xxx 2001 URL Scheme error(not https)
The header of the URL of the registered Check that the value of Service
UGW is not in https format.
mode > #E-RDS > RGW-ADR is
https://a01. ugwdevice.net/ugw/
agentif010.
8xxx 200A Server connection error
Displayed in the event of a TCP/IP com- Check the network connection, as

munication fault. Also displayed when per the initial procedures described
an attempt is made at communication in the troubleshooting.
with the device IP address not set.
8xxx 2002 URL server specified is illegal
A URL different to that specified by the Check that the value of Service
UGW has been set.
mode > #E-RDS > RGW-ADR can
be https:// a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/
agentif010.
8xxx 2014 Proxy connection error
Could not connect to proxy server due Check proxy server address and
to improper address.
re- enter as needed.
8xxx 201E Proxy authentication error
Proxy authentication is failed.
101
Turn the device OFF/ ON. If the error persists, replace the device system software. (Upgrade)
Check the user name and password required in order to login to

the proxy, and re-enter as needed.
No.
Code
Causes
Remedy
8xxx 2015 Proxy address resolution error
Could not connect to proxy server due Check that the proxy server name
to name resolution error.
is correct. If the proxy server name
is correct, check the DNS connection, as per the troubleshooting initial procedures.
8xxx 2028 Server certificate error
No route certificate installed in device. Install the latest device system soft- Certificate other than that initially reg- ware. (Upgrade)
istered in the user's operating environment is being used, but has not been
registered with the device
10
8xxx 2029 Server certificate verify error
The server certificate verification error Check that Service mode > #Eoccurred. (URL check error)
RDS > RGW-ADDRESS can be
https:// a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/
agentif010.is correct.
11
8xxx 2046 Server certificate expired
The device time and date is outside of

the certificated period.-T he route certificate registered with the device has
expired. Certificate other than that initially registered in the user's operating
environment is being used, but has not
been registered with the device.
12
8xxx 2000 Unknown error
Some other kind of communication er- Try again after a period of time. If
ror has occurred.
persists, check the UGW status
with the UGW administrator.
13
8xxx 2063 SOAP Fault
SOAP communication error has occur- Check that the value of Service
red.
mode > #E-RDS > RGW-PORT
can be 443.
14
8xxx 2004 Server response error (NULL)
Displayed when communication with

UGW has been successful, but an error
of some sort has prevented UGW from
responding. When (Null) is displayed at
the end of the message, this indicates
that there has been an error in the
HTTPS communication method.
Try again after a period of time. If

the same error occurs again, check
the UGW status with the UGW administrator.
15
8xxx 2004 Server response error (Hexadecimal])

[Error details in UGW ] *1
Displayed when communication with

UGW has been successful, but an error
of some sort has prevented UGW from
responding.(Hexadecimal) displayed at
the end of the message is an error code
returned by UGW. In the case of this
kind of error only, [Server detailed error]
is displayed at the end of the error information.
Try again after a period of time and

also check detailed error code
(hexadecimal) from UGW displayed after the message.
16
8xxx 0101 Device internal error

- 0A01
An internal error, such as memory un- Switch the device power OFF/ ON
available, etc., has occurred during a or replace the device system softdevice internal error phase.
ware. (Upgrade)
17
8xxx
02010204,
0206
During the communication test, there

has been some kind of error in the
schedule values passed from UGW.
18
8xxx 2047 Server response time out
Due to network congestion, etc., the re- If this error occurs when the comsponse from UGW does not come with- munication test is being run, wait
in the specified time. (HTTPS level time some time and run the test again.
out)
19
8xxx 2048 Service not found
There is a mistake in the UGW URL,

Check that the value of Service
and UGW cannot be accessed. (Path is mode > Function > Install > RGWwrong)
ADDRESS can be https://
a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/ agentif010
20
8xxx 0003 E-RDS switch is set OFF
A communication test has been attemp- Set Service mode > #E-RDS > Eted with the E-RDS switch being OFF RDS SWITCH to 1, and then run
Service mode > Function > Install >
COM- TEST.
Server schedule is invalid
102
Check that the device time and

date are correctly set. If the device
time and date are correct, upgrade
to the latest system software.
When the error occurs, report the

details to the support section, then,
after the UGW side has responded,
try the communication test again.
No.
Code
Causes
Remedy
21
8xxx 0003 Server schedule is not exist
Blank schedule data have been received from UGW.
Check the device settings status

with the UGW administrator.
22
8xxx 2003 Network is not ready, try later
Communication attempted without confirming network connection, just after

booting up a device in which the network preparations are not ready. (Network connection not established within
60 seconds of device boot up.)
Check the network connection, as

per the troubleshooting initial procedures. Run Service mode > #ERDS > COM- TEST about 60 seconds after turn on the device.
23
8xxx 2052 URL error
The data which is not URL is inputted

into URL field.
Check Servicemode > #E-RDS

RGW-ADDRESS can be https://
a01. ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010. If not, enter the correct URL
strings in URL description field.
24
8xxx 200B Server address resolution error
Server address name resolution has

failed.
Check Servicemode > #E-RDS >

RGW-ADDRESS can be https://
a01. ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010.
25
0xxx 0003 Communication test is not performed
Communication test has not completed Perform and complete a communication test.
26
8xxx 0221 Server specified list is too big
Alert filtering error: The number of ele- The number of elements of alert filments of the list specified by the server tering is specified correctly.
is over restriction value.
27
8xxx 0222 Server specified list is wrong
Alert filtering error: Unjust value is in- The element of alert filtering is
cluded in the element of the list speci- specified with the right value.
fied by the server.
28
xxxx xxxx SUSPEND: Initialize Failure!
Internal error occurred at the initiating

E-RDS.
29
8300 0306 SRAM version unmatched!
Improper value is written in at the head Turn the device power OFF/ ON.
of SRAM domain of E-RDS.
30
8xxx 0304 Device is busy, try later
The semaphore consumption error at

the time of a communication test.
Wait a while then rerun the test.
31
8xxx 0207 Internal Schedule is broken

- 0208
The schedule data in the inside of ERDS is not right.
Perform a communication test.
32
8xxx 0004 Operation is not supported
Method which E-RDS is not supporting Contact help desk

attempted.
Turn the device power OFF/ ON.
*1. [Hexadecimal ] indicates an error code returned from UGW.

[Error strings]: indicates error details returned from UGW.
Com-Log Report
The report output of the communication error logging information on five affairs can be carried out.
#REPORT > #REPORT OUTPUT > ERDS COM LOG LIST
Output sample
103
01/17 2009 10:14
***********************
*** E-RDS-COM-LOG ***
***********************
No.01 DATE 05 18 2009 TIME 03:21 CODE 05000003
Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed.
No.02 DATE 05 18 2009 TIME 03:21 CODE 00000000
Information SUNSEND: mode changed.
No.03 DATE 05 18 2009 TIME 03:18 CODE 05000003
No.04 DATE 05 18 2009 TIME 03:18 CODE 00000000
Information SUNSEND: mode changed.
No.05 DATE 05 18 2009 TIME 01:56 CODE 05000003
Service cautions
After performing the following service activities it is necessary to perform Service mode
#CLEAR > ERDS-DAT and #E-RDS.
Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become unusual.
System upgrade
HDD format and system installation
COPIER > Function > Clear > MN-CONT
Also, after replacing the main controller board, all settings must be reprogrammed.
The following settings in service mode must not be change unless there are specific
instructions to do so. Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
Service mode
Default
#E-RDS > RGW-PORT
443
https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
104
Periodical Service
Consumable Parts and Cleaning
Parts.............................................. 106
Cleaning Parts...................................108
3. Periodical Service
Consumable Parts and Cleaning Parts

: Replaced (consumables) : Cleaned
N
o.
System
Items
Parts
No.
Q't
y
iR254
5/
2535
1
Counter
Remarks
Reference
80,00 120,00 150,00 240,00 500,00

0
0
0
0
0
sheet sheets sheets sheet sheets
s
s
Waste FM3toner
9276
container
Transfer
guide
Trans- FC9fer roller 0693
DRBL- TR-ROLL
1
Removing the
Transfer Roller
on page 143
Separa- FM3tion
9296
static
charge
eliminator
DRBL- SP-SC-EL
1
Removing the
Separation Static Charge Eliminator on page
143
Devel- FM3oping
9263
assembly
DRBL- DVG-CYL
1
Removing the
Developing Assembly on page
144
Image
formation
system
Interval
Fixing Fixing
system inlet
guide
Fixing
unit
(For
iR2545/
2535)
Pickup Casfeed
sette
system pickup
roller
DRBL- WST-TNR Defined by

1
6% document
FM41
3363(1
20V)
FM39302(2
30V)
Removing the
Waste Toner
Container on
page 143
Wipe with dry cloth.
Wipe with dry cloth. If dirt

cannot come
off, wipe it
with alcohol.
DRBL- FX-UNIT
1
Removing the
Fixing Unit on
page 146
FB63405
FC79381
(For
CHN )
*1
or 2
DRBL- C1-PU1
RL, C2PU-RL,
C3-PURL, C4PU-RL
*: Quantity
indicates
number of
cassette.
Removing the
Cassette Pickup
Roller on page
146
FC67083
FC79502
(For
CHN )
*1
or 2
DRBL- 1
Replace with
cassette
separation
pad.
*: Quantity
indicates
number of
cassette.
Removing the
Cassette Feed
Roller on page
146
*1
or 2
DRBL- C1-SP1
RL, C2SP-RL,
C3-SPRL, C4SP-RL
*: Quantity
indicates
number of
cassette.
Removing the
Cassette Separation Roller on
page 146
Cassette
feed
roller
10
CasFC6sette
6661
separation roller
106
N
o.
System
Items
Parts
No.
Q't
y
iR254
5/
2535
Interval
Counter
Remarks
Reference
80,00 120,00 150,00 240,00 500,00

0
0
0
0
0
sheet sheets sheets sheet sheets
s
s
11 Pickup CasFU3feed
sette id- 0280
system ler gear
(Only
for China)
*1
or 2
12
Manual FL3feed
1352
pickup
roller
DRBL- M-PU-RL
1
Removing the
Manual Feed
Pickup Roller
on page 145
13
Manual FL3feed
3469
separation pad
DRBL- M-SP-PD
1
Removing the
Manual Feed
Separation Pad
on page 145
DRBL- 1
*: Quantity
indicates
number of
cassette.
[1]
[2]
[6]
[4]
[7]
[8]
[12]
[10]
[11]
[5]
[9]
[3]
No.
Part name
No.
Part name
[1]
Transfer roller
[7]
Manual feed separation pad
[2]
Separation static eliminator
[8]
Fixing unit
[3]
Waste toner container
[9]
Cassette pickup roller
[4]
Drum unit
[10]
Cassette feed roller
[5]
Developing assembly
[11]
Cassette separation roller
[6]
[12]
Idler gear (for China)
107
Removing the
Idler Gear (For
China Only) on
page 147
Cleaning Parts
Fixing
guide
Transfer
guide
108
Disassembly/
Assembly
List of Parts....................................... 110
External / Internal Cover................... 123
Main Unit........................................... 132
Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable
Parts,Cleaning Parts......................143
Clutch / Solenoid............................... 148
Motor................................................. 149
Fan.................................................... 156
Switch................................................158
Lamp,Heater,others.......................... 161
PCB...................................................166
4. Disassembly/Assembly
List of Parts
List of Covers
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[14]
[13]
[7]
[12]
[8]
[11]
[9]
[10]
Symbol
Part name
Reference
[1]
Reader Left Cover
Removing the Reader Left Cover on page 123
[2]
DADF (Optional or Standard)
[3]
Reader Front Cover
Removing the Reader Front Cover on page 123
[4]
Control Panel
[5]
Support Cover
Removing the Support Cover on page 123
[6]
Delivery Tray
Removing the Delivery Tray on page 123
[7]
Front Cover
Removing the Front Cover on page 124
[8]
Cassette 1
[9]
Cassette 2 (Only for the Cassette 2 standard

model)
[10]
Lower Left Cover
Removing the Lower Left Cover on page 124
[11]
Left Cover
Removing the Left Cover on page 125
[12]
Inside Base Cover
Removing the Inside Base Cover on page 126
[13]
Rear Left Cover
Removing the Left Rear Cover on page 127
[14]
Toner Supply Cover
Removing the Toner Supply Cover on page 127
110
[16]
[15]
[17]
[23]
[18]
[22]
[24]
[20]
[19]
[25]
[21]
Symbol
Part name
Reference
[15]
Reader Right Cover
Removing the Reader Right Cover on page 128
[16]
Platen Glass
Removing the Platen Glass on page 128
[17]
Reader Rear Cover
Removing the Reader Rear Cover on page 129
[18]
Rear Cover (Right)
Removing the Rear Cover (Right) on page 129
[19]
Rear Cover (Left)
Removing the Rear Cover (Left) on page 130
[20]
Right Cover (Upper Rear)
Removing the Rear Right Cover (Upper) on page 130
[21]
Right Cover (Lower Rear)
Removing the Rear Right Cover (Lower) on page 130
[22]
Multi Pickup Assembly
[23]
Right Cover
Removing the Right Cover Assembly on page 132
[24]
Lower Rear Cover
Removing the Lower Rear Cover on page 131
[25]
Cassette 2 Rear Cover
Removing the Cassette 2 Rear Cover on page 131
111
List of Main Units

[6]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[10]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Symbol
Part name
Reference
[1]
Right Cover Assembly
Removing the Right Cover Assembly on page 132
[2]
Casstte Pickup Assembly
Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly on page 133
[3]
Laser Scanner Unit
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit on page 134
[4]
Toner Supply Assembly
Removing the Toner Supply Assembly on page 135
[5]
CCD Unit
Removing the CCD Unit on page 136
[6]
No.2 Deleivery Assembly
[7]
Platen Glass
Removing the Platen Glass on page 139
[8]
ADF scan glass
Removing the ADF Scan Glass on page 139
[9]
Control Panel Assembly
Removing the Control Panel Assembly on page 140
[10]
Multi Pickup Assembly
Removing the Multi Pickup Assembly on page 141
112
List of Clutches/Solenoids
CL2
CL3
CL1
Symbol
Part name
Main unit
Reference
CL1
Registration Clutch
Removing the Clutch (CL1/CL2/CL3) on page 148
CL2
Manual Feed Pickup Clutch
CL3
Developing Cylinder Clutch
113
SL4
SL5
SL2
SL1
Symbol
Part name
Main unit
Reference
SL1
Pickup Solenoid
SL2
Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid
Multi Pick-up Assembly
SL4
Reversal Solenoid
SL5
No. 2 Delivery Solenoid
114
List of Motors
M21
M10
M2
M9
M4
M1
M6
M8
M7
M3
Symbol
Part name
Main unit
Reference
M1
Main Motor
Removing the Main Motor (M1) on page 149
M2
Fixing Motor
Removing the Fixing Motor (M2) on page 149
M3
Cassette 1 Pickup Motor
Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Motor (M3) on page

150
M4
Duplex Feed Motor
Removing the Duplex Feed Motor (M4) on page

151
M6
Bottle Motor
M7
Hopper Motor
M8
Shutter Hp Sensor
Removing the Shutter Motor (M8) on page 151
M9
No.1 Delivery Motor
Removing the No.1 Delivery Motor (M9) on page

152
M10
Reversal Motor
No.2 Deleivery Assembly Removing the Reversal Motor (M10) on page 154
M21
Scanner Motor
Removing the Scanner Motor (M21) on page 154
115
List of Fans
FAN3
FAN4
FAN1
FAN2
FAN6
Symbol
Part name
Main unit
Reference
FAN1
Paper Edge Cooling Fan (Rear)
Removing the Paper Edge Cooling Fan (Rear)

(FAN1) on page 156
FAN2
Paper Edge Cooling Fan (Front)
Removing the Paper Edge Cooling Fan (Front)

(FAN2) on page 156
FAN3
Exhaust Fan (Rear)
FAN4
Exhaust Fan (Front)
FAN6
Power Supply Cooling Fan
Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FAN6) on

page 156
116
List of Switches
SW2
SW4
SW6
SW7
Symbol
SW11 (*1)
Part name
Main unit
Reference
SW2
Front Door Switch
Removing the Front Door Switch (SW2) on page

158
SW4
Environment Switch
SW6
Cassette Size Detection Switch 1
Removing the Cassette Size Detection Switch (SW6/

SW7) on page 159
SW7
Cassette Size Detection Switch 2
Removing the Cassette Size Detection Switch (SW6/

SW7) on page 159
SW11
(*1)
Main Power Switch
*1: Only the Europe Model
117
List of Lamp,Heater,others
[1]
[2]
H6
H5
TH1
TH2
TH3
H1
H2
SP1
H4
H3
Symbol
Part name
Main unit
Reference
TH1
Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear)
Fixing Assembly
TH2
Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front)
Fixing Assembly
TH3
Fixing Main Thermistor
Fixing Assembly
H1
Fixing Heater 1
Fixing Assembly
H2
Fixing Heater 2
Fixing Assembly
SP1
Speaker (Option)
H3
Cassette Heater (Option)
H4
Drum Heater (Option)
H5
Reader Heater (Option)
[1]
Fixing Film Unit
Fixing Assembly
Removing the Fixing Film Unit on page 161
[2]
Pressure Roller
Fixing Assembly
Removing the Pressure Roller on page 164
118
List of Sensors
S12
S11
S10
S9
S19
TS2
S8
S16
TS1
HU1
S17
S18
119
S28
S25
S29
S24
S26
S41
S21 S22
S42
S40
S7
S6
S1
S5
S2
S3
S4
Symbol
Part name
Main unit
Reference
S1
Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor
S2
Cassette 1 Paper Sensor
S3
Cassette pick-up assembly -
S4
Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B
Cassette pick-up assembly -
S5
Pre-Registration Sensor
S6
Loop Sensor
S7
Duplex Feed Sensor
S8
Manual Feeder Paper Size Sensor
S9
Manual Feeder Paper Sensor
S10
Shutter Hp Sensor
S11
No.1 Delivery Full Sensor
S12
No.1 Delivery Sensor
S16
Toner Cover Open/Closed Sensor
S17
Waste Toner Full Sensor
S18
Front Cover Open/Closed Sensor
S19
Fixing Outlet Sensor
Fixing Assembly
S21
Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor 0
S22
Ccd Hp Sensor
S24
Original Size Sensor 0 (AB/ INCH)
120
Symbol
Part name
Main unit
Reference
S25
Original Size Sensor 1 (AB/ INCH)
S26
Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor 1
S28
Original Size Sensor 1 (A/ INCH)
S29
Original Size Sensor 0 (A/AB)
S40
Reversal Sensor
S41
No. 2 Delivery Full Sensor
S42
No. 2 Delivery Sensor
HU1
Environment Sensor
TS1
Developing Unit Toner Sensor
Developing Assembly
TS2
Sub Hopper Toner Sensor
List of PCBs
PCB5d
PCB5c
PCB5a
PCB5b
PCB18
PCB19
PCB2
PCB4
PCB17
PCB15
PCB14
PCB1
PCB16
PCB6
PCB13
PCB11
PCB7
PCB7
PCB3
PCB12
PCB10
PCB10
Symbol
Part name
Main unit
Reference
PCB1
Main Controller PCB
Removing the Main Controller PCB on page 166
PCB2
Reader Relay PCB
Removing the Reader Relay PCB on page 166
PCB3
Power Supply PCB
Removing the Power Supply PCB on page 167
PCB4
DC Controller PCB
Removing the DC Controller PCB on page 167
PCB5a
LCD Unit
121
Symbol
Part name
Main unit
Reference
PCB5b
1/4 Inverter PCB
PCB5c
Control Panel CPU PCB
PCB5d
Key Top PCB Assembly
PCB6
HVT PCB
Removing the HVT PCB on page 168
PCB7
Option Power Supply PCB
Removing the Option Power Supply PCB on page

168
PCB10
Heater PCB
Removing the Heater PCB on page 169
PCB11
NCU PCB
FAX Assembly
PCB12
Modular PCB
FAX Assembly
PCB13
Pseudo-CI PCB
FAX Assembly
PCB14
Laser Driver PCB
Laser Scanner Unit
PCB15
BD PCB
Laser Scanner Unit
PCB16
RAM PCB
Main Controller PCB
Removing the RAM PCB on page 169
PCB17
Modem PCB
Main Controller PCB
PCB18
No.2 Delivery Reversal PCB
PCB19
CCD PCB
CCD Unit
122
2. Remove the support cover.
External / Internal Cover
2 screws (RS tightening; M3)

2 claws
1 boss
Removing the Reader Left

Cover
2x
2x
1. Remove the reader left cover.

2x
Removing the Reader Front

Cover
1. Open the platen cover (ADF/platen board cover).
2. Remove the reader front cover.
2x
Removing the Delivery Tray

Preparation
1. Remove the support cover.Removing the Support
Cover on page 123
2. Remove the toner supply cover.Removing the
Toner Supply Cover on page 127
3. Remove the inside base cover.Removing the Inside
Base Cover on page 126
Removing the Support Cover

1. Open the right cover.
123
Procedure
2. Remove the front cover belt.

1. Remove the support cover (left).
2x
3x
3. Remove the front cover.

2 hinge pins
2. Remove the delivery tray.

1 screw (RS tightening; M3)
1x
Removing the Lower Left

Cover
1. Remove the cassette.
Removing the Front Cover

1. Open the front cover.
124
Procedure
2. Remove the lower left cover.
1. Remove the left cover. ( except the Europe model )
<For 550-sheet cassette model>

2 screws
1 screw
NOTE:
In the case of the Europe model, refer to step 2.).
2x
1x
Rod
<For 250-sheet cassette model>

3 screws
1 claw
1x
3x
CAUTION:
The left cover has a rod interlocked with the switch on
the power supply PCB.
Remove the left cover without applying load on it.
Claw
Removing the Left Cover

Preparation
1. Draw out the cassette.
2. Remove the lower left cover.Removing the Lower
Left Cover on page 124
125
2. Bend the left cover and remove the inside base
cover.
NOTE:
When reassembling the left cover, insert the rod of the left
cover switch into the main power switch securely.
1 screw
1x
1x
3x
Installing the Inside Base

Cover
2. Remove the left cover. ( In the case of the Europe

model )
2 screws
1. Install the inside base cover.
2x
Removing the Inside Base

Cover
1. Open the front cover
126
2. Remove the left rear cover.
2. Secure it with one screw.
1x
3x
3x
Removing the Toner Supply

Cover
Preparation
Cover on page 123
Procedure
1. Remove the screw securing the developing
assembly pressure lever.
Removing the Left Rear Cover
2. Turn the lever in the direction of the arrow to release

the drum unit lock.
1. Remove the face cover.

1 screw (TP binding; M3)
1x
1x
127
1. Remove the reader right cover by removing four
screws, and then remove one screw from the reader
front cover.
3. Remove the drum cartridge.
5x
4. Open the toner supply cover.

5. Remove the toner supply cover.
1 claw
2x
<For iR 2545/2535>
1. Remove the reader right cover.
2 screws
1x
2x
Claw
Removing the Platen Glass

1. Open the ADF or platen cover.
2. Remove the glass retainer (right).
2 screws
3. Remove the platen glass.
2x
Removing the Reader Right

Cover
<For iR 2530/2525/2520>
128
4. Remove the reader rear cover.
Removing the Reader Rear

Cover

1 claw
1x
4x
2. Remove the reader rear (small) cover.

2 claws
2x
Claw
Removing the Rear Cover

(Right)
3. Remove the ADF power cable.

3 connectors
1. Remove the power supply retaining cover.

1 screw
3x
1x
2. Remove the power cord.
1x
129
3. Remove the rear cover (right).
Removing the Rear Right

Cover (Upper)
3 screws
2 claws
1. Remove the rear right cover (upper).
3x
2x
2x
Claws
Removing the Rear Cover

(Left)
Removing the Rear Right

Cover (Lower)
1. Remove the rear cover (right).Removing the Rear

Cover (Right) on page 129
1. Raise the handle at the rear right, and then remove

one screw.
2. Remove the rear cover (left).
2. Release one claw with a flat-blade screwdriver, and

then remove the rear right cover (lower) of the main
unit.
2 screws
2 claws
2x
1x
2x
1x
Claw
Claws
Claw
130
3. Remove the lower rear cover.
Removing the Lower Rear

Cover

1 claw
1. Remove the connector cover.
1x
1 screw (W-sems binding; M3)
1x
1x
Claw
Removing the Cassette 2 Rear

Cover
2. Disconnect all connectors (only for the machine with

an optional cassette).
Perform the same procedure as the lower rear cover.

Removing the Lower Rear Cover on page 131
131
3. Remove the belt.
Main Unit
2 screws
Removing the Right Cover

Assembly
2x
Preparation
1. Remove the reader right cover.Removing the
Reader Right Cover on page 128
2. Remove the reader rear cover.Removing the
Reader Rear Cover on page 129
3. Remove the rear right cover (upper).Removing the
Rear Right Cover (Upper) on page 130
Procedure
2. Remove the link between the right cover and pickup
unit.
4. Remove one screw.

Remove the connection cable.
2 connectors (The machine without the No.2 delivery unit
does not have the upper connector.)
CAUTION:
Be sure to disconnect the upper connector after
releasing the harness from the clamp to prevent
breaking of wire
132
1x
2x
4. Remove the lower rear cover.Removing the Lower

Rear Cover on page 131
1x
5. Remove the rear right cover (lower).Removing the

Rear Right Cover (Lower) on page 130
Procedure
1. Remove the connection cable.
1 connector
1x
5. Remove two screws.
2x

assembly.
6. Remove the right cover assembly.
3. Remove the cassette pickup assembly.

4x
Removing the Cassette Pickup

Assembly
Preparation
133
2. Remove the laser scanner unit.
Removing the Laser Scanner

Unit
2 pieces of sponge
4 connectors
Preparation
4x

2. Remove the left cover.Removing the Left Cover on
page 125
Procedure
1. Remove the scanner retaining plate.
1 screw
1x
CAUTION:
When pulling out the laser scanner, take care not to
touch the PCB installed on the laser scanner unit. (The
PCB is equipped with a laser intensity adjusting volume
resistor and so touching the PCB can change the
adjustment setting.)
Action to Take after Replacing the

Laser Scanner Unit
1. When replacing the Laser Unit, enter the value
obtained by adding 1,000 to the number shown on
the label affixed to the side of the newly replaced
134
Procedure
Laser Unit in the corresponding service mode as

shown below.
1. Remove the toner supply assembly.
(Examples: If the number on the service label is 3, enter

1,003. If the number on the service label is -1, enter 999.)
-67
-5
-4
Remove the power cable.

2 connectors
4 screws
-5
CAUTION:
When removing the toner supply unit, do not incline it
to shed toner.
SW No. 145
146
147
136 148
149
150
PRINT > Bitswitch > 136 Laser horizontal scanning

direction write position adjustment(A)
direction magnification ratio adjustment(A-B)
direction magnification ratio adjustment(A-C)
direction magnification ratio adjustment(A-D)
direction write position adjustment(A-B)
direction write position adjustment(A-C)
direction write position adjustment(A-D)
2x
Removing the Toner Supply

Assembly
Preparation
page 125
3. Remove the waste toner container.Removing the
Waste Toner Container on page 143
4. Remove the drum unit.Removing the Drum Unit on
page 144
5. Remove the toner bottle.
7. Remove the delivery tray.Removing the Delivery
Tray on page 123
8. Remove the laser scanner unit.Removing the Laser
Scanner Unit on page 134
135
4x
Action to Take after Replacement
Removing the CCD Unit

1. When replacing with a new CCD unit, enter the
following service mode to output a service data list.
NOTE:
The service parts for toner supply unit do not come with a
bottle ring. Remove the bottle ring from the old toner
supply unit and attach it to the new one.
REPORT> REPORT OUTPUT> SERVICE DATA

LIST
The procedure is as follows:
3. Remove the reader right cover.Removing the

Reader Right Cover on page 128
1. Remove the toner bottle set lever.

1 parallel pin
4. Remove the right glass retainer.

5. Remove the platen glass.Removing the Platen
Glass on page 128
6. Move the belt in the direction of the arrow and move
the CCD unit to the position of the groove in the
frame.
2. Remove the bottle base.

1 screw
1 claw
1x
1x
7. Remove the shaft retaining blade.
1 screw
1x
Claw
3. Remove the bottle ring.
136
10. Remove the belt from the hook at the back of the
CCD unit.
8. Remove the shaft.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the LED on the CCD unit.
11. Remove the CCD unit.

Cable retainer
CCD flexible cable
Core
9. Loosen the screw, and then loosen the belt.
1x
1x

CCD Unit
Perform the following procedure after replacing the CCD unit:
1. Install the new CCD unit.
2. Turn on the power to cause the error E248.
3. Enter the service mode and perform the following:
SCAN > READER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > RCON (RCON RAM clearing)
4. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
137
6. Perform the following in the service mode:
5. Enter the following items according to the service

data list output in advance.
SCAN > READER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY >
SCAN > READER > FUNCTION > CCD > DFWLVL1/2/3/4 (DF white level adjustment)
ADJ-X
ADJ-Y
1. Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses

on the platen glass,
enter the service mode, and then select SCAN >
READER > FUNCTION > CCD > DFWLVL1.
Read the white level in the BOOK mode.
(Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK
mode.)
on the DF,
READER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2.
Read the white level in the DF mode (stream
reading).
(Check the transparency of the glass for stream
reading.)(Read both sides of the chart.)
mode.)
on the DF,
reading).
ADJ-S
ADJ-Y-DF
ADJ-X-MG
SCAN > READER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-P-K
SCAN > READER > ADJUST > CCD >
50_RG
50_GB
100_RG
100_GB
50DF_RG
50DF_GB
100DF_RG
100DF_GB
W-PLT-X
W-PLT-Y
W-PLT-Z
SCAN > FEEDER > ADJUST >
DOCST
SCAN > READER > OPTION > BODY >
SENS-CNF
LA-SPEED
MODELSZ2
KSIZE-SW
7. Enter the service mode, and then select the

following:
SCAN > READER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRDPOS CCD (stream reading position adjustment).
8. Enter the values recorded on the label affixed to the
CCD unit in the following service mode. (Two items
below)
SCAN > READER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3M1/M2/M3/M4/M5/M6/M7/M8/M9
Next, finalize the setting in the following mode:
SCAN > READER > ADJUST > CCD > CCD-CHNG
SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD>
9. Transcribe the above correction values on the

service label at the inside of the rear cover(right).
138
Removing the Platen Glass
CAUTION:
Be sure to make the white plate data adjustment before
ADF white level adjustment.
1. Open the platen cover (platen board cover/ADF).

2. Remove the glass retainer.
2 screws
W-PLT-X
2x
W-PLT-Z
W-PLT-Y
1. Enter the value indicated on the platen glass in the

following service mode:
SCAN > READER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X/Y/Z
(Input of standard white plate data)
following:
mode.)
on the DF,
reading).
mode.)
on the DF,
reading).
CAUTION:
When removing the platen glass, take care not to touch
the following parts with your fingers:
Glass surface
Standard white plate
Soils on these parts may cause white/black lines on
images.
If they are soiled, clean them with a lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol.

Platen Glass
Take the action stated below in the service mode.
Removing the ADF Scan Glass

1. Open the platen cover (platen board cover/ADF).
2. Remove the glass retainer.
2 screws
139

ADF Scan Glass
3. Remove the ADF scan glass.
2x

following:
mode.)
on the DF,
reading).
mode.)
on the DF,
reading).
CAUTION:
When removing the ADF scan glass, take care not
to touch the glass surface with your fingers.
Soils on the glass surface may cause white/black
lines on images.
If the glass surface is soiled, clean them with a lintfree paper moistened with alcohol.
Be sure to install the ADF scan glass with its seat
facing front left.
Removing the Control Panel

Assembly
1. Remove the reader front cover.Removing the
Reader Front Cover on page 123
140
assembly.
2. Remove the control panel assembly.

2 screw
1 connector
2x
1x

2 screws
2x
Removing the Multi Pickup

Assembly
1. Open the right cover assembly.
141
4. Remove the harness.
1 connector
4 clamps
1x
4x
5. Remove the multi pickup assembly.

4 screws
4x
142
2. Remove the separation static charge eliminator.
Periodic Replacing
Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning
Parts
1 claw
1x
Removing the Transfer Roller

2. Remove the transfer roller.
1 stopper (front)
1 claw
1x
Removing the Waste Toner

Container
2. Turn the lock lever as shown to release the lock of
the waste toner container.
3. Remove the transfer roller.

1 bearing (front)
3. Remove the waste toner container.
4. Remove the lid attached at the front of the waste

toner container, and then cover the opening of the
Removing the Separation

Static Charge Eliminator
143
3. While raising the lever under the handle of the drum
unit, slowly pull out the drum unit to the position
shown below.
container with it so that the waste toner does not

spill out.
Removing the Drum Unit

Preparation
4. Pull out the drum unit slightly upward.

Procedure
1. Remove the screw securing the developing
assembly pressure lever. (Models for some
destinations do not have this screw.)
2. Turn the lever in the direction of the arrow to release
the lock of the drum unit.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the drum surface during the work.
1x
Removing the Developing

Assembly
Preparation
page 144
144
Procedure
1x
1. Remove the developing assembly

1 connector
1x
Claw
NOTE:
Reassemble the manual feed pickup roller as shown.
1. Fit the hole of the manual feed pickup roller to the
projection of the bushing (rear) and attach it.
2. Press down the separation pad.
3. Attach the bushing (front) to the manual feed pickup
roller.
CAUTION:
When installing the toner supply unit, insert a guide of
the developing unit to the ditch of the host machine.
Guide
Removing the Manual Feed

Pickup Roller
1. Remove the manual feed pickup roller cover.
Removing the Manual Feed

Separation Pad
1 screw
1x
1. Remove the manual feed pickup roller. Removing

the Manual Feed Pickup Roller on page 145
2. Slide the bearing (rear) backward.
1 claw
1x
2. Release the claws, and then slide the bearing (front).

3. Remove the manual feed pickup roller.
1 claw
145
3. Remove the leaf spring with your fingers.
3. Remove the separation pad with a flat-blade

screwdriver.
4. Remove the cassette pickup roller.

1 claw
1x
Removing the Fixing Unit

2. Remove the fixing unit.
Removing the Cassette Feed

Roller
2 screws
2x
1. Draw out the cassette from the main unit.

3. Remove the cassette transfer roller.
1 claw
1x
NOTE:
Hold the fixing unit at the position shown below.
Removing the Cassette

Separation Roller
Removing the Cassette Pickup

Roller
146
3. Remove the cassette separation roller.
1 claw
1x
Removing the Idler Gear (For

China Only)
Preparation
3. Remove the cassette pickup roller.Removing the
Cassette Pickup Roller on page 146
4. Remove the cassette feed roller.Removing the
Cassette Feed Roller on page 146
Procedure
1. Remove the idler gear.
1 claw
1x
147
2. Remove the clutch.
Clutch / Solenoid
1 connector
1 resin E-ring
Removing the Clutch

(CL1/CL2/CL3)
1x
Preparation
2. Remove the rear cover (left).Removing the Rear
Cover (Left) on page 130
CL2
3. Remove the right cover (upper rear).Removing the

Procedure
CL1
1. Remove the HVT PCB assembly.
CL3
1 connector
3 screws
1x
3x
148
Procedure
Motor
1. Remove the support plate.

1 relay connector
1 connector
1 screw
Removing the Main Motor (M1)

Preparation
1x
1x

4. Remove the HVT PCB.Removing the HVT PCB on
page 168
Procedure
1. Remove the main motor.
4 screws
1 connector
4x
1x
NOTE:
Because there is a screw on the backside of the relay
connector, remove the relay connector earlier.
2. Disconnect all connectors on the DC controller PCB.
Removing the Fixing Motor

(M2)
Preparation
149
3. Remove the DC controller PCB assembly.
4. Remove the fixing motor.
3 screws
1 connector
4 screws
3x
1x
4x
Removing the Cassette 1

Pickup Motor (M3)
Preparation
Procedure
1. Remove the cassette 1 pickup motorr.
1 connector
4 screws
1x
150
4x
Procedure
Removing the Duplex Feed

Motor (M4)
1. Remove the cartridge right rail unit.

2 screws (front side:1, right side:1)
Preparation
1x

4. Remove the HVT PCB.Removing the HVT PCB on
page 168
Procedure
1. Remove the duplex feed motor.
1 connector
4 screws
1x
1x
2x
2 connectors
2x
Removing the Shutter Motor

(M8)
Preparation
1. Remove the fixing assembly.Removing the Fixing
Unit on page 146
page 144
151
2. Remove the gear.
Removing the No.1 Delivery

Motor (M9)
1 claw
CAUTION:
When reinstalling the gear, put the triangle marks of the
right and left rack together.
Preparation
1x
3. Remove the support cover (left).Removing the

Support Cover on page 123
4. Remove the delivery tray and inner right cover.
2 screws
1x
3. Remove the rack (right).

2 claws
2x
1x
4. Remove the shutter motor.
2 screws
2x

152
Procedure
3. Remove the No.1 deleivery unit.

1 screw
1. Remove the No.2 deleivery unit.

2 connectors
1 screw
1x
2x
1x
NOTE:
When reinstalling the No.1 deleivery unit, insert the
positioning boss in the hole.
2 screws
Hole
2x
Boss
2. Remove the deleivery drive inner cover.
4. Remove the DC controller PCB.Removing the DC

Controller PCB on page 167
2 claws
2x
153
Procedure
5. Remove the No.1 deleivery drive unit.

3 screws
1. Remove the reversal motor.

1 connector
2 screws
3x
1x
2x
6. Remove the No.1 delivery motor.

1 connector
2 screws
1x
Removing the Scanner Motor

(M21)
2x
Preparation
1. Remove the ADF communication cable (only
machines with ADF installed).
2. Open the platen board cover or the ADF.
Removing the Reversal Motor

(M10)
Preparation
1. Remove the No.2 deleivery unit. Removing the No.
1 Delivery Motor (M9) on page 152
154
Procedure
1. Remove the scanner motor assembly.
1 connector
1 spring
3 screws
1x
3x
2. Remove the scanner motor.

4 screws
4x
155
Fan
Removing the Paper Edge

Cooling Fan (Front) (FAN2)
Removing the Paper Edge

Cooling Fan (Rear) (FAN1)
Preparation
Preparation

page 125



page 125

page 144


page 144
6. Remove the tonner supply cover.Removing the


Tray on page 123



Tray on page 123
9. Remove the toner supply unit.Removing the Toner

Supply Assembly on page 135

Procedure
9. Remove the toner supply unit.Removing the Toner

Supply Assembly on page 135
1. Remove the paper edge cooling fan (front).
Procedure
1 connector
2 claws
1. Remove the paper edge cooling fan (rear).

1 connector
2 claws
1x
1x
2x
2x
Removing the Power Supply

Cooling Fan (FAN6)
Preparation
156
3. If equipped with the heater PCB, remove the heater
PCB.
Procedure
1. Remove the power supply cooling fan.
1 connector
2 claws
1x
2x
157
Procedure
Switch
1. Remove the box tray.

1 box tray shaft
1 screw
Removing the Front Door

Switch (SW2)
1x
Preparation
Cover on page 123
CAUTION:
When reinstalling the box tray, installation so that the
positioning boss is satisfied in a spring.
158
5. Remove the front door switch.
CAUTION:
When reinstalling the box tray shaft, fit the insertion part
into the hole.
2 terminals
1 screw
1x
2. Remove the waste toner release lever.

3. Remove the internal cover (right).
4 screws
Removing the Cassette Size

Detection Switch (SW6/ SW7)
4x
Preparation
1. Remove the cassette.
3. Remove the option power supply PCB.Removing
the Option Power Supply PCB on page 168
4. Remove the internal cover (right upper).

2 screws
2x
159
Procedure
2. Remove the cassette size detection switch.

1 connector
1 screw
2 claws
1. Remove the cassette size detection assembly.

1 connector
1 screw
1 boss
1x
1x
1x
SW6
NOTE:
Remove the connector and the screw from the rear, but
the cassette size detection assembly removes it from the
front side.
160
1x
SW7
2x
2. Remove the left side plate.
Lamp,Heater,others
1 screw
Removing the Fixing Film Unit
1x
Preparation
2. Remove the fixing assembly.Removing the Fixing
Unit on page 146
Procedure
1. Remove the internal delivery cover unit.
1 screw
3 claws (slide)
1x
CAUTION:
When installing the left side plate, install it to engage
the teeth with the locking lever at the position shown in
the figure.
3. Remove the drawer connector.

3 screws
3x
161
7. Remove the 2 screws.
4. Remove the cable guide.

1 boss
5. Remove the fixing film cover.
2x
3 screws
3x
6. Turn the pressure unit and release the pressure unit.
CAUTION:
Never turn the screw (arrow part) pressurizing the
fixing assembly.
Turning this screw causes to change the pressure of
the fixing assembly and results in the replacement of
the fixing assembly because the pressure adjustment
cannot be performed in the field.
8. Turn the pressure unit and release the pressure unit.
162
12. Remove the stopper.
1 claw
1 claw
1x
1x
10. Remove the conductive plate.
13. Remove the heater contact connector.
1 screw
1 claw
1x
1x
14. Remove the gear.

1 E-ring
11. Remove the fixing cable guide (right).

1 screw
1 connector
1x
1x
15. Remove the relay connector from the cable guide.

2 claws
163
18. Remove the heater contact connector.
2x
16. Remove the fixing cable guide (left).

19. Remove the fixing film unit.
1 screw
1 connector
1x
Move the fixing film unit in the arrow direction
1x
17. Remove the stopper.

1 claw
Removing the Pressure Roller

Preparation
1x
1. Remove the fixing film unit.Removing the Fixing

Film Unit on page 161
164
Procedure
1. Remove the guide.
1 claw
1x
2. Remove the pressure roller.

2 bushes
2 bearings
CAUTION:
Pay attention to the position and the orientation of the
insulating bush/bearing.
165
PCB
CAUTION:
In the case of the Europe model:
If the firmware of the DC Controller PCB or the Main
Controller PCB is not correct, the main power switch
becomes OFF automatically.
Therefore, when update of the firmware is not possible,
turn on the main power switch after disconnect the
connector of the main power switch, and update the
correct firmware which matched the model.
After the update the firmware, install the removed
connector by necessity.
Removing the Main Controller

PCB
Preparation
1. Remove the left cover (right).Removing the Rear
2. Remove the left rear cover. Removing the Left Rear
Cover on page 127
3. Remove the RAM PCB.Removing the RAM PCB on
page 169
4. Remove the modem PCB (for the model with a FAX
function).
Procedure
1. Disconnect all connectors and flexible cables on the
main controller PCB.
2. Remove the main controller PCB.
11 screws
1x
11x
Removing the Reader Relay

PCB
Preparation
Action to Take after Replacement

1. After replacing the image processor PCB with a new
one, take the following action:
Download the latest firmware with the UST.
Enter all values recorded on the service label
affixed to the rear cover.
166
Procedure
2. Remove the power supply PCB.

3 screws
1. Remove the reader relay PCB.

3 flexible cables
4 connectors
6 screws
7x
3x
6x
NOTE:
In the case of the Europe model, the following procedure
is necessary.
1 connector
2 clamps
Removing the Power Supply

PCB
1x
2x
Preparation
2. Remove the left rear cover.Removing the Left Rear
Cover on page 127
page 125
Procedure
1. Disconnect all connectors on the power supply PCB.
Removing the DC Controller

PCB
Before Replacement/RAM Clearing
Print the service data list in the service mode.
REPORT > REPORT OUTPUT > SERVICE DATA LIST
Preparation
167
Procedure
Removing the HVT PCB
1. Disconnect all connectors on the DC controller PCB.
Preparation
2. Remove the DC controller PCB.

6 screws (Screw A is tightened together with the

earth cable.)

6x
Procedure
1. Remove the HVT PCB.
1 connector
2 screws
1 claw
1x
2x
1x
Action to Take after

Replacement/RAM Clearing
1. Clear the DC controller settings and counters.
Removing the Option Power

Supply PCB
Enter the service mode, and Then select the following:

CLEAR > ENGINE > ENGINE BKRAMCLK
(Clearing of the RAM on the DC controller PCB)
Preparation

(Turning OFF/ON the main power switch clears the
RAM.)

3. If uploading of backup data fails before replacement

due to the damage to the DC controller PCB, enter
the values of service mode items recorded on the
service label. Since the values recorded on the
service label may be outdated, check the service
mode item list (#SERVICE DATA LIST) printed out in
advance, and then enter the latest values.


(Turning OFF/ON the main power switch allows the
values entered for the service mode items to take
effect.)
168
Procedure
Removing the Heater PCB
1. Remove the option power supply cover.
Preparation
2 claws

2x

Procedure
1. Disconnect all connectors on the heater PCB.
2. Remove the heater PCB.
1 screw
2. Disconnect all connectors on the option power
supply PCB.
3. Remove the option power supply PCB.
2 screws
1x
1x
Removing the RAM PCB

Preparation
1x
169
Procedure
2. For the model with a FAX and SEND function, press

the SW3 on the main controller to check that LED10
goes out. (Secondary power cutoff)
1. Remove the controller plate. (Remove 3 screws.)
3x
CAUTION:
The ADRAM is powered from the secondary battery
unit to back up the image memory even after the main
power switch is turned OFF and the power plug is
removed from the outlet.
If the SW3 on the main controller PCB is pressed with
the image backed up, the entire data stored in the
memory is cleared. Be sure to output the data stored
in the memory before pressing the SW3.
170
3. Remove the RAM PCB. (Release the hook.)
171
Adjustment
Overview........................................... 173
Basic Adjustment.............................. 175
Adjustment when Replacing the Parts
.......................................................177
5. Adjustment
Overview
Adjustment when replacing parts
This section describes adjustment required in field service works when replacing parts.
The parts are classified by function into the following 3 blocks.
Category
Scanning System
Controller System
Replacing parts
Reference
CCD unit
Action to Take after Replacing the CCD Unit on page 177
Copyboard glass
Action to Take after Replacing the Platen Glass on page 178
ADF reading glass
Action to Take after Replacing the ADF Scan Glass on page 179
Main controller PCB
Action to Take after Replacing theMain Controller PCB on page 179
DC controller PCB
Action to Take when Replacing the DC Controller PCB on page 179
RAM PCB
Action to Take after Replacing the RAM on page 180
Laser scanner unit
Action to Take after Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit on page 180
Image position adjustment

This section describes procedures when adjusting basic image position (image margins, nonimage area, etc).
Category
Margin Along the Leading
Edge
Item
Reference
L1:
Single-sided copy: 2.5 1.5 (mm)
Double-sided copy: 2.5 2.0 (mm)
Margin Along the Leading Edge

on page 175
L1
Feeding direction
of paper
image
L1:
Left Image Margin on page

175
Feeding direction
of paper
image
L1
Left Image Margin
173
5. Adjustment
Category
Leading Edge Non-Image
Width
Item
Reference
Leading Edge Non-Image
Width on page 175
L1:
Double-sided copy: 2.5 1.5(mm)
L1
Feeding direction
of paper
Left Non-Image Width
image
L1:
Left Non-Image Width on page

176
image
Feeding direction
of paper
174
L1
5. Adjustment
Basic Adjustment
Image position adjustment
Copy 10 sheets from each pickup position to check that the image margin and non-image area is within the standard.
Each cassette
Pickup tray
If it is not within the standard, go through the following procedures to adjust it.
CAUTION:
If changing the value of service mode item in this adjustment, enter the changed value in the service label.
Margin Along the Leading Edge

Service mode> PRINT> PRINT NUMERIC> 053
An increase of '1' will increase the margin by 0.1 mm.
<range>
0 to 9999 (default: 25)
L1
Feeding direction
of paper
image
Left Image Margin

Service mode> PRINT> PRINT NUMERIC> 056
An increase of '1' will increase the margin width by 0.1 mm.
<range>
0 to 9999 (default: 25)
Feeding direction
of paper
L1
image
Leading Edge Non-Image Width

Service mode> SCAN> READER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-X
An increase of '1' will increase the non-image width by 0.1 mm.
<range>
1 to 211 (default: 20)
175
5. Adjustment
L1
Feeding direction
of paper
image
Left Non-Image Width

Service mode> SCAN> READER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-Y
An increase of '1' will increase the non-image width by 0.1 mm.
<range>
iR2545/2535 series: 1 to 254 (default: 79)
iR2530/2525/2520 series: -25 to +25 (default: 0)
image
Feeding direction
of paper
176
L1
5. Adjustment
Adjustment when Replacing the Parts

Original Exposure
Action to Take after Replacing the CCD Unit
Perform the following procedure after replacing the CCD unit:
1. Install the new CCD unit.
2. Turn on the power to cause the error E248.
3. Enter the service mode and perform the following:
SCAN > READER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON (RCON RAM clearing)
5. Enter the following items according to the service data list output in advance.
SCAN > READER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY >
ADJ-X
ADJ-Y
ADJ-S
ADJ-Y-DF
ADJ-X-MG
SCAN > READER > ADJUST > PASCAL >
OFST-P-K
SCAN > READER > ADJUST > CCD >
50_RG
50_GB
100_RG
100_GB
50DF_RG
50DF_GB
100DF_RG
100DF_GB
W-PLT-X
W-PLT-Y
W-PLT-Z
SCAN > FEEDER > ADJUST >
DOCST
LA-SPEED
SCAN > READER > OPTION > BODY >
SENS-CNF
MODELSZ2
KSIZE-SW
177
5. Adjustment
6. Perform the following in the service mode:
SCAN> READER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/2/3/4 (DF white level adjustment)
1. Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass,
enter the service mode, and then select SCAN > READER > FUNCTION > CCD > DFWLVL1.
(Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK mode.)
2. Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF,
enter the service mode, and then select SCAN > READER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2.
Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading).
(Check the transparency of the glass for stream reading.)(Read both sides of the chart.)
7. Enter the service mode, and then select the following:
SCAN > READER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS CCD (stream reading position adjustment).
8. Enter the values recorded on the label affixed to the CCD unit in the following service mode. (Two items below)
SCAN > READER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-M1/M2/M3/M4/M5/M6/M7/M8/M9
Next, finalize the setting in the following mode:
SCAN > READER > ADJUST > CCD > CCD-CHNG
9. Transcribe the above correction values on the service label at the inside of the rear cover (right).
Action to Take after Replacing the Platen Glass

Enter the service mode, and then select the following:
CAUTION:
Be sure to make the white plate data adjustment before ADF white level adjustment.
W-PLT-X
W-PLT-Z
W-PLT-Y
1. Enter the value indicated on the platen glass in the following service mode:
SCAN > READER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X/Y/Z (Input of standard white plate data)
178
5. Adjustment
SCAN > READER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/2/3/4 (DF white level adjustment)
Action to Take after Replacing the ADF Scan Glass

SCAN > READER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/2/3/4 (DF white level adjustment)
Main Controller
Action to Take after Replacing theMain Controller PCB
After replacing the main controller PCB with a new one, take the following action:
Download the latest firmware with the UST.
Enter all values recorded on the service label affixed to the rear cover.
Action to Take when Replacing the DC Controller PCB

Before Replacement/RAM Clearing
Print the service data list in the service mode.
REPORT > REPORT OUTPUT > SERVICE DATA LIST
Action to Take after Replacement/RAM Clearing
179
5. Adjustment
1. Clear the DC controller settings and counters.
Enter the service mode, and Then select the following:
CLEAR > ENGINE > ENGINE BKRAMCLK (Clearing of the RAM on the DC controller PCB)
2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch. (Turning OFF/ON the main power switch clears the RAM.)
3. If uploading of backup data fails before replacement due to the damage to the DC controller PCB, enter the values
of service mode items recorded on the service label. Since the values recorded on the service label may be outdated,
check the service mode item list (#SERVICE DATA LIST) printed out in advance, and then enter the latest values.
4. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch. (Turning OFF/ON the main power switch allows the values entered
for the service mode items to take effect.)
Action to Take after Replacing the RAM

CAUTION:
The ADRAM is powered from the secondary battery unit to back up the image memory even after the main power switch
is turned OFF and the power plug is removed from the outlet.
If the SW3 on the main controller PCB is pressed with the image backed up, the entire data stored in the memory is cleared.
Be sure to output the data stored in the memory before pressing the SW3.

Action to Take after Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit
When replacing the Laser Unit, enter the value obtained by adding 1,000 to the number shown on the label affixed to the side of
the newly replaced Laser Unit in the corresponding service mode as shown below.
(Examples: If the number on the service label is 3, enter 1,003. If the number on the service label is -1, enter 999.)
SW No.
145
146
147
-67
-5
136 148
-4
-5
149
150
PRINT > Bitswitch > 136 Laser horizontal scanning direction write position adjustment(A)
PRINT > Bitswitch > 145 Laser horizontal scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment(A-B)
PRINT > Bitswitch > 146 Laser horizontal scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment(A-C)
PRINT > Bitswitch > 147 Laser horizontal scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment(A-D)
PRINT > Bitswitch > 148 Laser horizontal scanning direction write position adjustment(A-B)
PRINT > Bitswitch > 149 Laser horizontal scanning direction write position adjustment(A-C)
PRINT > Bitswitch > 150 Laser horizontal scanning direction write position adjustment(A-D)
180
Troubleshooting
Initial Check.......................................182
Test Print...........................................184
Troubleshooting Items.......................185
Version Upgrade............................... 190
Service Call Request Function..........194
6. Troubleshooting
Initial Check
Initial check items list
Item
Site Environment
No.
Detail
The voltage of the power supply is as rated (+/-10%).
The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near a water faucet, water boiler,
humidifi er), and it is not in a cold place. The machine is not near a source of fi re or dust.
The site is not subject to ammonium gas.
The site is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise, provide curtains.)
The site is well ventilated, and the floor keeps the machine level.
The machine's power plug remains connected to the power outlet.
Checking the Paper
The paper is of a recommended type.
The paper is not moist. Try paper fresh out of package.
Checking the
Placement of Paper
Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a specific
level.
If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed in the correct orientation in
the manual feed tray.
Checking the Durables
Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end of its life.
Checking the
Periodically Replaced
Parts
Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically replaced parts table, and replace
any part that has reached the time of replacement.
Check
Checking Each Unit/Each Function System

Item
Reader
Image formation system
Fixing system
Pickup feed system
Drive system
Cassette
General
No.
Detail
Check that there is no cut, dirt or any foreign particle on the scanner system parts.
Check that the CIS/CCD unit moves smoothly and there is no dirt on the rail.
Check that the lump light does not blink.
Check that there is no dew condensation found on the scanning
roperly installed.
Check that there is no cut and dirt on the photosensitive drum.
Check that the transfer roller is not worn and deformed and has no
e fixing film and pressure roller is not worn and deformed and has no cut/dirt.
Check that the fixing thermistor wire is not cut.
Check that there is electrical conductivity among thermoswitch.
Check that there is no foreign particle such as paper dust etc.
Check that the pickup/feed/separation roller does not accumulate the paper dust. Check
that these rollers are not worn and deformed and have no cut/dirt.
Check that the registration roller/paper path roller is not worn and deformed and has no
cut/dirt.
Check that the feed guide is not worn and deformed and has no cut/ dirt.
Check that there is no edge fold/curl/wave/moisture absorption occurred on the paper.
Check if using Canon recommended paper/transparency makes it
ck that the drive system does not get heavy load.
hat the gear is not worn and not get chipped.
and the paper size is configured properly. Check if the symptom appears or not after replacing the cassette with the cassette that works normally.
Check that the cassette middle plate moves smoothly and is not deformed.
Check that the cassette side guide plate/ trailing edge guide plate is properly set.
Check that the cassette heater switch is ON (When the cassette heater is installed.).
Check that the sensor/clutch/motor/solenoid works properly (Make sure to check the power
source and signal transmission route with the general circuit diagram.).
Check that there is no wire wedged/screw loosened.
Check that all the external covers are installed.
Check that the main power switch/control panel power switch is ON.
182
Check
6. Troubleshooting
Item
General
Others
No.
Detail
Check that the wiring of power cable/signal cable to each option is properly installed.
Check that the fuse on each PCB does not burn out.
Check that there is no error in customer's usage method.
If moving the machine from the cold place such as storage etc to a warm place abruptly,
dew condensation is generated inside machine and it may cause various troubles.
E100 occurs due to dew condensation on BD sensor.
Low image density in the vertical scanning direction due to dew condensation on the
dust-proof glass.
Low image density due to dew condensation on the reader CCD and copyboard glass.
Paper feed failure due to dew condensation on the pickup, feed guide.
If the symptom d appears, wipe the pickup/feed unit with dry cloth. Moreover, if storing the
toner container/developing assembly/drum unit in the cold place and unpacking them
abruptly in warm place, dew condensation may be generated. To prevent dew condensation, place them in warm place sufficiently (for 1 to 2 hours) before unpacking.
183
Check
6. Troubleshooting
Test Print
Overview
This machine have the following test print TYPE and you can judge the image failure that is checked as Yes in the following
image check items with each test print.
If the image failure occurred on normal output does not reappear on the test print, it may be caused by the PDL input or reader
side.
Select the test print TYPE

NO.
TYPE Pattern
Items
Gradation
Fogging Transfer
Fault
Black
line
White
line
Uneven
Density
Uneven Right An- Straight

Density
gle
Lines
at the
Front/
Rear
SELECT Grid
NO.01
Yes
SELECT Half-tone
NO.02
Yes
SELECT All-black
NO.03
Yes
SELECT ---(For R&D)

NO.04
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
SELECT ---(For R&D)

NO.05
SELECT 4dot-6space (verNO.06
tical)
Yes
SELECT 4dot-6space (horiNO.07

zontal)
Yes
Yes
SELECT ---(For R&D)

NO.08
SELECT 16 gray levels
NO.09
(monochromatic)
Yes
Yes
Procedure
1. Enter the PG number with numeric keys, then press the START key.
2. Select single-sided (SGL: 0) or double-sided (DBL: 1), then press the START key.
3. Enter the number of prints to be output (PG COUNT), then press the START key.
4. Specify the paper drawer (main unit), then press the START key.
Main unit cassette (ST_C: 0), 2nd cassette (OP_C: 1), Manual feed tray (MLT: 2)
5. Specify the paper eject slot, then press the START key.
Tray 1 (1_OUT: 0), Tray2 (2_OUT: 1)
6. Select a paper type, then press the OK key.
Plain paper (PLN: 0), Thick paper (TCK: 1),Thin paper (OHP: 2)
7. A test pattern is output.
184
Yes
Yes
6. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Items
Troubleshooting items list
Category
Image
failure
Dirt
Blur/Void
Operation failure
Paper jam
Item
Reference
Paper reverse side stained with toner
Paper Reverse Side Stained with Toner on page 185
Stained leading/trailing edge of paper
Stained Leading/Trailing Edge of Paper on page 186
Image transfer wrong/text void
Image Transfer Wrong/Text Void on page 186
Image deletion/blur/dew condensation
Image Deletion/Blur/Dew Condensation on page 187
Too large curl
Too Large Curl on page 187
Thin paper jam (63g/cm2 or less)
Thin Paper Jam (63g/cm2 or Less) on page 188
Paper jam due to solid image printed on paper

with small leading-edge margin (1-4 mm)
Paper Jam due to Solid Image Printed on Paper with Small

Leading-Edge Margin (1-4 mm) on page 187
Cannot set to- Cannot turn the toner bottle set lever or hard to
ner bottle
turn it
Cannot Turn the Toner Bottle Set Lever or Hard to Turn

it on page 188
Abnormal
noise
Abnormal Noise During Multi-Feed Peration on page

188
Abnormal noise during multi-feed operation
Image Faults
Paper Reverse Side Stained with Toner
[Occurrence area]
Fixing assembly (circumference of the roller: iR2545/2535; 94mm, iR2530/2525/2520; 78.5mm)
Transfer roller (circumference: 50mm)
[Cause]
Fixing assembly: Toner came off the paper sticks to the pressure roller, and then the toner sticks to the reverse side of the paper.
Transfer roller: Toner remained on the drum that had stopped at occurrence of a jam. During the recovery operation performed
later, the toner sticks to the transfer roller.
[Occurrence condition]
Fixing assembly: When fixing ability is poor due to low temperature, a halftone image has been printed on a lot of sheets of paper,
or the time for replacement of the transfer unit is near
Transfer roller: When a paper jam has occurred or the time for replacement of the transfer roller is near.
[Remedy]
Fixing assembly: USER MODE> Adjustment/ Cleaning> Fixing Unit Cleaning
Transfer Roller: USER MODE> Adjustment/ Cleaning> Transfer Roller Cleaning
185
6. Troubleshooting
Stained Leading/Trailing Edge of Paper
[Occurrence area]
Transfer front guide
Fixing inlet guide
[Cause]
Transfer front guide: The leading or trailing edge of paper touches the toner stuck to the transfer front upper guide.
Fixing inlet guide: The leading or trailing edge of paper touches the toner stuck to the fixing inlet guide.
When halftone or solid-black images are printed in succession
[Remedy]
Using lens-cleaning paper or the like, clean the guide stained with toner.
Image Transfer Wrong/Text Void
[Occurrence area]
Transfer roller (circumference: 50mm)
[Cause]
Resistance of paper increases due to reduction in paper water content, resulting in insufficient transfer output.
Resistance of paper decreases due to increase in paper water content, resulting in excessive transfer output.
Paper left alone in a low-humidity environment
Paper left alone in a high-humidity environment
[Remedy]
USER MODE> Adjustment/ Cleaning> Special Mode M> Low or High
186
6. Troubleshooting
Image Deletion/Blur/Dew Condensation
[Occurrence area]
Drum (circumference: 94mm)
[Cause]
Corona products generated on the charging roller stick to the drum, and then water molecules adsorb onto them, resulting in
reduction in resistance.
Therefore, a desired latent image cannot be formed, resulting in a blurred image.
When the machine is operated first in the morning under the high-temperature and highhumidity environment.
[Remedy]
USER MODE> Adjustment/ Cleaning> Special Mode F> Low, Meduium, or High Install the optional drum heater.
Too Large Curl

[Occurrence area]
Fixing assembly
[Cause]
The water content on the front surface of paper becomes different from that on the reverse side of paper, making the curl larger.
When the paper has been left alone in a high-humidity environment.
[Remedy]
USER MODE> Adjustment/ Cleaning> Manual> Special Mode N> Medium or High
*Normally, select "Low". Selecting "High" will reduce productivity.
Machine shipped with cassette heater: Turn on the heater.
Install an optional cassette heater.
Paper Jam due to Solid Image Printed on Paper with Small Leading-Edge
Margin (1-4 mm)
[Occurrence area]
Fixing assembly
[Cause]
When a solid image is printed on the paper with a small leading-edge margin (1-4 mm), paper cannot be easily separated from
the fixing film, causing a paper jam.
When the paper has been left alone in a high-humidity environment or when a solid image is printed on the paper with a small
leading-edge margin.
187
6. Troubleshooting
[Remedy]
USER MODE> Adjustment/ Cleaning> Manual> Special Mode O> Medium or High
USER MODE> Adjustment/ Cleaning> Manual> Special Mode N> High
*Selecting "Special Mode O" or "Special Mode N>High" will increase the leading-edge margin and consequently prevent a paper
jam due to improper separation.
*Selecting "Special Mode N>High" will make the curl smaller but reduce the productivity.
Thin Paper Jam (63g/cm2 or Less)

[Occurrence area]
Drum
Fixing assembly
[Cause]
The separation power reduces due to low elasticity of paper, causing a jam in the drum assembly or fixing assembly.
When paper thinner than 64g/cm2 paper is used.
[Remedy]
USER MODE> Adjustment/ Cleaning> Manual> Special Mode P> Medium or High
* When 52g/cm2 paper is used, "High" must be selected.
Cannot Turn the Toner Bottle Set Lever or Hard to Turn it

[Occurrence area]
Toner bottle set lever
[Cause]
When the toner bottle cap is largish while it is sealed to the specification, more power may be required to turn the lever for opening/
closing the cap.
The toner bottle is not pushed until it clicks.
When the newly opened toner bottle cap is largish while it is sealed to the specification.
When an attempt to set the bottle containing toner has been repeated unnecessarily.
[Remedy]
After turning the toner bottle set lever about 45 degrees, turn the set ON lever while pulling out the toner bottle. This is the way
to set the toner bottle easily.
Push the toner bottle all the way in, and then turn the lever.
Abnormal Noise During Multi-Feed Peration

[Occurrence area]
Gear of right cover unit
[Cause]
When the right cover unit is closed, the belt cannot enter the clearance groove depending on the lower belt securing position and
therefore the belt is Z-folded. As a result, the right cover unit is pushed out and consequently the gear on the right cover unit side
meshes with the gear on the host machine side loosely, generating abnormal noise.
When the belt of the right cover unit is reinstalled
[Remedy]
188
6. Troubleshooting
Secure the belt to the right cover unit in such a manner that it does not turn along with the screw (i.e., it is secured horizontally
or it faces slightly down).
Escape hole
189
6. Troubleshooting
Version Upgrade
Overview
The following 2 methods are available to upgrade system software:
1. Upgrading the host machine: Use a PC (UST)
2. Upgrading the Inner Finisher: Use a PC (SST) + Downloader PCB
Host machine
PC
Main controller PCB

USB cable
CPU
Flash ROM
J8104
RS232C
straight cable
System
software
Inner finisher
Downloader
PCB
Finisher controller PCB

Flash ROM
UST or SST
FY9-2034
CPU
CN22
NOTE:
Multiple system software of the host machine can be collectively upgraded in conjunction with iW EMC/MC, DFU Plug-in and Local
CDS. For the details, refer to documents for iW EMC/MC and DFU Plug-in.
Host machine
Target PCB
Main Controller PCB
Category
Target system
software
iR2545/iR2535
iR2530/2525/2520
DC Control- iR2545/iR2535
ler PCB
File type
Remarks
Boot
USTUPDATE_iR2545_35_ BOOT_
vXXXX
There are 2 types of Main Controllers.
Program
USTUPDATE_iR2545_35_ bootable_lang_WLaaXXXX
Boot
USTUPDATE_ iR2530_25_20_
BOOT_ vXXXX
Program
USTUPDATE_ iR2530_25_20_bootable_ lang_WLaaXXXX
DCON
USTUPDATE_iR2545_35_ DCON_
vXXXX
iR2530/2525
Cassette 1
550 sheets type
USTUPDATE_iR2530_25_ DCON_
vXXXX
iR2530/2525/2520
Cassette 1
250 sheets type
USTUPDATE_ iR2530_25_20_
DCON_ vXXXX
CAUTION:
When upgrading the system software of Boot and
Bootable lang, be sure to
first upgrade Boot.
There are 3 types of DC Controllers.
Inner Finisher
Target PCB
Finisher Controller PCB
Target system software

FIN_CON
SST display
name
IFN_B1
190
Remarks
Refer to the Service Manual of the Inner Finisher for detailed procedures.
6. Troubleshooting
Procedure
NOTE:
The following describes the procedure to upgrade Boot as an example: For upgrading the other firmware, follow the same
procedure as Boot.
CAUTION:
When upgrading the system software of Boot and Bootable lang, be sure to first upgrade Boot.
1. Turn ON the Power Switch of the PC and start UST.
2. When turning On the Power Switch, a wizard is displayed to add a new hardware, and click "Cancel".
3. Enter service mode.

4. Press the arrow key and select "DOWNLOAD", and then press the OK key.
NOTE:
Download Mode is also available from the following user mode:
> System Settings > Update Firmware > Yes
5. Start UST once "USB DOWNLOAD AVAILABLE" is displayed.

6. Following the instruction on the screen, select "Next".
191
6. Troubleshooting
CAUTION:
Selecting firmware of a wrong model does not display "Select by printer name".
192
6. Troubleshooting
9. Following the instruction on the screen, select "Start".
10. Following the instruction on the screen, select "Yes".
11. The following screen is displayed. "UPDATING FIRMWARE" is displayed on the Control Panel of this machine.
CAUTION:
Do not turn OFF the power during the download/writing process
Do not turn OFF the power supply during the download/writing process of system software.
It can cause faulty startup after turning ON the power.
12. As the following screen is displayed when upgrading is completed, turn OFF and then ON the power switch to complete.
193
6. Troubleshooting
Service Call Request Function

This machine has a function that allows users to request service call easily.
Service call can be easily requested by pressing the Check Counter key on the Control Panel and then the [Service Call] button.
This function is disabled by default and the [Service Call] button is not displayed. To enable the button, it is necessary to make
settings in service mode.
The flow of basic operations is shown below.
1. A service technician enables the Service Call button.
2. When a problem that requires service call request occurs, the user makes a service call request on the Service Call Request
screen.
3. The E-RDS function of this machine sends the service call request notification to the UGW server based on the service call
request made by the user.
4. Service Center analyzes the notification which the UGW has received, and provide customer support (support by telephone,
dispatch of service technician, etc.).
5. A service technician who visits the user site performs repair work and then performs the repair completion process after the
work is completed.
Enabling of the Service Call Request Function (Display of the Button)

In order to enable the service call request function and display the Service Call Request button, set "1 (Enabled)" for the following
service mode. (The default setting value is "0".)
Service Mode > #SSSW > SW35 Bit1
NOTE:
In the case of a model for USA, the Service Call Request button will not be displayed even this setting is enabled (setting value
"1").
For the details on how to use the service call request function, refer to e-Manual > [Top] > [Troubleshooting] > [Service Call
Message] .
Service Call Request Completion Process

A service technician executes the following service mode to send the completion notification to the UGW server when the repair
work is completed.
Service Mode > #E-RDS > SCALLCMP
194
Error/Jam/Alarm
Outline...............................................196
Error Code.........................................197
Jam Code..........................................210
Alarm Code....................................... 214
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Outline
This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the product. These are classified into 3 codes
as follows.
Code type
Explanation
Reference
Error code
This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine.
Error Code Details on page 197
Jam code
This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine.
Main Unit on page 210
Alarm code
This code is displayed when a function of the machine is malfunc- Alarm Code Details on page 214
tioned.
196
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Error Code
Error Code Details
Ecod Detail
e
Code
E000
E001
E001
E001
E002
E003
E004
0001
0000
0001
0002
0000
0000
0000
Item
Description
Title
Fixing temperature abnormal rise
Description
The temperature detected by the main thermistor does not rise to the specified value during startup
control.
Remedy
1.Go through the following to clear the error: CLEAR > ENGIN > ERRCLR; and then turn OFF and
then ON the power.
2.Check connection of the Connectors (Thermistor Connector and AC Connector).
3.Replace the Fixing Main Thermistor (Film Unit).
4.Replace the Fixing Assembly.
5.Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB4).
Title
Description
The reading of the main thermistor is 250 deg C or more continuously for 200 msec.
Remedy
then ON the power.
Title
Description
The hardware circuit detects overheating of the main or sub thermistor for 200 msec.
Remedy
then ON the power.
Title
Description
The reading of the sub thermistor is 295 deg C or more continuously for 200 msec.
Remedy
then ON the power.
Title
Fixing unit temperature insufficient rise
Description
Remedy
then ON the power.
Title
Low fixing temperature detection after standby
Description
The reading of the main thermistor is less than 140 deg C continuously for 400 msec or more.
Remedy
then ON the power.
Title
Thermistor disconnection detection error
Description
When disconnection is detected with connector (J214) for 30 sec continuously.
197
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Ecod Detail
e
Code
Item
Description
E004
0000
Remedy
1.Check connection of the Connector (J214).

2.Replace the Film Unit.
E010
0001
Title
Unstable rotation of the Main Motor (M1)
Description
Remedy
1.Replace the Main Motor (M1).

Title
Unstable rotation of the Main Motor (M1)
Description
During motor rotation, detection is executed every 100 msec; however, the drive signal is absent 5
times in sequence.
Remedy
1.Replace the Main Motor (M1).

Title
Description
Remedy
1.Replace the Fixing Motor (M2).

Title
Description
During motor rotation, detection is executed every 100 msec; however, the drive signal is absent 5
times in sequence.
Remedy
1.Replace the Fixing Motor (M2).

Title
The path between the sub hopper and the developing assembly is clogged with toner.
Description
The Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (TS1) detects the absence of toner,while the Sub Hopper
Toner Sensor (TS2) detects the presence of toner. With the Developing Cylinder Clutch (CL3) turned
on, the hopper feedscrew motor (M7) is rotated for 1 sec intermittently 194 times; still, theDeveloping
Assembly Toner Sensor (TS1) does not detect the presence of toner. * Error occurs after the delivery
if a paper in passage exists.
Remedy
1.Replace the Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (TS1).

2.Replace the Sub Hopper Toner Sensor (TS2).
3.Replace the Toner Supply Assembly.
Title
The connector (J207) of Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (TS1) is disconnected.
Description
The Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (TS1) connection detection signal is absent for 100 msec 10
times in sequence. * Error occurs after the delivery if a paper in passage exists.
Remedy

Title
The Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (TS1) is disconnected.
Description
<At LOW SPEED> - The developing assembly toner sensor (TS1) ON counter is checked every 2.5
seconds, and the counter increments 1 count every 25 times when the sensor goes on, and 300 counts
are reached.
<At HIGH SPEED> - The developing assembly toner sensor (TS1) ON counter is checked every 1.5
seconds, and the counter increments 1 count every 15 times when the sensor goes on, and 300 counts
are reached.
Remedy

2.Correct the cable.
Title
The connector (J207) of Sub Hopper Toner Sensor (TS2) is disconnected.
Description
The Sub Hopper Toner Sensor (TS2) connection detection signal is absent for 100 msec 10 times in
sequence.
* Error occurs after the delivery if a paper in passage exists.
Remedy

2.Replace the Sub Hopper Toner Sensor (TS2).
Title
Failure of the Bottle Motor (M6)
E010
E014
E014
E020
E024
E024
E025
E025
0002
0001
0002
0000
0000
0001
0000
0001
198
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Ecod Detail
e
Code
E025
E110
E110
E110
E196
E197
E197
E202
E202
0001
0001
0002
0003
0000
0000
0001
0001
0002
Item
Description
Description
The bottle motor (M6) is unlocked when it goes on for 12 consecutive times at 0.1 sec. intervals. *
Error occurs after the delivery if a paper in passage exists.
Remedy
1.Replace the Bottle Motor (M6).

Title
Failure of the Scanner Motor (M21)
Description
The Scanner Motor (M21) speed lock signal does not indicate a locked state a specific period of time
after the Scanner Motor (M21) has been started.
Remedy
1.Check the cable.

2.Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
Title
Description
The speed lock signal indicates a deviation 10 times in sequence at intervals of 100 msec after the
signal has indicated a locked state.
Remedy
1.Check the cable.

Title
Description
The scanner motor (M21) speed lock signal does not indicate a locked state for 6.5 sec. after a
switchover is made from low to normal speed or for 8 sec. after a switchover is made from normal to
low speed.
Remedy
1.Check the cable.

Title
Error in EEPROM access
Description
20 retries failed after error occurred during communication with EEPROM.

* Error occurs after the delivery if a paper in passage exists.
Remedy
Title
Error in communication of Laser Driver PCB (PCB14)
Description
Communication error with Laser Driver PCB (communication data failure)
Remedy
1.Check the cable.

4.Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB1).
Title
Error in communication of Laser Driver PCB (PCB14)
Description
Communication error with Laser Driver PCB (serial communication failure)
Remedy
1.Check the cable.

Title
There is an error in the detection of the CCD home position.
Description
The attempt to detect the home position fails when the CCD is moved forward.
Remedy
1.Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable(Relay PCB (PCB2)-Main Controller PCB (PCB1)
64pin).
2.Replace the flexible cable.
3.Replace the CCD HP sensor (S22).
4.Replace the Scanner Motor (M21).
5.Replace the Relay PCB (PCB2).
Title
There is an error in the detection of the CCD home position.
Description
The attempt to detect the home position fails when the CCD is moved back.
199
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Ecod Detail
e
Code
Item
Description
E202
0002
Remedy
64pin).
3.Replace the CCD HP sensor (S22).
4.Replace the Scanner Motor (M21).
E225
0001
Title
The light intensity of the CCD is faulty.
Description
The light intensity of the CCD during shading is under the specified level.
Remedy
1.Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable.

3.Replace the CCD Unit.
Title
The reader unit power supply (24V) is faulty.
Description
At time of power-on, the 24V port is off.
Remedy
1.Disconnect and then connect the power supply harness connector of the reader assembly.
2.Replace the Reader Relay PCB (PCB2).
3.Replace the Power Supply PCB (PCB3).
4..Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB1).
Title
Description
At the start of a job, the 24V port is off.
Remedy
Title
Description
At the end of a job, the 24V port is off.
Remedy
Title
Description
When a load is being driven, the 24V port is off.
Remedy
Title
Error in controller communication
Description
The serial communication error such as parity error or overrun error is constantly detected.
Remedy
1.Check the Connectors.

Title
Error in controller communication
Description
The serial communication error such as parity error or overrun error is detected while printing.
Remedy

Title
EEPROM error of the CCD unit
Description
An error has occurred at power-on.
Remedy
50pin).
2.Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable(CCD unit- Relay PCB (PCB2)).
3.Disconnect and then connect the power supply harness connector.
Title
Description
An error has occurred during write operation.
E227
E227
E227
E227
E240
E240
E248
E248
0001
0002
0003
0004
0000
0001
0001
0002
200
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Ecod Detail
e
Code
Item
Description
E248
0002
Remedy
50pin).
E248
0003
Title
Description
An error has occurred during read operation following write operation.
Remedy
50pin).
Title
Error in Zero Cross
Description
Zero Cross failed to be detected for 500ms or more while the relay was ON. * The same condition is
detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy

Title
Reading unit communication error
Description
Reading error after writing.
Remedy
50pin).
Title
Reading unit communication error
Description
Reading error after writing.
Remedy
64pin).
Title
Release Motor (M2) error
Description
The sensing level of the release motor HP sensor (SR11) does not change within a specified period
when the release motor (M2) is driven. (Sensor OFF)
Remedy
1.Replace the Release Motor HP Sensor (SR11).

2.Replace the Release Motor (M2).
3.Replace the ADF Driver PCB.
Title
Release Motor (M2) error
Description
The sensing level of the release motor HP sensor (SR11) does not change within a specified period
when the release motor (M2) is driven. (Sensor ON)
Remedy
1.Replace the Release Motor HP Sensor (SR11).

2.Replace the Release Motor (M2).
3.Replace the ADF Driver PCB.
Title
Communication error
Description
The communication with the host machine is interrupted.
Remedy
1.Check the cable.

2.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1).
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
Title
EEPROM error
Description
The checksum for the EEPROM data has an error.
Remedy
Title
Shift Motor (M4) error
Description
The shift roller does not leave the shift roller home position when the Shift Motor (M4) has been driven
for 1.2 seconds.
E261
E280
E280
E413
E413
E500
E505
E520
0000
0003
0004
0001
0002
0000
0001
0001
201
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Ecod Detail
e
Code
Item
Description
E520
0001
Remedy
1.Replace the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S2).

2.Replace the Shift Motor (M4).
E520
0002
Title
Shift Motor (M4) error
Description
The shift roller does not return to the shift roller home position when the Shift Motor (M4) has been
driven for 1.2 seconds.
Remedy
1.Replace the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S2).

2.Replace the Shift Motor (M4).
Title
Stapler Motor (M10) error
Description
The stapler does not leave the staple home position when the Staple Motor (M10) has been driven
for 0.5 sec.
Remedy
1.Check the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Stapler.
2.Replace the Stapler.
Title
Stapler Motor (M10) error
Description
The stapler does not return to the staple home position when the Stapler Motor (M10) has been driven
for 0.5 sec.
Remedy
1.Check the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Stapler.
2.Replace the Stapler.
Title
STP Move Motor (M1) error
Description
The stapler does not leave the stapler move home position when the STP Move Motor (M1) has been
driven for 0.25 sec.
Remedy
1.Replace the Stapler Move HP Sensor (S10).

2.Check the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the STP Move Motor.
3.Check the stapler shift base.
4.Replace the STP Move Motor (M1).
Title
STP Move Motor (M1) error
Description
The stapler does not return to the stapler move home position when the STP Move Motor (M1) has
been driven for 2.8 sec.
Remedy
1.Replace the Stapler Move HP Sensor (S10).

2.Check the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the STP Move Motor.
3.Check the stapler shift base.
4.Replace the STP Move Motor (M1).
Title
Tray Lift Motor (M11) time out error
Description
The stack tray does not move within a specified time period.
Remedy
1.Replace the Tray Lift Motor (M11).

Title
Tray Lift Motor (M11) closing detect switch error
Description
The FG input cannot be detected when the Tray Lift Motor (M11) has been driven for 0.1 second.
Remedy
1.Replace the Stack Tray Clock Sensor (S13).

2.Replace the Tray Lift Motor (M11).
Title
Additional Tray Lift Motor (M12) time out error
Description
The stack tray does not move within a specified time period.
Remedy
1.Replace the Additional Tray Lift Motor (M12).

Title
Additional Tray Lift Motor (M12) closing detect switch error
Description
The FG input cannot be detected when the Additional Tray Lift Motor (M12) has been driven for 0.1
second.
Remedy
1.Replace the Additional Tray Clock Sensor (S23).

2.Replace the Additional Tray Lift Motor (M12).
Title
Shift Roller Release Motor (M5) error
Description
The shift roller does not leave the shift roller release home position when the Shift Roller Release
Motor (M5) has been driven for 0.1 sec.
E531
E531
E532
E532
E540
E540
E542
E542
E567
8001
8002
0001
0002
0001
0005
0001
0005
0001
202
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Ecod Detail
e
Code
Item
Description
E567
0001
Remedy
1.Replace the Shift Roller Release Sensor (S3).

2.Replace the Shift Roller Release Motor (M5).
E567
0002
Title
Shift Roller Release Motor (M5) error
Description
The shift roller does not return to the shift roller release home position when the Shift Roller Release
Motor (M5) has been driven for 0.06 sec.
Remedy
1.Replace the Shift Roller Release Sensor (S3).

2.Replace the Shift Roller Release Motor (M5).
Title
Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Motor fails to move from HP
Description
At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot move from HP, it is
detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.
Remedy
1. Check if the Motor (M6) Connector is physically removed.

2. Replace the Motor.
3. Check if the Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Sensor (S5) Connector is physically removed.
4. Replace the Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Sensor (S5).
Title
Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Motor fails to return to HP
Description
At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot return to HP, it is
detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.
Remedy
1. Check if the Motor (M6) Connector is physically removed.

2. Replace the Motor.
3. Check if the Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Sensor (S5) Connector is physically removed.
4. Replace the Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Sensor (S5).
Title
Gripper Open/Close Motor (M7) error
Description
The gripper unit does not leave the gripper unit home position when the Gripper Open/Close Motor
(M7) has been driven for 0.25 seconds.
Remedy
1.Replace the Grip Arm Sensor (S13).

2.Replace the Gripper Open/Close Motor (M7).
Title
Gripper Open/Close Motor (M7) error
Description
The gripper unit does not return to the gripper unit home position when the Gripper Open/Close Motor
Remedy
1.Replace the Grip Arm Sensor (S13).

2.Replace the Gripper Open/Close Motor (M7).
Title
Gripper Unit Move Motor (M2) error
Description
The gripper unit does not leave the gripper unit home position when the Gripper Unit Move Motor (M2)
has been driven for 3.8 seconds.
Remedy
1.Replace the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7).

2.Replace the Gripper Unit Move Motor (M2).
Title
Gripper Unit Move Motor (M2) error
Description
The gripper unit does not return to the gripper unit home position when the Gripper Unit Move Motor
Remedy
1.Replace the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7).

2.Replace the Gripper Unit Move Motor (M2).
Title
The built-in SD card is not detected
Description
Remedy
Title
Access to the built-in SD card failed
Description
Remedy
Title
Error in UFDI communication
Description
The communication system error (such as reception timeout or checksum error) occurred.
Remedy
1.Check and Replace the cable.

3.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
E56F
E56F
E571
E571
E575
E575
E602
E602
E711
0001
0002
0001
0002
0001
0002
0001
1105
0001
203
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Ecod Detail
e
Code
E713
E716
E716
E719
E719
E736
E743
E744
E744
E744
E744
E750
E750
0000
0000
0010
0000
0002
0000
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0100
0200
Item
Description
Title
Erroneous communication with finisher
Description
The communication does not restart by the error retry after the communication failure with the finisher.
Remedy
1.Check the cable.

3.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
Title
Erroneous communication with optional cassette pedestal
Description
After the presence of a cassette pedestal has been detected, the communication fails to be normal
for 5 sec.
Remedy
1.Check the cable.

3.Replace the Cassette Pedestal Driver PCB.
Title
Failure of the communication with the 2-way unit
Description
When the communication with the 2-way unit is faulty after detecting the connection with the finisher.
Remedy
1.Install the 2-way unit.

2.Check the cable.
4.Replace the 2-way unit driver PCB.
Title
Erroneous communication with New Card Reader (serial communication)
Description
Remedy
Title
Erroneous communication with Coin Vendor (serial communication)
Description
Remedy
Title
Erroneous communication between CCU and controller.
Description
Remedy
Title
DDI communication error
Description
The communication error is detected between the Main Controller PCB and the Reader Relay PCB.
Remedy
1. Connection error between the Main Controller PCB and the Reader Relay PCB.
2. Failure of the Reader Relay PCB (PCB2).
3. Failure of the Main Controller PCB (PCB1).
Title
Mismatched version between the language file and the Bootable
Description
Remedy
Title
Oversized language file in HDD
Description
Remedy
Title
Mismatched version between the language file and the Bootable
Description
Remedy
Title
Language file reading error
Description
Remedy
Title
The combination error of the DC Controller PCB (PCB4) and the Main Controller PCB (PCB1).
Description
When the combination of the hardware of the DC Controller PCB (PCB4) and the Main Controller PCB
(PCB1) or the firmware of these is not correct.
Remedy
1. Update the correct firmware which matched the model.

2. Replace the Power Supply PCB (PCB3).
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB4).
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB1).
Title
The combination error of the DC Controller PCB (PCB4) and the Main Controller PCB (PCB1). (In the
case of the different country model)
Description
When the combination of the hardware of the DC Controller PCB (PCB4) and the Main Controller PCB
(PCB1) or the firmware of these is not correct.
204
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Ecod Detail
e
Code
Item
Description
E750
0200
Remedy
1. Update the correct firmware which matched the model.

2. Replace the Power Supply PCB (PCB3).
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB4).
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB1).
E804
0000
Title
Failure of the Power Supply Cooloing Fan (FAN6)
Description
When lock signal is detected for 5 sec while the Power Supply Cooloing Fan (FAN6) is stopped. * The
same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy
1.Disconnect and then connect the connector (J205) on the DC Controller PCB (PCB4).
2.Replace the Power Supply Cooloing Fan (FAN6).
Title
Unstable rotation of the Power Supply Cooloing Fan (FAN6)
Description
When lock signal failed to be detected for 5 sec while the Power Supply Cooloing Fan (FAN6) is driven.
Remedy
2.Replace the Power Supply Cooloing Fan (FAN6).
Title
Failure of the Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FAN3)
Description
"When lock signal is detected for 5 sec while the Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FAN3) is stopped. * The same
condition is detected after the error retry is performed."
Remedy
2.Replace the Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FAN3).
Title
Unstable rotation of the Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FAN3) or Finisher Fan 1 (M8) or Finisher Fan 2 (M9)
Description
1.When lock signal failed to be detected for 5 sec while the Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FAN3) is driven.
2.When lock signal failed to be detected for 5 sec while the Finisher Fan 1 (M8) is driven.
3.When lock signal failed to be detected for 5 sec while the Finisher Fan 2 (M9) is driven.
Remedy
2.Replace the Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FAN3).
3.Replace the Finisher Fan 1 (M8).
4.Replace the Finisher Fan 2 (M9).
Title
Failure of the Exhaust Fan (Front) (FAN4)
Description
When lock signal is detected for 5 sec while the Exhaust Fan (Front) (FAN4) is stopped.
Remedy
2.Replace the Exhaust Fan (Front) (FAN4).
Title
Unstable rotation of the Exhaust Fan (Front) (FAN4)
Description
When lock signal failed to be detected for 5 sec while the Exhaust Fan (Front) (FAN4) is driven. * The
same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy
2.Replace the Exhaust Fan (Front) (FAN4).
Title
Edge Shutter Home Position error
Description
When the home position of the shutter is not detected
Remedy
1. Check the connector (J215).

2. Replace the shutter HP sensor (S10).
3. Replace the shutter motor (M8).
4. Replace the DC controller PCB (PCB4).
Title
Failure of Paper Edge Cooling Fan (Rear) (FAN1)
Description
When the lock signal is detected for 5 sec while the paper edge cooling fan (rear) operates.
* The same status is detected again after the retry operation.
Remedy
1. Check the connector (J215) on the DC controller PCB (PCB4).

2. Replace the paper edge cooling fan (rear) (FAN1)
Title
Rotation error of Paper Edge Cooling Fan (Rear) (FAN1)
Description
When the home position of the shutter is not detected
E804
E805
E805
E805
E805
E840
E840
E840
0001
0000
0001
0002
0003
0000
0001
0002
205
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Ecod Detail
e
Code
Item
Description
E840
0002
Remedy

2. Replace the paper edge cooling fan (rear) (FAN1)
E840
0003
Title
Failure of Paper Edge Cooling Fan (Front) (FAN2)
Description
When the lock signal is detected for 5 sec while the paper edge cooling fan (front) stops. * The same
status is detected again after the retry operation.
Remedy
1. Check the connector (J215) on the DC controller PCB (UN2).

2. Replace the paper edge Cooling fan (front) (FAN2)
Title
Rotation error of Paper Edge Cooling Fan (Front) (FM2)
Description
When the lock signal is detected for 5 sec while the fixing film edge cooling fan (front) operates. * The
same status is detected again after the retry operation.
Remedy

2. Replace the paper edge cooling fan (front) (FM2)
E840
0004
FAX Error Code

Outline
Error Code Outline
An error code is used to indicate a fault in a machine, and is indicated in the machine's LCD or reports, showing the nature
(symptoms) of the fault. Using the errorcode, the user or the service man can readily find out how to correct the fault by simply
referring to the User's Manual or service manual.
An error code may be either of the following two types:
User Error Codes
A fault indicated as a user error code is one that can easily be corrected by the user, as by operating the machine. It takes
the form of "# + number."
Service Error Codes
If a fault calls for a service man for correction, it is indicated as a service man error code in the form of "## + number" or
"SYSTEM ERROR E + number."
NOTE:
A service error code expressed in the form of "## + number" will not appear on the LCD, Error Tx Report, or Activity Report
while the machine remainsin factory default state. To check a service error code, shift bit 0 of service soft switch #1 SSSW
SW01 to '1'.
For the causes and countermeasures of error codes, refer to the separate G3/G4 Facsimile Error Code List.
User Error Code

User Error Code
No.
Description
#0001
An original has jammed.
#0003
Time-out for copying or sending/receiving a single page has occurred.
#0005
Time-out for initial identification (T0/T1) has occurred.
#0009
Recording paper has jammed or is absent.
#0012
Recording paper is absent at the other party.
#0018
Auto call initiation has failed.
#0022
Documents could not be forwarded to the specified destination because there is insufficient memory available.
The machine can store up to total of 71 jobs of send and transmission report in memory.
#0037
Image memory overflow at time of reception has occurred.
#0059
The number you dial and connected number (CSI) does not match.
#0099
A job was canceled during transmission to a USB memory media device.

A secured print job was automatically canceled after the timeout period elapsed.
206
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
No.
Description
#0401
The USB memory media device is full or the maximum number of files that can be stored in the root directory (the top level
of the directory tree in the USB memory media device) has been reached.
#0403
The job failed because a file with the same name already exists.
Generally, if a file with the same name exists, a number ranging from 1 to 999 is added to the tail of the name to prevent
naming conflicts.
However, this error occurred because a file with the same number added to its file name already exists.
#0404
The job failed because the write protect switch of the USB memory media device was on.
#0406
The job failed because the USB memory media device was pulled out during transmission.
An error occurred while data, such as image data, was being transferred to the USB memory media device.
(The connected device may be formatted with a file system that is not supported by the machine.)
#0407
The length of the full path to the specified file (or folder) exceeded the supported limit.
The transmission to the USB memory media device was not properly performed because the length of the full path including
the root and file name exceeded the limit.
#0701
The specified Department ID does not exist, or the password has changed.
#0703
The memory for image data is full when sending color documents.
#0705
The send operation was interrupted because the size of the image data is larger than that specified in <Maximum TX Data
Size> in E-mail/I-Fax Settings.
#0749
You could not execute the job because a service call message is being displayed.
#0751
The file server is not functioning.

The network is down (the server is unable to connect to the network or was disconnected).
#0752
The SMTP server name and e-mail address are incorrect.

The domain name is incorrect.
The SMTP server is not functioning.
The network is down.
#0753
A TCP/IP error occurred while sending an e-mail. (Socket, Select error, etc.)
#0755
Jobs cannot be sent because TCP/IP is not functioning correctly.

The IP address is not set.
When the machine was turned ON, an IP address was not assigned to the machine by the DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP server.
#0801
A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the SMTP server to send an e-mail or send/receive an
I-fax.
The SMTP server returned an error while trying to connect.
The destination is not correct.
An error occurred on the server side during transmission to a file server.
#0802
The name of the SMTP server is incorrect.

The DNS server address settings are incorrect.
The domain name is incorrect.
Connection to the DNS server failed.
#0804
You do not have permission to access the folder.
#0806
An incorrect user name or password was specified when sending documents to a file server.
An incorrect destination was specified when sending an e-mail or I-fax.
#0808
A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the FTP server.
The FTP server returned an error while trying to connect.
The destination is not correct.
An error occurred on the server during transmission.
#0810
A POP server connection error occurred while receiving an I-fax.

The POP server returned an error during the connection.
A timeout error occurred on the server while connecting to the POP server.
#0813
The login name or password for access to the POP server is incorrect.
#0816
You have reached the quota for the number of pages you can scan.
#0818
You have received data that cannot be processed (the attached file cannot be printed).
#0819
You have received data that cannot be processed (MIME information is incorrect).
#0820
You have received data that cannot be processed (BASE 64 or uuencode is incorrect).
#0821
You have received data that cannot be processed (TIFF analysis error).
When you are using the Media Print function, printing cannot be performed because you have selected a JPEG or TIFF file
with unsupported file formats or a corrupted image file.
#0827
You have received data that cannot be processed (contains MIME information that is not supported).
#0828
You have received HTML data.
#0829
Data consisting of more than approximately 1,000 pages is received.
#0839
The user name or password for the SMTP Authentication is incorrect.
#0852
An error occurred because the main power switch was turned OFF while a job was being processed.
207
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
No.
Description
#0853
A print job sent from a computer via a printer driver is canceled since <Only allow secure print jobs> is set to 'On'.
#0995
The communication reservation was canceled.
Service Error Code

Service Error Code
No.
Tx/Rx
Description
##0100 [Tx]
At time of transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified.
##0101 [Tx/Rx]
The modem speed does not match that of the other party.
##0102 [Tx]
At time of transmission, fall-back cannot be used.
##0103 [Rx]
At time of reception, EOL cannot be detected for 5 sec (15 sec if CBT).
##0104 [Tx]
At time of transmission, RTN or PIN is received.
##0106 [Rx]
At time of reception, the procedural signal is received for 6 sec while in wait for the signal.
##0107 [Rx]
At time of reception, the transmitting party cannot use fall-back.
##0109 [Tx]
At time of transmission, a signal other than DIS, DTC, FTT, CFR, or CRP is received, and the procedural signal has
been sent more than specified.
##0111 [Tx/Rx]
Memory error has occurred.
##0114 [Rx]
At time of reception, RTN is transmitted.
##0200 [Rx]
At time of reception, no image carrier is detected for 5 sec.
##0201 [Tx/Rx]
DCN is received outside the normal parity procedure.
##0224 [Tx]
Communication protocol signal error.
##0228 [Rx]
Abnormal management information of image data.
##0232 [Tx]
Encoding error has occurred.
##0237 [Rx]
Decoding error has occurred.
##0261 [Tx/Rx]
System error has occurred.
##0280 [Tx]
##0281 [Tx]
##0282 [Tx]
##0283 [Tx]
##0284 [Tx]
At time of transmission, DCN is received after transmission of TCF.
##0285 [Tx]
At time of transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOP.
##0286 [Tx]
At time of transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOM.
##0287 [Tx]
At time of transmission, DCN is received after transmission of MPS.
##0288 [Tx]
After transmission of EOP, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN has been received.
##0289 [Tx]
After transmission of EOM, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN has been received.
##0290 [Tx]
After transmission of MPS, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN has been received.
##0670 [Tx]
At time of V.8 lAte start, the V.8 ability of DIS front the receiving party is expected to be detected, and the CI signal
is expected to be transmitted in response; however, the procedure fails to advance, and the line is released because
of T1 time-out.
##0671 [Rx]
At time of V.8 arrival, procedure fails to move to phase 2 after detection of CM signal from caller, causing T1 timeout and releasing line.
##0672 [Tx]
At time of V.34 transmission, a shift in procedure from phase 2 to phase 3 and the reafter stops, causing the machine
to release the line and suffer T1 timeout.
##0673 [Rx]
At time of V.34 reception, a shift in procedure from phase 2 to phase 3 and thereafter stops, causing the machine
to release the line and suffer T1 timeout.
##0674 [Tx]
At time of V.34 transmission, a shift in procedure from phase 3 and phase 4 to the control channel and thereafter
stops, causing the machine to release the line and suffer T1 timeout.
##0675 [Rx]
At time of V.34 reception, a shift in procedure from phase 3 and phase 4 to the control channel and thereafter stops,
causing the machine to release the line and suffer T1 timeout.
##0750 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of PPS-NULL, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##0752 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of PPS- NULL.
##0753 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of
PPS-NULL, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
208
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
No.
Tx/Rx
Description
##0754 [Tx]
PPS-NULL..
##0755 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of PPS-MPS, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##0757 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after retransmission of PPS- MPS.
##0758 [Tx]
PPS-MPS, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##0759 [Tx]
PPS-MPS.
##0762 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of PPS- EOM.
##0763 [Tx]
PPS-MPS, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##0764 [Tx]
PPS-EOM.
##0765 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of PPS-EOP, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##0767 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of PPS-EOP.
##0768 [Tx]
PPS-EOP, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##0769 [Tx]
PPS-EOP, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##0770 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of EOR-NULL, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##0772 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR- NULL..
##0773 [Tx]
EOR-NULL, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##0774 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR- NULL..
##0775 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of EOR-MPS, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##0778 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission
EOR-MPS, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##0779 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR- MPS.
##0780 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of EOR-EOM, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##0782 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR- EOM.
##0783 [Tx]
EOR-EOM, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##0784 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of EOR-EOP, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##0787 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-EOP.
##0788 [Tx]
EOR-EOP, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##0789 [Tx]
At time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-EOP.
##0790 [Rx]
At time of ECM reception, ERR is transmitted after transmission of EOR-Q.
##0791 [Tx]
While ECM mode procedure is under way, a signal other than a meaningful signal is received.
##0792 [Rx]
At time of ECM reception, PPS-NULL cannot be detected over partial page processing.
##0793 [Rx]
At time of ECM reception, no effective frame is received while high-speed signal reception is under way, thus causing
time-out.
##0794 [Tx]
At time of ECM reception, PPR with all 0s is received.
##0795 [Tx/Rx]
A fault has occurred in code processing for communication.
209
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Jam Code
Main Unit
S40
S42
S12
S19
S7
S5
S1
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
Sensor Name
Sensor ID
0101
Delay jam
S1
0102
Delay jam
SR2
0103
Delay jam
SR4
0104
Delay jam
SR8
0105
Delay jam
S5
0107
Delay jam
S19
0108
Delay jam
S12
0109
Delay jam
S42
010A
Delay jam
Reversal sensor
S40
010D
Delay jam
Duplex feed sensor
S7
0201
Stationary jam
S1
0202
Stationary jam
SR2
0203
Stationary jam
SR4
0204
Stationary jam
SR8
0205
Stationary jam
S5
0207
Stationary jam
S19
0208
Stationary jam
S12
0209
Stationary jam
S42
020A
Stationary jam
Reversal sensor
S40
020D
Stationary jam
Duplex feed sensor
S7
0A01
Power-on jam
S1
0A02
Power-on jam
SR2
210
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
Sensor Name
Sensor ID
0A03
Power-on jam
SR4
0A04
Power-on jam
SR8
0A05
Power-on jam
S5
0A07
Power-on jam
S19
0A08
Power-on jam
S12
0A09
Power-on jam
S42
0A0A
Power-on jam
Reversal sensor
S40
0A0D
Power-on jam
Duplex feed sensor
S7
0B00
Door open jam
0CA0
Sequence jam (*1)
0CF1
Other jams
0D91
Wrong size specified
S5
9901
Sequence jam (*1)
9902
Sequence jam (*1)
9903
Sequence jam (*1)
9904
Sequence jam (*1)
9905
Sequence jam (*1)
9906
Sequence jam (*1)
9907
Sequence jam (*1)
9908
Sequence jam (*1)
9909
Sequence jam (*1)
FF00
Unknown jam
FF01
Unknown jam
FF02
Unknown jam
FF03
Unknown jam
FF04
Unknown jam
FF05
Unknown jam
FF07
Unknown jam
FF08
Unknown jam
FF09
Unknown jam
FF0A
Unknown jam
FF0D
Unknown jam
FF91
Unknown jam
FFF1
Unknown jam
*1: The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door or turning OFF and then ON the power supply.
211
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
DADF-AA1
SR11
SR5
SR1
SR3
SR2
SR5
SR6
SR2
SR3
SR1
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
Sensor Name
Sensor ID
0003
Delay jam
Registration sensor
SR1
0004
Stationary jam
Registration sensor
SR1
0005
Delay jam
Read sensor
SR2
0006
Stationary jam
Read sensor
SR2
0007
Delay jam
Delivery reversal sensor
SR3
0008
Stationary jam
SR3
0044
Stationary jam (first document)
Registration sensor
SR1
0045
Delay jam (first document)
Read sensor
SR2
0046
Read sensor
SR2
0047
Delay jam (first document)
SR3
0048
SR3
0071
Timing error
0073
Release NG
Release motor HP sensor
SR11
0090
ADF open jam
Copyboard cover open/closed Sensor 0
S21
0091
User ADF open jam
Copyboard cover open/closed Sensor 0
S21
0092
ADF cover open jam
Cover open/closed sensor
SR6
0093
User cover open jam
Cover open/closed sensor
SR6
0094
Initial stationary jam
Registration sensor or Read sensor or Deliv- SR1,SR2,SR3

ery reversal sensor
0095
Pickup NG
Document set sensor
212
SR5
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Inner Finisher-B1
S22
S15
S2
S16
S1
S6
S18
S19
S20
S10
S13
S9
S7
S12
S11
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
Sensor Name
Sensor ID
1001
Delay jam
Entrance sensor
S1
1101
Stationary jam
Entrance sensor
S1
1102
Stationary jam
Processing tray sensor
S6
1300
Power-on jam
Entrance sensor, Processing tray sensor
S1, S6
1400
Door open jam
Front cover switch
SW1
1500
STP jam
Stapler HP sensor, Stapler edging sensor
S18, S19
1701
Initial rotation jam
Entrance sensor
S1
1C20
Error jam
Shift roller HP sensor
S2
1C32
Error jam
Stapler move HP sensor
S10
1C40
Error jam
Stack tray clock sensor
S14
1C42
Error jam
Additional tray clock sensor
S23
1C67
Error jam
Shift roller release sensor
S3
1C6F
Error jam
Entrance roller release /stopper HP sensor
S5
1C71
Error jam
Grip arm sensor
S13
1C75
Error jam
Gripper unit HP sensor
S7
1F00
Other jams
Entrance sensor
S1
213
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Alarm Code
Alarm Code Details
Alarm Code
Title
A. Movement /B. Cause /C. Measures
04
0011
Cassette 1 Paper Feed Retry error
Movement: No change.
CAUSE: The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out 4 times.
MEASURE: Check the pick-up/paper feed/separation
rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper remains
around the paper feed area or not.
04
0012
04
0013
04
0014
04
0017
Manual Feeder Paper Feed Retry error
MEASURE: Check the paper feed roller and the separation pad. -> Check whether a scrap of paper remains
10
0020
Toner (Bk) prior delivery alarm
CAUSE: The remaining quantity of the toner became
the specific level or less.
MEASURE: Replace the toner Cartridge.
10
0100
Toner cartridge replacement completion alarm
The replacement of the Toner Cartridge was detected.
11
0001
Waste Toner Container full
Movement: A message "The waste toner container is

full." is displayed on the Control Panel, and the machine
is stopped.
Cause: The Waste Toner Container becomes full.
eplace the Waste Toner Container.
11
0010
Waste Toner Container prior delivery alarm
Movement: A message is displayed on the Control

Panel. (Continuous printing is enabled.)
Cause: Display of Waste Toner Container preparation
alarm Measures: Replace the Waste Toner Container.
31
0005
Environment Sensor reading alarm
Movement: It becomes as follow: environment temperature= 0 degC, environment humidity= 0%.

Cause: Connection of the Environment Sensor cannot
be detected.
Measures:
1) Check the connection of the Environment Sensor
(HU1).
2) Replace the Environment Sensor (HU1).
37
0001
Repair Request (Corrupt Image)
37
0002
Repair Request (Paper Jam)
37
0003
Repair Request (Corrupt Image/Paper Jam)
37
0004
Repair Request (Other Problems)
214
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Alarm Code
Title
A. Movement /B. Cause /C. Measures
37
0005
Repair Request (Corrupt Image/Other Problems)
37
0006
Repair Request (Paper Jam/Other Problems)
37
0007
Repair Request (Corrupt Image/Paper Jam/Other Prob- lems)
37
1000
Repair Request Cancel
37
2000
Repair Completed
50
0010
Alarm due to original separation failure
Movement: Nothing in particular.

Cause: Condition unable to separate 1st sheet of original from the ADF occurs 3 times.
Measures: Check rotation of the Pickup Motor (M1) ->
Check the life of the Pickup Roller -> Check if paper lint
is at the Pickup Slot.
50
0012
Feed Motor Fan alarm
CAUSE: Disconnection of the ADF Exhaust Fan (FM1)
or the failure of ADF Exhaust Fan (FM1)
Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the ADF
Exhaust Fan (FM1)
85
0001
System error clear
85
0002
Auto-restore caused by service replacement
85
0003
85
0004
85
0005
215
Service Mode
Overview........................................... 217
Details of Service Mode.................... 220
Remote UI Service Mode.................. 306
8. Service Mode
Overview
Outline of Service Mode
The items that follow may be checked/set using the machine's service mode, which is designed the way the service mode used
in fax machines is designed in terms of contents and operation.
Service data item
Discription
#SSSW
Use it to register/set basic fax functions (e.g., error control, echo remedy, communication error correction). Use
it to make settings related counter functions.
#MENU
Use it to register/set items related to functions needed at time of installation (e.g., NL equalizer, transmission
level).
#NUMERIC
These setting items are for inputting numeric parameters such as the various conditions for the RTN signal
transmission.
#SPECIAL
These setting items are for telephone network control functions. Do not use.
#NCU
These setting items are for telephone network control functions such as the selection signal transmission conditions and the detection conditions, for the control signals sent from the exchange.
#FAX
Do not use.
#SCAN
These setting items are for image adjustment in scanning.
#PRINT
These setting items are for image adjustment in printer assembly and for special mode for the field-related
measures.
#NETWORK
Use it to confirm the contents of the installed CA certificates. Then this is a setting items related to NETWORK.
#CODEC
This is a setting items related to CODEC.
#SYSTEM
This is a setting items related to SYSTEM.
#ACC
Register the accessories.
#COUNTER
Use it to check estimates for maintenance/parts replacement.
#LMS
Use it to set the inactivity of the transmitted license and the license inactivity without transmitting.
#E-RDS
This is a setting items related to e-RDS (Embedded RDS).
#REPORT
Use it to generate reports on various service data.
#DOWNLOAD
Use it to download firmware to the ROM of a PCB in question.
#CLEAR
Use it to reset various data to initial settings.
#DISPLAY
The error and detailed code which have happened now are displayed.
Display the engine speed of the main controller PCB.
#ROM
Displays ROM information, such as version numbers and checksums.
#TEST MODE
Makes various status checks, such as contact sensor, sensor and print status.
217
8. Service Mode
Using the Mode

<Operation at the time of Bit SW>
<Operation at the time of Parameter>
1) Selecting Service Mode
1) Selecting Service Mode
#SSSW
#SSSW
2) Selecting a Menu Item
Select the Menu item using the
[left arrow]/[right arrow] on the
touch panel.
#NUMERIC
2) Press [OK] on the

touch panel.
#SSSW
001
000000000
3) Selecting a Menu Item

Press [OK].
#SSSW
033
3) Press [OK].
#NUMERIC
001
000000000
4) Selecting a Bit Switch

Select the bit using the
[left arrow]/[right arrow] on
the touch panel.
#SSSW
033
4) Selecting a Prarameter
Select the Prarameter using the
[left arrow]/[right arrow].
#NUMERIC
002
000000000
5) Registering/Setting Data
Enter data using the keypad,
and press the [OK].
#SSSW
033
5) Registering/Setting Data
Enter data using the keypad,
and then press [OK].
#NUMERIC
002
10
000000001
6) Press the [Stop]/[Additional

functions]/[Reset] key to end
the service mode.
6) Press the [Stop]/[Additional

functions]/[Reset] key to end
the service mode.
NOTE:
Push the (*) key when inputting the minus(-).
Therefore, (+) and (-) is changed.
Setting of Bit Switch

Outline
Bit Switch Composition
Bi
t3
Bi
t2
Bi
t1
Bi
t0
t4
Bi
t5
Bi
t6
Bi
#SSSW
001
Bi
t7
The items registered and set by each of these switches comprise 8-bit switches.
The figure below shows which numbers are assigned to which bits. Each bit has a value of either 0 or 1.
CAUTION:
Do not change service data identified as "not used"; they are set as initial settings.
218
8. Service Mode
Back-Up
At time of shipment from the factory, all machines are adjusted individually, and adjustment values are recorded in their respective
service labels.
If you have replaced the CCD/CIS unit or the DC controller PCB, or if you have initialized the RAM, the adjustment values will
return to their default settings. If there has been any change in a service mode item, be sure to update its setting indicated on
the service label.
As necessary, make use of the space in the service label (as when recording an item not found on the label).
Service Label: behind the rear cover (right)
Service Label
The item of service kabel is described below.
In this machine, the output of the service label does not support.
FACTORY
1
2
3
#PRINT> #PRINT NUMERIC>
034
xxx
035
xxx
036
xxx
037
xxx
038
xxx
054
xxx
136
xxx
140
xxx
141
xxx
142
xxx
143
xxx
145
xxx
146
xxx
147
xxx
148
xxx
149
xxx
150
xxx
SCAN> READER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY>
ADJ-X
xxx
ADJ-Y
xxx
ADJ-S
xxx
ADJ-Y-DF
xxx
STRD-POS
xxx
FACTORY
1
2
3
SCAN> READER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY>
ADJ-X-MG
xxx
W-PLT-X
xxx
W-PLT-Y
xxx
W-PLT-Z
xxx
50_RG
xxx
50_GB
xxx
100_RG
xxx
100_GB
xxx
MTF3-M1
xxx
MTF3-M2
xxx
MTF3-M3
xxx
MTF3-M4
xxx
MTF3-M5
xxx
MTF3-M6
xxx
MTF3-M7
xxx
MTF3-M8
xxx
MTF3-M9
xxx
SCAN> READER> ADJUST> PASCAL>
OFST-P-K
xxx
SCAN> FEEDER> ADJUST>
DOCST
xxx
LA-SPEED
xxx
DOC-LNGH
xxx
Body No
219
8. Service Mode
Details of Service Mode

#SSSW
SSSW Composition
NOTE:
This document describes the default settings for the system for USA.
The default settings used in the service mode vary depending on the shipping destination and model.
No.
Initial setting
Function
SW01
00000000
error/copy control
SW02
00010000
network connection setting
SW03
00000000
echo remedy setting
SW04
00000000
communication fault remedy setting
SW05
00000000
standard function (DIS signal) setting
SW06
10010000
read condition setting
SW7-SW11
not used
SW12
00000010
page timer setting
SW13
00000000
meter/inch resolution setting
SW14
00000001
inch/meter resolution setting
SW15
00000000
dial-in FAX/TEL switch-over function
SW16-17
not used
SW18
00000000
SW19-21
remedies for communication faults (2)

not used
SW22
00000000
SW23-24
fault remedy setting

not used
SW25
00000000
SW26-27
report indication resolution setting

not used
SW28
00000000
SW29
V.8/V.34 protocol settings

not used
SW30
00000000
SW31
Assigning a New Dial Tone Detection Method

not used
SW32
00000000
NCU version setting
SW33
00000000
counter function settings
SW34
00011011
waste toner container/toner cartridge/drum unit display settings
SW35
00001000
e-RDS function settings
SW36 - SW50
not used
Details
SSSW-SW01
List of Functions
Bit
Function
service error code
output
not output
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
220
8. Service Mode
Detailed Discussions of Bit 0
Selects whether or not service error codes are output. When output is selected, service error codes is report.
SSSW-SW02
List of Functions
Bit
Function
not used
not used
not used
not used
V34 CCRTN OFF
Disable
Not disable
not used
not used
F network silent termination service
Compatible
Not compatible

V.34 control channel retrain can be disabled. When "1" is set, control channel retrain is not started by the own machine.

Select whether or not the machine is compatible with the F network (facsimile communication network) silent termination service.
When "Compatible" is selected, the machine automatically receives a fax upon detection of the FC signal (1300 Hz tonal signal)
without generating a ringtone.
SSSW-SW03
List of Functions
Bit
Function
TCF criteria
Loose
Normal
Echo protect tone for high-speed transmission
Transmitted
Not transmitted
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
Tonal signal before CED signal transmission
Transmitted
Not transmitted

Select whether to make the TCF criteria loose when the system with a V.34 modem receives an image using the V.17 protocol.
When "Loose" is selected, fallback hardly occurs when an image is received using the V.17 protocol.
However, since the transmission speed is fast, erroneous lines can be generated after start of image reception or the
communication time can become long due to retransmission of erroneous frames.
221
8. Service Mode
Selects whether or not the echo protect tone is transmitted for high-speed transmission (9600 or 7200 bps).
If errors due to line conditions occur frequently during fax transmission, select Transmitted.
When Transmitted is selected, a non-modulated carrier is transmitted as a synchronization signal before the image transmission.
NOTE:
Codes for errors that can occur during transmission because of line conditions:
##100, ##104, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##750, ##755, ##760,##765

Use it to enable/disable transmission of a 1080-Hz tonal signal before transmission of the CED signal.
Select 'transmit' if errors occur frequently because of an echo when reception is from overseas.
NOTE:
Any of the following error code may be indicated because of an echo at time of reception
##0005, ##0101, ##0106, ##0107, ##0114, ##0200, ##0201, ##0790
SSSW-SW04
List of Functions
Bit
Function
not used
Check CI frequency
Yes
No
the number of final flag sequences of protocol

signals
Reception mode after CFR signal transmission
high speed
high speed/low speed
the length of the period of ignoring low speed sig- 1500ms

nals after CFR output
700ms
Frequency of CI signal is checked when PBX is

set.
Yes
No
CNG signal for manual transmission
Not transmitted
Transmitted
CED signal for manual reception
Not transmitted
Transmitted

In automatic recieving, CI frequency check can be selected. If Yes is selected, the upper and lower limits of the CI frequency
are checked, and automatic recieving can only go ahead if both values meet German regulations.

Use it to select the number of last flag sequences for a protocol signal (transmission speed at 300 bps). Select '2' if the other
party fails to receive the protocol signal properly.
NOTE:
Any of the following error codes may be indicated at time of transmission
##0100, ##0280, ##0281, ##0750, ##0753, ##0754, ##0755, ##0758, ##0759, ##0760, ##0763 ##0764, ##0765, ##0768,
##0769,##0770, ##0773, ##0775, ##0778, ##0780, ##0783, ##0785, ##0788
222
8. Service Mode

Use it to select an appropriate reception mode after transmission of the CFR signal.
If errors occur frequently at time of reception because of the condition of the line, select 'high speed' for reception mode and, at
the same time, selects 'do not receive' for 'ECM reception.'
NOTE:
Any of the following error codes may be indicated at time of reception because of line condition
##0107, ##0114, ##0201
Be sure to change bit 4 before changing this bit; if errors still occur, change this bit.
When 'high speed' is selected, only high-speed signals (images) will be received after transmission of the CFR signal.

Use it to select the time length during which low-speed signals are ignored after transmission of the CFR signal.
If the condition of the line is not good and, therefore, the reception of image signals is difficult, select '1500 ms.'

In the countries that need approval of CI signal frequency check, no checking on frequency set at PBX when changing the
frequency to PSTN setting and PBX setting for frequency checks.

Selects whether or not to transmit CNG signal during manual transmission.
In manual transmitting to a fax with the FAX/TEL switching mode, if there are frequent errors due to failure to switch to fax mode,
select "Transmitted" for the CNG signal.

Selects whether or not to transmit CED signals during manual reception.
If the other fax does not transmit even when you start manual reception, select "Transmitted" for the CED signal.
SSSW-SW05
List of Functions
Bit
Function
not used
Conversion from mm to inch (text mode)
execute
do not execute
Conversion from mm to inch (text/photo mode) execute
do not execute
transmit bit 33 and thereafter for DIS signal
prohibit
do not prohibit
Recording paper length availability declared in

DIS signal
A4 /B4 size
Arbitrary size
not used
not used
not used
223
8. Service Mode
Use it to enable/disable millimeter/inch conversion in sub scanning direction for images read in text mode.
Scanning direction in conversion follows the Bit 2 setting of SW14.
Use it to enable/disable millimeter/inch conversion in sub scanning direction for images read in text/photo mode while bit 1 is set
to '1'.
Use it specify whether or not to transmit bit 33 and thereafter for the DIS signal.
If prohibit is selected, Super Fine reception from a non-Canon machine can no longer be used.
CAUTION:
If prohibit is selected, Super Fine reception from a non-Canon machine can no longer be used.

Selects whether or not the recording paper length declared in the DIS signal is A4 size.
When receiving documents made up of long pages, to have the document divided into two pages at the transmitting fax, select
A4 size.
NOTE:
When A4 size is selected, this fax uses the DIS signal to tell the transmitting fax that it is equipped with A4 size recording paper.
The transmitting fax that receives this DIS signal divides long pages into A4 size pages before transmitting it to the receiving fax.
Some fax models do not so divide long documents.
SSSW-SW06
List of Functions
Bit
Function
not used
not used
not used
FAX stamp display setting
Displayed
Not displayed
original read width
LTR
A4
not used
not used
not used

Select whether to display the stamp menu in the user menu after installation of the optional stamp unit.
Use it to select a read width for originals.
If LTR is selected, the machine will read LTR originals at LTR width (214mm).
SSSW-SW012
List of Functions
Bit
0
Function
1-page time-out length for transmission
1
2
1-page time-out length for transmission

(HT transmission)
1-page time-out length for reception
224
8. Service Mode
Bit
Function
1-page time-out length for reception
not used
page timer setting by transmission/reception
set
do not set
The machine will stop the ongoing communication if the transmission/reception of a single original page takes 32 min or more.
To use the timer for a purpose other than this function, refer to the tables that follow, and select an appropriate time length.
When 'do not enable' is selected using bit 7, the time-out length for a single page for all modes will depend on the setting of bit
0 and bit 1.
Time-Out Length for Transmission/reception
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
8min.
16min.
32min.
64min.
Time-Out Length for Transmission (text mode)

Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
8min.
16min.
32min.
64min.
Time-Out Length for Transmission (image mode other than text mode)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
8min.
16min.
32min.
64min.
Time-Out Length for Reception

Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
8min.
16min.
32min.
64min.
SSSW-SW013
List of Functions
Bit
Function
not used
not used
Convert "inch" into "mm" when transmitting the convert

received image data
do not convert
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
225
8. Service Mode
It converts "inch" into "mm" when transmitting the received image data.
SSSW-SW014
List of Functions
Bit
Function
not used
not used
direction of scanning for inch/mm conversion
both main and sub scanning di- sub scanning direction only
rections
not used
inch-configuration resolution declaration
declare
do not declare
not used
not used
not used

Use it to specify whether to convert or not convert an inch-configuration resolution into a millimeter-configuration resolution for
image read in G3 transmission:
either in sub scanning direction only or in both main and sub scanning directions. The setting is valid only when bit 1 of SW05 of
#SSSW is set to '1'.
Use it to specify whether to declare or not declare an inch-configuration resolution to the other machine for G3 communication:
if 'declare' is selected, the machine will indicate that it reads and records at an inch-configuration resolution using the DIS, DCS,
or DTC signal.
SSSW-SW15
List of Functions
Bit
Function
not used
not used
Reception of call through caller ID display line

(main unit line)
Yes
No
not used
not used
not used
Detection of continuous signal at fax/tel switch- Yes

over
No
not used

When a machine which is not compatible with the caller ID display/modem dial-in service is connected to the subscriber line which
is compatible with that service, the "main unit line" is made ready for receiving the incoming call.
Select whether to detect a continuous ROT signal at FAX/TEL switchover.
SSSW-SW18
List of Functions
Bit
Function
detection of carrier between DCS and TCF
detect
do not detect
wait time for carrier between DCS and TCF
600msec
300msec
To disable communication control for IP network. Yes
226
No
8. Service Mode
Bit
Function
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used

For reception, the absence of the carrier between DCS and TCF may be detected.
If the machine returns FTT while the other party (PC-FAX in particular) is sending TCF to cause a reception error, be sure to set
the bit to 1.
If the error still occurs, set bit 1 of #1 SSSW SW18 to 1.
This function is valid only when the machine uses an R288F modem.
For reception, the length of time during which the absence of the carrier is detected between DCS and TCF may be set.
This bit is valid when 1 is set to bit 0 of #1 SSSW SW18.
You can change the parameter relating to communication control for IP network (SSSW-SW02 bit4) to the existing control in a
batch process.
The parameter value is handled as a fixed value.
SSSW-SW22
List of Functions
Bit
Function
To disable NSX transmission.
Yes
No
not used
not used
Prohibit manual polling
Yes
No
not used
not used
not used
not used

Nonstandard protocol (own company mode) can be disabled.
Selects whether to prohibit by manual polling (off hook key + start key).
SSSW-SW25
List of Functions
Bit
Function
Transmission telephone numbers displayed on Other fax number

reports from CSI
Called number
not used
If void CSI has been received, handle as nonreceived CSI.
Yes
No
Menu display of message language
Display
Do not display
not used
not used
not used
227
8. Service Mode
Bit
7
Function
not used
1
-
0
-

Selects the transmission telephone number displayed on reports after the completion of transmission.
When Called number is selected, the telephone number the fax called is displayed on reports.
When Other fax number is selected, the telephone number sent from the other fax (the CSI signal data) is displayed on reports.
At "1" on this Bit, ignore the void CSI if received and if the dial has been made at this point, the dialed number will be indicated
on the LCD/ Report screen.
At "0" on this Bit, even though the dialed number is acknowledged, LCD/Report screen will indicate nothing.
When Display is selected, adds a Message Language menu to the user data System Setting.
This allows selecting different languages which to show displays and reports.
SSSW-SW28
List of Functions
Bit
Function
Caller V.8 protocol
No
Yes
Called party V.8 protocol
No
Yes
Caller V.8 protocol late start
No
Yes
Called party V.8 protocol late start
No
Yes
V.34 reception fallback
Prohibited
Not prohibited
V.34 transmission fallback
Prohibited
Not prohibited
not used
not used

Select whether to use the V.8 protocol when calling.
If NO is selected, the V.8 protocol is inhibited at calling and the V.21 protocol is used
Select whether to use the V.8 protocol when called.
If NO is selected, the V8 protocol is inhibited when called and the V.21 protocol is used.
If ANSam signal is not received during transmission, select whether to use the V.8 protocol when the other fax machine declares
the V.8 protocol in DIS signal.
If NO is selected, the CI signal is not transmitted and the V.8 protocol is not used even if the DIS that specifies the V.8 protocol
is received.
The V.8 late start is not executed during manual transmission regardless of this setting.
Select whether to declare the V.8 protocol in DIS signal for reception.
If NO is selected, the V.8 protocol cannot be used because it is not declared in DIS signal.
The V.8 late start is not executed during manual reception regardless of this setting.
Select whether the receiver falls back during V.34 reception.
If 'Prohibit' is selected, the receiver does not fall back.
228
8. Service Mode
Select whether the transmitter falls beck during V.34 transmission.
If 'Prohibit' is selected, teh transmitter does not fall back.
SSSW-SW30
List of Functions
Bit
Function
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
New dial tone detection method
Detect with the new method.
Detect with the existing method.
not used
not used

When "Detect with the new method" is selected, tone is detected for 3.5 seconds before call origination in order to discriminate
between dial tone and voice. If dial tone is detected and
the time since line seizure is 3.5 seconds or longer, call origination takes place immediately. If the time since line seizure is less
than 3.5 seconds,
call origination takes place after waiting for 1 second. (If the time since line seizure reaches 3.5 seconds during the 1-second
waiting period, call origination takes place immediately. By default, "Detect with a new method" is assigned for this SW.
SSSW-SW32
List of Functions
Bit
Function
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
NCU version
NCU2002
NCU2004
not used
not used

NCU (Network Control Unit) version can be selected.
SSSW-SW33
List of Functions
Bit
Function
count B4 (Print) as large size
Yes
No
not used
count B4 (Scan) as large size
Yes
No
the counter display type change in Japan and USA
Toner cartridge replacement counter display
Yes
No
not used
not used

Use it to specify whether B4 paper (Print) should be counted as large-size paper.
If 'yes' is selected, B4 paper will be counted as large-size paper.
If 'no' is selected, on the other hand, B4 paper will be counted as small-size paper.
229
8. Service Mode
Use it to specify whether B4 paper (Scan) should be counted as large-size paper.
If 'yes' is selected, B4 paper will be counted as large-size paper.
If 'no' is selected, on the other hand, B4 paper will be counted as small-size paper.
Detailed Discussions of Bit 3/4
Select whether to switch the counter display type in effect in Japan and USA to the conventional or new type.
Select "Yes" to display counters in the new type.
Select "No" to display counters in the conventional type.
Bit4
Bit3
Conventional type(type1)
New type(type2)
New type(type3)
New type(type4)

Select whether to display the toner cartridge replacement counter.
When "1" is selected, the counter is displayed.
When "0" is selected, the counter is not displayed.
SSSW-SW34
List of Functions
Bit
Function
Display the waste toner full warning
Yes
No
Switch the waste toner full warning
Drum replacement required message

displayed on an operator call
E019 displayed on an service call
User drum replacement menu display
Yes
No
Display the preparation warning message of the waste

toner container
Display
Not display
Display the replacement warning message of the toner

cartridge
Display
Not display
not used
not used
not used
Details of [Bit 0]
You can select whether to display waste toner full warning.
Selecting "1" notifies waste toner full warning. (Initial value)
Selecting "0" does not notify waste toner full warning.
Details of [Bit 1]
Regarding the waste toner full warning, you can select display of drum replacement by an operator call or display of E019 by a
service call.
Selecting "1" displays drum replacement by an operator call. (Initial value)
Selecting "0" displays E019 by a service call.
Details of [Bit 2]
You can select whether to display the menu of drum replacement by the user.
Selecting "1" displays the menu.
Selecting "0" does not display the menu.
Initial value:
For Europe: 1
For locations other than Europe: 0
230
8. Service Mode
Details of [Bit 3]
To set whether to display the Waste Toner Container preparation warning message in the status area of LUI.
Selecting "1" displays the warning. (Initial value)
Selecting "0" does not display the warning.
Details of [Bit 4]
To set whether to display the Toner Bottle replacement warning message in the status area of LUI.
Selecting "1" displays the warning. (Initial value)
Selecting "0" does not display the warning.
NOTE:
To notify the waste toner full warning in the status line of the Control Panel, set "1" for Bit 0 and Bit 3 of SW34.
SSSW-SW35
Not used
Bit
Function
e-RDS function ON/OFF
Yes
No
Call button function ON/OFF
Yes
No
ScanToMedia function enable/disable

Default: 0
enable
disable
MediaPrint function enable/disable
enable
disable
IC card authentication management function ON/OFF
Yes
No
Handling of a scan job at device logout

Default: 0
Stop a scan job
Not stop a scan job
Handling of display of the stop confirmation screen when the Not display the stop confirmation Display the stop confirmation
stop key is pressed during a scan job, except remote scan screen (same specification as
screen (the display specification
that of the existing models)
following that of the iR series)
Switching to display/hide the start button of the counter print Display the counter print button Hide the counter print button
(known as billing counter report)
Default: 1

Select whether to set the e-RDS function.
When "1" is selected, the function is set.
When "0" is selected, the function is not set.
Select whether to enable the service call request function and display the Service Call Request button.
When "1" is selected, the function is enabled and the button is displayed.
When "0" is selected, the function is disabled and the button is not displayed.
CAUTION:
In the case of a model for USA, the button will not be displayed even if "1" (enabled) is selected.

Select whether to enable or disable the ScanToMedia function.
When "1" is selected, the function is enabled.
When "0" is selected, the function is disabled.
Select whether to enable the MediaPrint function.
When "0" is selected, the function is disabled.
231
8. Service Mode
Select whether to set the IC card authentication function.
When "1" is selected, the function is set.
When "0" is selected, the function is not set.
You can select whether to stop the scan job at the time of device log logout.
Selecting "1" stops the scan job.
Selecting "0" does not stop the scan job.
This is the setting to display the stop confirmation screen when the stop key is pressed during a scan job, except remote scan.
Selecting "1" hides the stop confirmation screen.
Selecting "0" displays the stop confirmation screen.
You can set to display/hide the start button of the counter print (known as billing counter report).
Selecting "1" displays the counter print button.
Selecting "0" hides the counter print button.
SSSW-SW36
List of Functions
Bit
Function
Service switch to disable auSend

Default: 0
Disable auSend. You can hide the set- Enabling/disabling of auSend follows
ting item of auSend in RUI/LUI.
the RUI setting.
auSend display in RUI/LUI is not affected.
Switch to display/hide the automatic shutdown Display the automatic shutdown time
time setting screen
setting screen (Enable the automatic
shutdown function)
Not display the automatic shutdown

time setting screen (Disable the automatic shutdown function)
Change of [User Management Settings] after No change

import of DCM file
Forced OFF
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used

You can select whether to disable the auSend function.
Selecting "1" disables auSend. You can hide the setting item of auSend in RUI/LUI.
Selecting "0" follows the RUI setting to enable/disable auSend. auSend display in RUI/LUI is not affected.
Details of [Bit 1]
Set whether to display the automatic shutdown time setting screen.
Selecting "1" displays the setting screen.
Selecting "0" does not display the setting screen.
Initial value:
For Europe: 1
For locations other than Europe: 0
Details of [Bit 2]
When setting information of [Settings/Registration] menu is imported using DCM function, the user management settings are
forcibly disabled. However, it is not forcibly disabled by setting this item to "1".
Selecting "1" does not change the user management settings.
Selecting "0" forcibly disable the user management settings.
Initial value: 0
232
8. Service Mode
#MENU
Menu Switch Composition
No.
Function
Range of settings
005
NL equalizer
0: OFF
1: ON
006
Telephone line monitor
0: DIAL
1: SERVICEMAN [1]
2: SERVICEMAN [2]
3: OFF
007
Transmission level (ATT)
From 0 to 15 (ex: 15= -15 dBm)
008
V.34 modulation speed upper limit 0: 3429

1: 3200
2: 3000
3: 2800
4: 2743
5: 2400
009
V34 data speed upper limit
0: 33.6kbs
1: 31.2kbs
2: 28.8kbs
3: 26.4kbs
4: 24.0kbs
5: 21.6kbs
6: 19.2kbs
7: 16.8kbs
8: 14.4kbs
9: 12.0kbs
10: 9.6kbs
11: 7.2kbs
12: 4.8kbs
13: 2.4kbs
010
Frequency of pseudoring signal
0: 50Hz
1: 25Hz
2: 17Hz
Deatails
005: NL equalizer
Use it to enable-disable the NL equalizer.
If errors occur often during communication because of the condition of the line, enable (ON) the NL equalizer.
NOTE:
Any of the following error codes may be indicated at time of transmission because of the line condition:
##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##750, ##755, ##765, ##774, ##779, ##784, ##789
##103, ##107, ##114, ##201, ##790, ##793
006: Telephone line monitor

Use it to s the telephone line monitor function:
DIAL: generate the monitor sound of the telephone line using the speaker from the start of transmission to DIS.
SERVICEMAN [1]: generate the monitor sound of the telephone line using the speaker from the start of communication to the
end of it.
SERVICEMAN [2]: generate the monitor sound of the telephone line2 (Option).
OFF: do not generate the monitor sound of the telephone line using the speaker
007: ATT transmission level

Use it to set the transmission level (ATT).
Raise the transmission level if errors occur frequently at time of communication because of
the condition of the line. (It means close to 8)
233
8. Service Mode
NOTE:
##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##280, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##284, ##750,
##752, ##754, ##755, ##757, ##759, ##760, ##762, ##764, ##765,
##767, ##769, ##770, ##772, ##774, ##775, ##777, ##779, ##780, ##782, ##784,
##785, ##787, ##789
Any of the following error codes may be indicated at time of reception because of the line condition:
##103, ##106, ##107, ##201, ##793
##103, ##106, ##107, ##201, ##793
008: V.34 modulation speed upper limit

Use it to set an upper limit to the modulation speed (baud rate) for the V.34 primary channel.
009: V.34 data speed upper limit

Use it to set an upper limit to the data transmission speed for the V.34 primary channel between 2.4K and 33.6K bps in increments
of 2400 bps. (0: 2.4K to 13:33.6K bps).
010: Frequency of the pseudo CI signal

You may select a frequency for the pseudo CI signal.
Some types of external telephones do not ring when the fax/tel switch-over function is ON.
To sound the ring, change the pseudo CI signal
#NUMERIC
Numerical Parameter Composition
No.
Item
Range of settings
002
RTN transmission condition(1)
1% to 99%
003
RTN transmission condition (2)
2 to 99 item
004
RTN transmission condition (3)
1 to 99 lines
005
NCC pause time length (pre-ID code)
1 to 60 sec
006
NCC pause time length (post-ID code)
1 to 60 sec
008
Time from Right After Dialing by Auto-dialing to Start of Communication 1 to 65 sec
010
line condition identification time length
0 to 9999 (10 msec)
011
T.30T1 timer (for reception)
0 to 9999 (10 msec)
012
The maximum number of received lines
0 to 65535 (line) * Unlimited in the case of 0
013
T.30 EOL timer
500 to 3000 (10 msec)
015
hooking detection time length
0 to 999
016
time length to first response at time of fax/tel switchover
0 to 9
017
pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time length
0 to 999
018
pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length (short)
0 to 999
019
pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length (long)
0 to 999
020
pseudo CI signal pattern ON time length
0 to 999
021
pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length (short)
0 to 999
022
pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length (long)
0 to 999
023
CNG detection level at time of fax/tel switchover
0 to 7
024
pseudo RBT transmission level at time of fax/tel switchover
10 to 20
025
Answering machine connection function signal detection time
0 to 999
027
preamble detection time length for V21 low-speed flag
20 (x 10ms)
051
Hooking detection threshold
0 to 655035
053
Setting of DTMF call origination count at remote reception of fax
0 to 65535 (25 counts)
054
Setting of busy tone output time when handset is used
0 to 480 (60min) (0: no data acquisition)
055
acquisition period of environmental log data
0 to 480 (60min)
056
display the type of soft counter 1
101 (Fixed)
0 to 20 (120/230V)
234
8. Service Mode
No.
Item
Range of settings
057
Display the type of soft counter 2
0 to 999
058
0 to 999
059
0 to 999
060
0 to 999
061
0 to 999
062
Communication termination timer at SMTP transmission protocol level 0 to 65535 sec
063
Communication termination timer at SMTP reception protocol level
0 to 65535 sec
064
Communication termination timer at POP reception protocol level
0 to 65535 sec
065
Communication termination timer at FTP transmission protocol level
0 to 65535 sec
066
Communication termination timer from start to completion of the trans- 0 to 65535 sec
mission of SMTP transmission data
067
Communication termination timer from start to completion of the recep- 0 to 65535 sec
tion of SMTP reception data
068
Communication termination timer from start to completion of the recep- 0 to 65535 sec
tion of POP reception data
069
Communication termination timer from start to completion of the trans- 0 to 65535 sec
mission of FTP transmission data
074
e-RDS RGW port number
1 to 65535 default: 443
075
Interval of transmission for e-RDS 3rd party
1 to 168 (hours) default: 24
Details
<002:RTN transmission condition (1)><003: RTN transmission condition (2)><004: RTN
transmission condition (3)>
Use it to set RTN signal transmission conditions. Raise these parameters for more lenient conditions if errors occur frequently at
time of reception because of transmission of the RTN signal.
NOTE:
Any of the following error codes may be indicated at time of reception because of RTN signal transmission
##0104, ##0107, ##0114, ##0201
RTN signal transmission condition (1) affects the ratio of error lines to the total number of lines per single page of received images.
RTN signal transmission condition (2) affects the standard value (*2) of burst errors (*1).
RTN signal condition (3) affects the number of errors not reaching the standard value of burst errors.
*1: transmission error occurring cover several lines.
*2: for instance, if '15' is set, a single burst error will represent an error occurring continuously cover 15 lines.
If any of these lines is detected while an image signal is being received, the RTN signal will be transmitted after receiving the
protocol signal of the transmitting party. Higher parameters restrict the transmission of the RTN signal.
005:NCC pause length (pre-ID code)

Use it to set the length of the pause automatically entered between access code and ID code when the NCC (New Common
Carrier) line is used for dialing.
006:NCC pause length (post-ID code)

Use it to set the length of the pause automatically entered between ID code and telephone number of the other party when the
NCC (New Common Carrier) line is used for dialing.
008: Time from Right After Dialing by Auto-dialing to Start of Communication

The time to shift to transmission after automatic dialing can be set. The timing to start communication after connecting to the
other party is delayed by the specified period of time.
010: line connection identification length

Use it to set the time for identifying the line connection.
Raise this parameter if errors occur frequently at time of communication because of the condition of the line
235
8. Service Mode
NOTE:
Any of the following error codes may be indicated because of the condition of the line ##0005, ##0018
The line condition identification time is between when the dial signal is transmitted and when the line condition is cut for the
transmitting party, while it is between when the DIS signal is transmitted and when the line is cut for the receiving party.
011: T.30 T1 timer (for reception)

Set the T1 timer for the receiver (wait time after DIS transmission starts until a significant signal is received).
012: The maximum number of received lines

The number of lines at reception can be limited.
013:T.30 EOL timer

Set it so that the 1-line transmission time is longer for reception to prevent reception errors
caused by a long data length per line (e.g., computer FAX).
016: time length to first response at time of fax/tel switchover

Allows setting of the time from seizing the line till pseudo RBT is sent, when the Fax/ Tel switching function is operating.
017:pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time length/018: pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time
length (short)/019: pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length (long)
Use it to set the pseudo CI signal pattern transmitted at time of a fax/tel switchover.
017: pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time length/018: pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length (short)/019: pseudo RBT signal
pattern OFF time length (long)
020: pseudo CI signal pattern ON time length/021: pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time
length (short)/022: pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length (long)
Use it to set the pseudo CI signal pattern transmitted at time of a fax/tel switchover.
023:CNG detention level for fax/tel switchover

Use it to set the CNG detention level for a fax/tel switchover.
024:pseudo RBT transmission level at time of fax/tel switchover

Use it to set the pseudo transmission level for a fax/tel switchover.
025: Answering machine connection function signal detection time

Sets the signal detection time for the answering machine connection function operation.
When the answering machine connection function is operating, if the function does not operate normally because the fax does
not detect CNG signal sent from the line, raise this parameter to increase the signal detection time.
027:V.21 low-speed flag preamble identification length

Use it to detect the time of detection after which command analysis is started after detecting V.21 low-speed command preambles
continuously for a specific period of time.
056 - 061: Count type select

Use it to confirm the count type indicated on the Counter Check screen, which appears in response to a press on the Counter
key.
When '0' is selected, count type will not be indicated.
056: Use it to indicate the type of software counter 1 of the control panel. The type of soft counter 1 cannot be changed.
057: Use it to change the type of soft counter 2* of the control panel to suit the needs of the user.
*:The default type settings of soft counter is different from models.
<Soft Counter Specifications>
The soft counters are classified a follows in terms of input numbers:
100s: total
236
8. Service Mode
200s: copy
300s: print
400s: copy + print
500s: scan
700s: received file print
800s: report pint
900s: transmitted scan
Guide to the Table
1: Count sheets of all sizes by one.
2: Count sheets of the large size by two.
C: full color
Bk: black mono
L: large size (larger than A4/LTR)
S: small size (A4/LTR or smaller)
NOTE:
To make a change so that B4 papers (for print) will be counted as large-size, use
service mode: make the following selections, and change bit 0 to '1': #SSSW>SW33.
To make a change so that B4 papers (for scan) will be counted as large-size, use
service mode: make the following selections, and change bit 2 to '1': #SSSW>SW33.
Serial
No. on
counter
check
screen
Counter type
Print system
Bk 1-sided L
Bk 1-sided S
Bk 2-sided L
Bk 2-sided S
Local PDL FAX

copy print print
Re- Local PDL FAX Re- Local PDL FAX Re- Local PDL FAX Report copy print print port copy print print port copy print print port
print
print
print
print
101
Total1
102
Total2
103
Total (L)
104
Total (S)
108
Total (Bk1)
109
Total (Bk2)
112
Total (Bk/L)
113
Total (Bk/S)
114
Total1 (2-sided)
115
Total2 (2-sided)
116
L (2-sided)
117
S (2-sided)
126
TotalA1
127
TotalA2
128
TotalA (L)
129
TotalA (S)
132
TotalA (Bk1)
133
TotalA (Bk2)
136
TotalA (Bk/L)
137
TotalA (Bk/S)
138
TotalA1 (2-sided)
139
TotalA2 (2-sided)
140
L A (2-sided)
141
S A (2-sided)
150
TotalB1
237
8. Service Mode
Serial
No. on
counter
check
screen
Counter type
Print system
Bk 1-sided L
Local PDL FAX
copy print print
Bk 1-sided S
Bk 2-sided L
Bk 2-sided S
print
print
print
print
151
TotalB2
152
TotalB (L)
153
TotalB (S)
156
TotalB (Bk1)
157
TotalB (Bk2)
160
TotalB (Bk/L)
161
TotalB (Bk/S)
162
TotalB1 (2-sided)
163
TotalB2 (2-sided)
164
LB (2-sided)
165
SB (2-sided)
201
Copy(Total1)
202
Copy(Total2)
203
Copy(L)
204
Copy(S)
205
CopyA (Total1)
206
CopyA (Total2)
207
CopyA (L)
208
CopyA (S)
209
Local
copy(Total1)
210
Local
copy(Total2)
211
Local copy(L) 1
212
Local copy(S)
221
Copy(Bk1)
222
Copy(Bk2)
227
Copy(Bk/L)
228
Copy(Bk/S)
237
Copy(Bk/L/2sided)
238
Copy(Bk/S/2sided)
249
CopyA (Bk1)
250
CopyA (Bk2)
255
CopyA (Bk/L) 1
256
CopyA (Bk/S)
265
CopyA
(Bk/L/2-sided)
266
CopyA
(Bk/S/2-sided)
277
Local
copy(Bk1)
278
Local
copy(Bk2)
283
Local
copy(Bk/L)
284
Local
copy(Bk/S)
1
1
1
1
1
1
238
8. Service Mode
Serial
No. on
counter
check
screen
Counter type
Print system
Bk 1-sided L
Local PDL FAX
copy print print
Bk 1-sided S
Bk 2-sided L
Bk 2-sided S
print
print
print
print
293
Local
copy(Bk/L/2sided)
294
Local
copy(Bk/S/2sided)
301
Print (Total1)
302
Print (Total2)
303
Print (L)
304
Print (S)
305
PrintA (Total1)
306
PrintA (Total2)
307
PrintA (L)
308
PrintA (S)
313
Print (Bk1)
314
Print (Bk2)
319
Print (Bk/L)
320
Print (Bk/S)
329
Print (Bk/L
330
Print (Bk/S/2sided)
331
PDLprint (Total1)
332
PDL print (Total2)
333
PDL print (L)
334
PDL print (S)
339
PDL print
(Bk1)
340
PDL print
(Bk2)
345
PDL print
(Bk/L)
346
PDL print
(Bk/S)
355
PDL print
(Bk/L/2- sided)
356
PDL print
(Bk/S)
403
Copy+Print
(Bk/L)
404
Copy+Print
(Bk/S)
405
Copy+Print
(Bk2)
406
Copy+Print
(Bk1)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
411
Copy+Print (L) 1
412
Copy+Print
(S)
413
Copy+Print (2) 2
414
Copy+Print (1) 1
239
8. Service Mode
Serial
No. on
counter
check
screen
Counter type
Print system
Bk 1-sided L
Local PDL FAX
copy print print
421
Copy+Print
(Bk/L)
422
Copy+Print
(Bk/S)
701
Recieved print
(Total1)
702
Recieved print
(Total2)
703
Recieved print
(L)
704
Recieved print
(S)
709
Recieved print
(Bk1)
710
Recieved print
(Bk2)
715
Recieved print
(Bk/L)
716
Recieved print
(Bk/S)
725
Recieved print
(Bk/L/2- sided)
726
Recieved print
(Bk/ S/2-sided)
801
Report print
(Total1)
802
Report print
(Total2)
803
Report print
(L)
804
Report print
(S)
809
Report print
(Bk1)
810
Report print
(Bk2)
815
Report print
(Bk/L)
816
Report print
(Bk/S)
825
Report print
(Bk/L)
826
Report print
(Bk/S)
Bk 1-sided S
Bk 2-sided L
Bk 2-sided S
print
print
print
print
1
1
1
1
240
8. Service Mode
Serial
No. on
counter
check
screen
Counter type
Scan system
Bk 1-sided L
Total EFilescan mail Shar
scan
e
DBsc
an
Bk 1-sided S
Email
FileShar
e DB
scan
FileShar
e DB
BoxF
scan
Bk 2-sided L
Bk 2-sided S
E- Total Total EFileEFileE- Total

mail scan scan mail Shar mail Shar mail scan
Filescan e DB File- e DB FileShar
scan Shar scan Shar
e DB
e DB
e DB
Box
scan
BOX
scan
501
Scan (Total1)
505
Bk scan (Total1)
506
Bk scan (Total2)
507
Bk scan (L)
508
Bk scan (S)
509
C scanTotal (1)
510
C scanTotal (2)
511
C scan (L)
512
C scan (S)
915
Transmission scan total2

(C)
916

(Bk)
917

(C)
918
Transmission scanTotal3
(Bk)
921
(C)
922
(Bk)
929
(C)
930
(Bk)
945
Transmission scan/ E-mail

(C)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
062: Communication termination timer at SMTP transmission protocol level

Communication termination timer at SMTP transmission protocol level can be set.
063: Communication termination timer at SMTP reception protocol level

Communication termination timer at SMTP reception protocol level can be set.
064: Communication termination timer at POP reception protocol level

Communication termination timer at POP reception protocol level can be set.
065: Communication termination timer at FTP transmission protocol level

Communication termination timer at FTP transmission protocol level can be set.
066: Communication termination timer from start to completion of the transmission of

SMTP transmission data
Communication termination timer from start to completion of the transmission of SMTP transmission data can be set.
067: Communication termination timer from start to completion of the reception of SMTP
reception data
Communication termination timer from start to completion of the reception of SMTP reception data can be set.
241
8. Service Mode
068: Communication termination timer from start to completion of the reception of POP
reception data
Communication termination timer from start to completion of the reception of POP reception data can be set.
069: Communication termination timer from start to completion of the transmission of

FTP transmission data
Communication termination timer from start to completion of the transmission of FTP transmission data can be set.
074: Port number of e-RDS RGW

Port number of e-RDS RGW can be set.
1 to 65535
Default: 443
075: Transmission intervals for e-RDS 3rd party

Transmission intervals for e-RDS 3rd party can be set.
1 to 168 (hours)
Default: 24
076: CC-VI coin vendor pickup pulse transmission confirmation timer

Coin vendor pickup pulse transmission confirmation timerSetting range: 0 to 65535 (ms)
Default: 0
077: CC-VI coin vendor pickup pulse transmission confirmation retry timer
Coin vendor pickup pulse transmission confirmation retry timer
Setting range: 0 to 65535 (ms)
Default: 0
#SCAN
Setting of Scanner Functions (SCANNER)
Item1
#SCAN SW
No.
Initial setting
Range of settings
SW01 - 04
Function
Not used
SW05
Differs according to the location. Changes "AB configuration/Inch configuration"

of the original size detection
SW06
Allows to change the configuration of the original size detection in the book mode.
#SCAN NUMERIC 001: - 032:
Not used
033:
50
Vertical scan magnification correction (scanning on BOOK)
034:
50
Horizontal scan magnification correction (scanning on BOOK)
035: - 046:
Not used
047:
50
Vertical scan magnification correction (scanning on ADF)
048:
50
Horizontal scan magnification correction (scanning on ADF)
049: - 134:
135:
Not used
30
Leading edge trimming length when performing

fax operation using the Copyboard (0.1 mm)
136: - 137:
138:
Not used
15
Leading edge frame length when performing

copy operation using the Copyboard (0.1 mm)
139: - 144:
Not used
145:
30
Leading edge trimming length when performing

fax operation using the ADF (0.1 mm)
146:
30
Trailing edge trimming length when performing

fax operation using the ADF (0.1 mm)
242
8. Service Mode
Item1
No.
Initial setting
Range of settings
Function
#SCAN NUMERIC 147:
10
Left-right frame length when performing fax operation using the ADF (0.1 mm)
148:
25

copy operation using the ADF (0.1 mm)
149: - 164:
165:
Not used
4

SEND SCAN using the Copyboard (0.1 mm)
166: - 167:
168:
Not used
0

SEND SCAN using the ADF (0.1 mm)
169: - 192:
Not used
193:
0: LEGAL
ADF special paper, standardized size: LGL
1: FOOLSCAP
misidentification-ready
2: M_OFICIO
3: A_FOOLSCAP
4: Not used
5: G_LEGAL
6: A_OFICIO
7: B_OFICIO
8: OFICIO
9: E_OFICIO
10: F4A
11 : Indian-LGL (For customization)
194:
0: LTR/B5
1: G_LTR
2: A_LTR
3: K_LGL
4: EXE
ADF special paper, standardized size: LTR

195:
0: LTR_R/B5R/A4R
1: FOOLSCAP
2: OFFICIO
3: E_OFFICIO
4: G_LTR_R
5: A_LTR_R
6: K_LGL_R
7: EXE_R
ADF special paper, standardized size: LTR_R

196: - 350:
Item1
Item2
READER
DISPLAY
Item3
CCD
Not used
Item4
Initial
setting
Appropriate
guideline
TARGET-B
Target value of shading for blue
TARGET-G
Target value of shading for green
TARGET-R
Target value of shading for red
OFST
Not used
OFST-B
Adjustment value of offset level on CCD (blue)
OFST-G
Adjustment value of offset level on CCD (green)
OFST-R
Adjustment value of offset level on CCD (red)
OFST-O
Adjustment value of offset level in odd bit on CCD
OFST-E
Adjustment value of offset level in even bit on CCD
GAIN
Not used
GAIN-B
Adjustment value of gain level on CCD (blue)
GAIN-G
Adjustment value of gain level on CCD (green)
GAIN-R
Adjustment value of gain level on CCD (red)
GAIN-O
Adjustment value of gain level in odd bit on CCD
GAIN-E
IO
Description
Adjustment value of gain level in even bit on CCD
R-CON
Firmware version of reader controller PCB
FEEDER
ROM version of DADF controller PCB
243
8. Service Mode
Item1
Item2
READER
ADJUST
Item3
ADJ-XY
CCD
Item4
Initial
setting
Appropriate
guideline
Description
ADJ-X
20
1 to 211, 1=0.1mm Adjustment of scanning system image lead edge

position (image's scan-start position in vertical
scanning direction)
ADJ-Y
79
1 to 254, 1=0.1mm Adjustment value of image scan-start position <Ydirection>
ADJ-S
121
25 to 500, 1=0.1mm Adjustment of CCD/CIS scan-start cell position (image scan-start position in horizontal scanning direction)
ADJ-Y-DF
79
1 to 254, 1=0.1mm Adjustment of horizontal scanning position at feeder mode
STRD-POS
100
1 to 200
ADJ-X-MG
-10 to +10, 1=0.1% Fine adjustment of magnification ration in vertical

scanning when scanning with reader copyboard
W-PLT-X
8271
1 to 9999
White label data entry with standard white plate
W-PLT-Y
8735
1 to 9999
White label data (Y) entry with standard white plate
Adjustment of CCD/CIS scan position at streamreading mode with DF
W-PLT-Z
9418
1 to 9999
White label data (Z) entry with standard white plate
SH-TRGT
1136
1 to 2047
Shading target value of the standard white plate

(backup)
50_RG
-256 to 256
Color displacement (G- R) offset value display at

BOOK mode/50% scanning
50_GB
-256 to 256
Color displacement (G- B) offset value display at

100_RG
-256 to 256
Color displacement (G- R) offset value display at

100_GB
-256 to 256
Color displacement (G- B) offset value display at

50DF_RG
-256 to 256
Color displacement (G-R) offset value display at

ADF mode/50% scanning
50DF_GB
-256 to 256
Color displacement (G-B) offset value display at

100DF_RG
-256 to 256
Color displacement (G-R) offset value display at

100DF_GB
-256 to 256
Color displacement (G-B) offset value display at

DFTAR-R
1159
1 to 2047
Shading target value (RED) entry when using DF

(normal document scanning position)
DFTAR-G
1189
1 to 2047
Shading target value (GREEN) entry when using

DF (normal document scanning position)
DFTAR-B
1209
1 to 2047
Shading target value (BLUE) entry when using DF

(normal document scanning position)
CCD-CHNG
0 to 1
CCD replacement flag
DFTAR-K
1189
1 to 2047
Black shading target value when using DF
MTF3-M1
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for R in horizontal scanning direction (front)
MTF3-M2
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for R in horizontal scanning direction (center)
MTF3-M3
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for R in horizontal scanning direction (rear)
MTF3-M4
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for G in horizontal scanning direction (front)
MTF3-M5
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for G in horizontal scanning direction (center)
MTF3-M6
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for G in horizontal scanning direction (rear)
MTF3-M7
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for B in horizontal scanning direction (front)
244
8. Service Mode
Item1
Item2
READER
ADJUST
Item3
CCD
Item4
Initial
setting
Appropriate
guideline
Description
MTF3-M8
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for B in horizontal scanning direction (center)
MTF3-M9
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for B in horizontal scanning direction (rear)
MTF3-M10
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for K in horizontal scanning direction (front)
MTF3-M11
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for K in horizontal scanning direction (center)
MTF3-M12
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for K in horizontal scanning direction (rear)
MTF3-S1
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for R in vertical scanning direction (front)
MTF3-S2
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for R in vertical scanning direction (center)
MTF3-S3
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for R in vertical scanning direction (rear)
MTF3-S4
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for G in vertical scanning direction (front)
MTF3-S5
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for G in vertical scanning direction (center)
MTF3-S6
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for G in vertical scanning direction (rear)
MTF3-S7
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for B in vertical scanning direction (front)
MTF3-S8
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for B in vertical scanning direction (center)
MTF3-S9
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for B in vertical scanning direction (rear)
MTF3-S10
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for K in vertical scanning direction (front)
MTF3-S11
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for K in vertical scanning direction (center)
MTF3-S12
55
20 to 80
MTF setting value for K in vertical scanning direction (rear)
MTF4-M1
55
20 to 80
MTF specified value for R in horizontal scanning

direction (front)
MTF4-M2
55
20 to 80

direction (center)
MTF4-M3
55
20 to 80

direction (rear)
MTF4-M4
55
20 to 80
MTF specified value for G in horizontal scanning

direction (front)
MTF4-M5
55
20 to 80

direction (center)
MTF4-M6
55
20 to 80

direction (rear)
MTF4-M7
55
20 to 80
MTF specified value for B in horizontal scanning

direction (front)
MTF4-M8
55
20 to 80

direction (center)
MTF4-M9
55
20 to 80

direction (rear)
MTF4-M10
55
20 to 80
MTF specified value for K in horizontal scanning

direction (front)
MTF4-M11
55
20 to 80

direction (center)
MTF4-M12
55
20 to 80

direction (rear)
245
8. Service Mode
Item1
Item2
READER
ADJUST
FUNCTION
OPTION
Item3
CCD
ADJUST
Initial
setting
Appropriate
guideline
Description
MTF4-S1
55
20 to 80
MTF specified value for R in vertical scanning direction (front)
MTF4-S2
55
20 to 80
MTF specified value for R in vertical scanning direction (center)
MTF4-S3
55
20 to 80
MTF specified value for R in vertical scanning direction (rear)
MTF4-S4
55
20 to 80
MTF specified value for G in vertical scanning direction (front)
MTF4-S5
55
20 to 80
MTF specified value for G in vertical scanning direction (center)
MTF4-S6
55
20 to 80
MTF specified value for G in vertical scanning direction (rear)
MTF4-S7
55
20 to 80
MTF specified value for B in vertical scanning direction (front)
MTF4-S8
55
20 to 80
MTF specified value for B in vertical scanning direction (center)
MTF4-S9
55
20 to 80
MTF specified value for B in vertical scanning direction (rear)
MTF4-S10
55
20 to 80
MTF specified value for K in vertical scanning direction (front)
MTF4-S11
55
20 to 80
MTF specified value for K in vertical scanning direction (center)
MTF4-S12
55
20 to 80
MTF specified value for K in vertical scanning direction (rear)
PASCAL
OFST-P-K
-128 to 128
Density adjustment at test print scanning
INSTALL
STRD-POS
Auto adjustment of CCD/ CIS reading position in

stream reading
CCD
CCD-ADJ
Gain adjustment of analog processor block.
DF-WLVL1
ADF white level adjustment (platen board cover

scan/ stream reading scan)
DF-WLVL2

scan/ stream reading scan)
MTF-CLC
not used
DF-WLVL3

scan)
CCD
DF-WLVL4
ADF white level adjustment (DF scan)
CLEAR
R-CON
Clearing of the backup area for the reader in the

main controller.
MISC-R
SCANLAMP
Executing activation of the scanning lamp
BODY
SENS-CNF
Setting of the document detection sensor placement
USER
FEEDER
Item4
MODELSZ2
0-1
Setting of global support for document size detection while the copyboard cover use
SZDT-SW
0-1
Switching mode from CCD size detection to photo

size detection during platen document size detection.
DFDST-L1
182
16 to 255
Dirt detection level adjustment (between documents) during ADF use
DFDST-L2
182
16 to 255
Dirt detection level adjustment (upon job completion) during ADF use
KSIZE-SW
0 to 1
Switch supporting Chinese paper (K sizes)
SIZE-DET
0 to 1
Document size detection function ON/OFF setting
DOCST
-50 to 50
Adjusting the original stop position for ADF pickup

(original tray pickup)
LA- SPEED
-30 to 30
Adjusting the original feeding speed in stream reading
246
8. Service Mode
Item1
FEEDER
Item2
Item3
Item4
Initial
setting
Appropriate
guideline
Description
ADJUST
DOC- LNGH
FUNCTION
FEED- CHK
Checking the passage of paper for ADF
CL-CHK
Checking the DF clutch
CL-ON
Starting the clutch operation
FAN-CHK
Checking the ADF cooling fan
FAN-ON
Starting the fan operation
SL-CHK
Checking the ADF solenoid
SL-ON
Starting the solenoid operation
MTR-ON
Starting the motor operation
-100 to 100
Correcting the paper length in extra length/ indeterminate mode with ADF
ROLL- CLN
ADF roller cleaning mode
FEED- ON
Checking the passage of paper with ADF
SCAN SW
SW05
Paper size type setting for DF
Bit
Function
A configuration (same as AB configuration)
Enable
Disable
AB configuration
Enable
Disable
Inch configuration
Enable
Disable
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
SW06
Allows to change the configuration of the original size detection in the book mode.
Bit
Function
not used
not used
Allows to change the configuration (*1)
Enable
Disable
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
*1: The setting change of the following service modes is enabled.

SCAN > READER > OPTION > BODY > SENS-CNF
247
8. Service Mode
NOTE:
When changing the setting of SW05 or SW06, change the following setting of the paper size group together to enable the collect
paper selection.
SYSTEM > SYSTEM Numeric > 057
<Setting value>
1. AB configuration
2. A configuration
3. Inch configuration
4. AB / Inch configuration
SCAN NUMERIC
033: Vertical scan magnification correction
Correct the magnification of vertical scanning of a book. The larger the adjustment value, the more the image stretches in the
vertical scanning direction.
034: Horizontal scan magnification correction

Correct the magnification of horizontal scanning of a book. The larger the adjustment value, the more the image stretches in the
horizontal scanning direction.
047: Vertical scan magnification correction (when scanning on a document fed from
ADF)
Correct the magnification of vertical scanning of a document fed from the ADF. The larger the adjustment value, the more the
image stretches in the vertical scanning direction.
048: Horizontal scan magnification correction (when scanning on a document fed from
ADF)
Correct the magnification of horizontal scanning of a document fed from the ADF. The smaller the adjustment value, the more
the image stretches in the horizontal scanning direction.
135: Leading edge trimming length when performing fax operation using the Copyboard
(0.1 mm)
As the value is incremented by "1", the leading edge non-image width is increased by 0.1mm.
138: Leading edge frame length when performing copy operation using the Copyboard
(0.1 mm)
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the trailing edge side by 0.1mm.
145: Leading edge trimming length when performing fax operation using the ADF (0.1
mm)
As the value is incremented by "1", the leading edge non-image width is increased by 0.1mm.
146: Trailing edge trimming length when performing fax operation using the ADF (0.1
mm)
As the value is incremented by "1", the trailing edge non-image width is increased by 0.1mm.
147: Left-right frame length when performing fax operation using the ADF (0.1 mm)
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the right edge side by 0.1mm.
148: Leading edge frame length when performing copy operation using the ADF (0.1 mm)
248
8. Service Mode
165: Leading edge frame length when performing SEND SCAN using the Copyboard (0.1
mm)
168: Leading edge frame length when performing SEND SCAN using the ADF (0.1 mm)
193: ADF special paper standard size: to prevent false recognition of LGL
This setting is used when using a standard size of special paper that cannot be recognized by ADF. (When the paper is recognized
incorrectly as LEGAL)
0: LEGAL /B4R
1: FOOLSCAP
2: M_OFICIO
3: A_FOOLSCAP
4: Not used
5: G_LEGAL
6: A_OFICIO
7: B_OFICIO
8: OFICIO
9: E_OFICIO
10: F4A
11: Indian-LGL (For customization)
NOTE:
Papers from "No.1: FOOLSCAP" to "No.9: E_OFICIO" are supported only when inch configuration is set for the original size
detection, and LGLR is replaced with any of them.
"No.10: F4A" is supported only when AB configuration or AB/Inch configuration is set for the original size detection, and B4R
and LGLR are replaced with it.
Operation of the original size detection of custom paper differs depending on whether special papers are supported or not.
Mixed stacking of special papers is not supported.
Special papers are not supported when using the Copyboard.
APS is not supported.
When the setting is switched, it is necessary to turn OFF and then ON the power.

#SCAN > #SCAN SW > SW05
Changes "AB configuration/Inch configuration" of the original size detection
#SYSTEM > #SYSTEM SW > SW57
Setting of paper size group
194: ADF special paper standard size: to prevent false recognition of LTR
This setting is used when using a standard size of special paper that is incorrectly recognized as LTR by ADF.
0: LTR /B5
1: G_LTR
2: A_LTR
3: K_LGL
4: EXE
249
8. Service Mode
NOTE:
Papers from "No.1: G_LTR" to "No.2: A_LTR" are supported only when inch configuration is set for the original size detection,
and LTR is replaced with any of them.
"No.3: K_LGL" is supported only when AB configuration or AB/Inch configuration is set for the original size detection, and B5
and LTR are replaced with it.
"No.4: EXE" is supported only when inch configuration is set for the original size detection, and B5 and LTR are replaced with
it.
Special papers are not supported when using the Copyboard.

195: ADF special paper standard size: to prevent false recognition of LTRR
This setting is used when using a standard size of special paper that cannot be recognized by ADF. (When the paper is incorrectly
recognized as LTRR)
0: LTR_R / B5R / A4R
1: FOOLSCAP
2: OFFICIO
3: E_OFFICIO
4: G_LTR_R
5: A_LTR_R
6: K_LGL_R
7: EXE_R
NOTE:
Papers from "No.1: FOOLSCAP" to "No.5: A_LTR_R" are supported only when inch configuration is set for the original size
detection, and LTR_R is replaced with any of them.
When A configuration or AB configuration is set for the original size detection, A4R is replaced with "No.5: A_LTR_R".
"No.6: K_LGL_R" is supported only when AB configuration or AB/Inch configuration is set for the original size detection, and
B5_R and LTR_R are replaced with it.
"No.7: EXE_R" is supported only when inch configuration is set for the original size detection, and B5_R and LTR_R are
replaced with it.
Non-Japanese special papers are not supported when using the Copyboard.

READER
#SCAN> READER> DISPLAY> CCD> TARGET-B
Target value of shading for blue
If the scanned image has some failure, check the target value of shading for blue.
If the machine continues to display 0 (minimum) or FFFF (maximum), there may be some problem on CCD unit.
Appropriate guideline :1 to 2047
250
8. Service Mode
#SCAN> READER> DISPLAY> CCD> TARGET-G

Target value of shading for green
If the scanned image has some failure, check the target value of shading for green.
#SCAN> READER> DISPLAY> CCD> TARGET-R

Target value of shading for red
If the scanned image has some failure, check the target value of shading for red.
#SCAN> READER> DISPLAY> CCD> OFST-B

Adjustment value of offset level on CCD (blue)
To judge if this adjustment value is correct when an image fault attributed to CCD occurs.
Appropriate guideline: 0 to 255
#SCAN> READER> DISPLAY> CCD> OFST-G

Adjustment value of offset level on CCD (green)
#SCAN> READER> DISPLAY> CCD> OFST-R

Adjustment value of offset level on CCD (red)
#SCAN> READER> DISPLAY> CCD> OFST-O

Adjustment value of offset level in odd bit on CCD
#SCAN> READER> DISPLAY> CCD> OFST-E

Adjustment value of offset level in even bit on CCD
#SCAN> READER> DISPLAY> CCD> GAIN-B

Adjustment value of gain level on CCD (blue)
#SCAN> READER> DISPLAY> CCD> GAIN-G

Adjustment value of gain level on CCD (green)
#SCAN> READER> DISPLAY> CCD> GAIN-R

Adjustment value of gain level on CCD (red)
#SCAN> READER> DISPLAY> CCD> GAIN-O

Adjustment value of gain level in odd bit on CCD
#SCAN> READER> DISPLAY> CCD> GAIN-E

Adjustment value of gain level in even bit on CCD
251
8. Service Mode
#SCAN> READER> I/O> R-CON> P001

The P001 port indication of the reader relay PCB
Display the I/O state of the sensor of the reader unit.
Bit
Name
Display contents
Remarks
Bit0
Copyboard cover open/closed sensor 1

(S26)
1: Open
ADF open angle: 15 degrees
Bit1
CCD HP sensor (S22)
1: HP
Bit2
Not used.
1: Open
Bit3
Copyboard cover open/closed sensor 0

(S21)
1: Document present
Bit4
Sub scanning original size sensor 0

(S24/29)
1: Document present
Bit5
Sub scanning original size sensor 1

(S25/28)
1: Document present
Bit6
Sub scanning original size sensor 2 (S23) 1: Document present
Sensor for market-related measures
Bit7
Sub scanning original size sensor 3 (S27) 1: Document present
Sensor for market-related measures
Bit8 - 15
Not used.
ADF open angle: 25 degrees or 5 degrees
#SCAN> READER> I/O> FEEDER> P001

The P001 port indication of the ADF driver PCB
Display the I/O state of the sensor of the ADF unit.
Bit
Name
Display contents
Bit0
Document tray width sensor 2 (PS2)
1: Document present
Bit1
Document tray width sensor 1 (PS1)
1: Document present
Bit2
Not used.
Bit3
ADF fan (FM1) motor lock detection
1: Locked
Bit4
Delivery reversal sensor (SR3)
1: Document present
Bit5
Read sensor (SR2)
1: Document present
Bit6
Timing sensor (SR4)
Bit7
Registration sensor (SR1)
0: Document present
Bit8
Document length sensor 2 (SR8)
1: Document present
Bit9
Document length sensor 1 (SR7)
1: Document present
Bit10
Release motor HP sensor (SR11)
0: relaease
Bit11
Cover open/closed sensor (SR6)
0: Open
Bit12
Last document detection sensor (SR7)
1: Document present
Bit13
Document set sensor (SR5)
0: Document present
Remarks
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-X

Adjustment of scanning system image lead edge position (image's scan-start position in vertical scanning direction)
0.1mm shift of image scan-start position toward the trail edge direction by 1-increment in the setting.
NOTE:
Be sure to enter the value on service label when replacing the CCD unit.
If changing the setting value of this item, be sure to Note the changed value on the service label.
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-Y

Adjustment value of image scan-start position <Y-direction>
0.1mm shift of image scan-start position toward the trail edge direction by 1-increment in the setting.
252
8. Service Mode
NOTE:
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-S

Adjustment of CCD/CIS scan-start cell position (image scan-start position in horizontal scanning direction)
Adjust the position to measure data for shading correction with standard white plate. This item must not be normally used.
NOTE:
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-Y-DF

Adjustment of horizontal scanning position at feeder mode.
0.1mm shift of image scan-start position toward the front direction by 1-increment in the setting value.
NOTE:
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS

Adjustment of CCD/CIS scan position at stream-reading mode with DF
This item must not be normally used.
NOTE:
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-X-MG

Fine adjustment of magnification ration in vertical scanning when scanning with reader copyboard
Execute fine adjustment of vertical scanning magnification ratio when scanning with reader copyboard.
0.1mm shift of image scan-start position toward the front direction by 1-increment in the setting value.
NOTE:
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X

White label data entry with standard white plate
NOTE:
Be sure to enter the numeric value on copyboard glass when replacing the copyboard glass.
If changing the setting value of this item, be sure to write down the changed value on the service label.
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Y

White label data (Y) entry with standard white plate
253
8. Service Mode
NOTE:
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Z

White label data (Z) entry with standard white plate
NOTE:
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> SH-TRGT

Shading target value of the standard white plate (backup)
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> 50_RG

Color displacement (G-R) offset value display at BOOK mode/50% scanning
NOTE:
Be sure to enter the value on service label when executing RAM clear of the reader controller PCB/replacing the reader controller
PCB.
#SCAN > READER > ADJUST > CCD > 50_GB

Color displacement (G-B) offset value display at BOOK mode/50% scanning
NOTE:
PCB.
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> 100_RG

Color displacement (G-R) offset value display at BOOK mode/100% scanning
NOTE:
PCB.
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> 100_GB

Color displacement (G-B) offset value display at BOOK mode/100% scanning
NOTE:
PCB.
254
8. Service Mode
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> 50DF_RG

Color displacement (G-R) offset value display at ADF mode/50% scanning
NOTE:
PCB.
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> 50DF_GB

Color displacement (G-B) offset value display at ADF mode/50% scanning
NOTE:
PCB.
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> 100DF_RG

Color displacement (G-R) offset value display at ADF mode/100% scanning
NOTE:
PCB.
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> 100DF_GB

Color displacement (G-B) offset value display at ADF mode/100% scanning
NOTE:
PCB.
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-R

Shading target value (RED) entry when using DF (normal document scanning position)
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-G

Shading target value (GREEN) entry when using DF (normal document scanning position)
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-B

Shading target value (BLUE) entry when using DF (normal document scanning position)
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-K

Black shading target value when using DF
In case of image fault (due to chart soil, etc) after executing:
SCAN > READER > FUNCTION > CCD > DFWLVL1/ DF-WLVL2; enter the factory measurement value using this mode.
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> CCD-CHNG

CCD replacement flag
255
8. Service Mode
Set this mode when CCD replacement is completed.
#SCAN > READER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-P-K

Execute offset adjustment for test print scanning signal in PASCAL control at auto gradation correction. (full correction)
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF3-M1

MTF setting value for R in horizontal scanning direction (front)
NOTE:
Be sure to enter the value on service label when executing RAM clear of the CCD unit / replacing the CCD unit.

MTF setting value for R in horizontal scanning direction (center)
NOTE:

MTF setting value for R in horizontal scanning direction (rear)
NOTE:

MTF setting value for G in horizontal scanning direction (front)
NOTE:

MTF setting value for G in horizontal scanning direction (center)
NOTE:

MTF setting value for G in horizontal scanning direction (rear)
NOTE:
256
8. Service Mode

MTF setting value for B in horizontal scanning direction (front)
NOTE:

MTF setting value for B in horizontal scanning direction (center)
NOTE:

MTF setting value for B in horizontal scanning direction (rear)
NOTE:

MTF setting value for K in horizontal scanning direction (front)

MTF setting value for K in horizontal scanning direction (center)

MTF setting value for K in horizontal scanning direction (rear)
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF3-S1

MTF setting value for R in vertical scanning direction (front)

MTF setting value for R in vertical scanning direction (center)

MTF setting value for R in vertical scanning direction (rear)

MTF setting value for G in vertical scanning direction (front)

MTF setting value for G in vertical scanning direction (center)
257
8. Service Mode

MTF setting value for G in vertical scanning direction (rear)

MTF setting value for B in vertical scanning direction (front)

MTF setting value for B in vertical scanning direction (center)

MTF setting value for B in vertical scanning direction (rear)

MTF setting value for K in vertical scanning direction (front)

MTF setting value for K in vertical scanning direction (center)

MTF setting value for K in vertical scanning direction (rear)
SCAN> READER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF4-M1

MTF specified value for R in horizontal scanning direction (front)

MTF specified value for R in horizontal scanning direction (center)

MTF specified value for R in horizontal scanning direction (rear)

MTF specified value for G in horizontal scanning direction (front)

MTF specified value for G in horizontal scanning direction (center)

MTF specified value for G in horizontal scanning direction (rear)

MTF specified value for B in horizontal scanning direction (front)

MTF specified value for B in horizontal scanning direction (center)
258
8. Service Mode

MTF specified value for B in horizontal scanning direction (rear)

MTF specified value for K in horizontal scanning direction (front)

MTF specified value for K in horizontal scanning direction (center)

MTF specified value for K in horizontal scanning direction (rear)

MTF specified value for R in vertical scanning direction (front)

MTF specified value for R in vertical scanning direction (center)

MTF specified value for R in vertical scanning direction (rear)

MTF specified value for G in vertical scanning direction (front)

MTF specified value for G in vertical scanning direction (center)

MTF specified value for G in vertical scanning direction (rear)

MTF specified value for B in vertical scanning direction (front)

MTF specified value for B in vertical scanning direction (center)

MTF specified value for B in vertical scanning direction (rear)

MTF specified value for K in vertical scanning direction (front)

MTF specified value for K in vertical scanning direction (center)
259
8. Service Mode

MTF specified value for K in vertical scanning direction (rear)
#SCAN> READER> ADJUST> PASCAL> OFST-P-K

Execute offset adjustment for test print scanning signal in PASCAL control at auto gradation correction. (full correction)
#SCAN> READER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STRD-POS

Auto adjustment of CCD/CIS reading position in stream reading
When installing the DF, or removing the ADF and reinstalling it.
#SCAN> READER> FUNCTION> CCD> CCD-ADJ

Gain adjustment of analog processor block
When installing the DF, or removing the ADF and reinstalling it.
Reflect the LED lamp beam on the standard white plate to correct CCD shading.
Execute this after replacing the CCD unit.
#SCAN> READER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1

ADF white level adjustment (platen board cover scan/stream reading scan)
1. Place a paper that users normally use on the copyboard glass and execute the following item;
SCAN > READER > FUNCTION > CCD > DFWLVL1
: Read the white level in BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK mode.)
2. Set a paper that users normally use and execute the following item;
: Read the white level in DF mode (stream reading).
(Check the transparency of the glass for stream reading.)
(Read the both sides of chart.)
Reading the face: Calculate DFTAR-R
NOTE:
Be sure to execute these two items (DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2) simultaneously.

ADF white level adjustment (platen board cover scan/stream reading scan)
1. Place a paper that users normally use on the copyboard glass and execute the following item;
: Read the white level in BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK mode.)
2. Set a paper that users normally use and execute the following item;
: Read the white level in DF mode (stream reading).
(Check the transparency of the glass for stream reading.)
(Read the both sides of chart.)
Reading the face: Calculate DFTAR-R
NOTE:
Be sure to execute these two items (DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2) simultaneously.
#SCAN> READER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

Calculating the MTF filter count to be set in ASICS based on the MTF value
Set the following item; SCAN>READER>ADJUST>CCD>CCD-CHN (new item) when replacing the CCD.

ADF white level adjustment (platen board cover scan)
NOTE:
Scan a blank sheet on the platen and adjust the white level.
260
8. Service Mode

ADF white level adjustment. (DF scan)
NOTE:
Scan a blank sheet in stream reading mode and adjust the white. level.
#SCAN> READER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> R-CON

Clearing of the backup area for the reader in the main controller.
Clear the backup area for the reader in the main controller.
#SCAN> READER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> SCANLAMP

The test checks to see if the scanning lamp is on or not.
Execute the when replacing the scanning lamp.
#SCAN> READER> OPTION> BODY> SENS-CNF

Setting of the document detection sensor placement.
The setting of original detection size is selected between AB and inch configuration in the book mode.
0: AB configuration
To allow to change the setting of this service mode, set the value to 1 in the following service mode.
SCAN > SCAN SW > SW06 > Bit2
And, to enable the correct paper selection, change the following setting of the paper size group.
SYSTEM > SYSTEM Numeric > 057
<Setting value>
1: AB configuration
2: A configuration
4: AB / Inch configuration
#SCAN> READER> OPTION> BODY> MODELSZ2

Setting of global support for document size detection while the copyboard cover use.
This item is used when supporting individual users (mixed stacking of AB/Inch type documents). Turn ON/OFF the global support
for document size detection while the copyboard cover is being used.
This item must not be normally used. When both AB and Inch type documents are stacked together, a separate document size
sensor (photosensor) is required for the document size to be detected properly.
When the item is set to '1', the document size is not detected while the platen is opened or closed. (The document lighting lamp
does not light.)
0: Normal (detection operation by detected size for each destination)
1: Detection of stacking of both AB and Inch type documents
#SCAN> READER> OPTION> BODY> SZDT-SW

Switching mode from CCD size detection to photo size detection during platen document size detection.
When the scanning lamp is dazzling, switch the size detection mode of the CCD unit to the photo sensor detection mode. A photo
sensor must be installed separately.
#SCAN> READER> OPTION> BODY> DFDST-L1

ADirt detection level adjustment (between documents) during ADF use.
Increase the value when dirt fails to be detected, resulting in black streaks.
However, if the value is increased too much, even small-sized dirt of the kind which does not appear on the image will also be
detected, and the cleaning instruction screen may appear frequently.
Reduce the value if users complain because the cleaning instruction screen which appears when dirt is detected is displayed
frequently.
Conversely, if the value is reduced too much, black streaks may appear on the images.
261
8. Service Mode
#SCAN> READER> OPTION> BODY> DFDST-L2

Dirt detection level adjustment (upon job completion) during ADF use.
Increase the value when dirt fails to be detected, resulting in black streaks.
However, if the value is increased too much, even small-sized dirt of the kind which does not appear on the image will also be
detected, and the cleaning instruction screen may appear frequently.
Reduce the value if users complain because the cleaning instruction screen which appears when dirt is detected is displayed
frequently.
Conversely, if the value is reduced too much, black streaks may appear on the images.
#SCAN> READER> OPTION> BODY> KSIZE-SW

Switch supporting Chinese paper (K sizes)
This item is used when K size paper is used. Detect and display Chinese paper (8K, 16K).
0: K size paper is not supported.
1: K size paper is supported.
#SCAN> READER> OPTION> USER> SIZE-DET

Document size detection function ON/OFF setting
This item is used when the user asks for the item to be provided (as a means to remedy the glare from the document lighting
lamp). Set the document size detection function to ON and OFF.
FEEDER
#SCAN> FEEDER> ADJUST> DOCST
Adjusting the original stop position for ADF pickup (original tray pickup)
Delivering the original enables the setting. Be sure to press the OK key to deliver the original.
When changing the setting, input the setting on the main station service label.
The larger the value, the smaller the leading edge margin.
#SCAN> FEEDER> ADJUST> LA-SPEED

Adjusting the original feeding speed in stream reading
Use this mode to adjust the original feeding speed in stream reading mode.
The larger the setting, the faster the speed (the image reduced).
#SCAN> FEEDER> ADJUST> DOC-LNGH

Correcting the paper length in extra length/indeterminate mode with ADF
Use this mode when installing the ADF. (to correct errors in detecting the paper length in extra length/indeterminate mode with
ADF)
#SCAN> FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-CHK

Operation check for the ADF motor, etc.
Specify a motor to perform an operation check.
Select #SCAN> FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-ON to execute this.
0:Pickup/ Feed motor (M1)
1:Release motor (M2)
#SCAN> FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-CHK

Checking passage of paper by the ADF
Specify a paper feed mode to check the DF for paper passage.
Select #SCAN> FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-ON to execute this.
0:1-sided
1:2-sided
#SCAN> FEEDER> FUNCTION> CL-CHK

Checking the DF clutch
DSpecify a clutch to perform a clutch check.
Select #SCAN>FEEDER > FUNCTION > CL-ON to execute this.
#SCAN> FEEDER> FUNCTION> CL-ON

Starting the clutch operation
262
8. Service Mode
Selecting 1 starts clutch operation.
#SCAN> FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-CHK

Checking the ADF cooling fan
Specify a fan to perform a fan check.
Select #SCAN> FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-ON to execute this.
#SCAN> FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-ON

Starting the fan operation
Selecting 1 starts fan operation.
#SCAN> FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-CHK

Checking the ADF solenoid
Specify a solenoid to perform a solenoid check.
Select #SCAN>FEEDER > FUNCTION > SLON to execute this.
0: Pressure solenoid (SL1)
1: Stamp solenoid (SL2)
#SCAN> FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-ON

Starting the motor operation
Selecting 1 starts motor operation.
#SCAN> FEEDER> FUNCTION> ROLL-ON

ADF roller cleaning mode
Rotate the roller with the motor and attach a lint-free paper moistened with alcohol to the roller to clean it.
#SCAN> FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-ON

Checking the passage of paper with ADF
Selecting 1 starts checking passage of paper by the ADF.
#PRINT
Setting of Printer Functions
Item
#PRINT
SW
No.
Default
Setting range
SW01- 13
SW14:
00000100
Special mode setting
SW15:
00000000
Interruption of staple job when there is no staple
SW16: - 17
SW18:
Not used
00000100
Special mode setting
SW19: - 50
Item
#PRINT
NUMERIC
Function
Not used
Not used
No.
Default
Setting range
01: - 30
Function
Not used
34:
100
0 to 227, one unit = Left-end registration adjustment (manual feed tray)

0.1 mm
35:
100
0 to 227, one unit = Left-end registration adjustment (cassette 1)

0.1 mm
36:
100

0.1 mm
37:
100

0.1 mm
38:
100

0.1 mm
25
0 to 9999, one unit = Adjustment of margin at leading edge of copy

0.1 mm
39: - 52:
53:
Not used
263
8. Service Mode
Item
#PRINT
NUMERIC
No.
Default
Setting range
Function
54:
30
0 to 9999, one unit = Adjustment of margin at trailing edge of copy

0.1 mm
55:
25
0 to 9999, one unit = Adjustment of margin at right edge of copy

0.1 mm
56:
25
0 to 9999, one unit = Adjustment of margin at left edge of copy

0.1 mm
57:
Not used
58:
145
0 to 227, one unit = Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Manual tray)
0.1 mm
59:
163
0 to 227, one unit = Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Cassette)

0.1 mm
61:
145
0 to 227, one unit = Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Duplex unit)
0.1 mm
62:
0 to 14
Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode (For normal

paper)
63:
0 to 14
Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode. (For thick

paper)
64:
0 to 4
Mode for preventing the end temperature rise
65:
0 to 2
Mode for reducing sand image
66:
0 to 3
Temperature/ Humidity sensor fixed mode
1000
488 to 1511
60:
Not used
67:- 135:
136:
Not used
137:- 139:
Adjustment of the point to start writing in main scanning

direction (A)
Not used
140:
100
0 to 227, one unit = Left-end registration adjustment (double- sided small)

0.1 mm
141:
100
0 to 227, one unit = Left-end registration adjustment (double- sided large)

0.1 mm
142:
100
0 to 227, one unit = Adjustment of margin at leading edge at normal speed

0.1 mm
(230mm/sec)
143:
100
0 to 227, one unit = Adjustment of margin at leading edge at half speed

0.1 mm
(137mm/sec)
144:
100
0 to 227, one unit = Laser trail edge OFF adjustment

0.1 mm
145:
1000
488 to 1511
Adjustment of the magnification to write image in main

scanning direction (A-B)
146:
1000
488 to 1511
djustment of the magnification to write image in main

scanning direction (A-C)
147:
1000
488 to 1511
djustment of the magnification to write image in main

scanning direction (A-D)
148:
1000
488 to 1511

direction (A-B)
149:
1000
488 to 1511

direction (A-C)
150:
1000
488 to 1511

direction (A-D)
151:
100
0 to 227
Developing bias offset for DC
152:
100
0 to 227
Primary charge offset for DC
153:
100
0 to 227
Primary charge offset for AC
154:
100
0 to 227, one unit = Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Thick paper)
0.1 mm
155:
100
0 to 227, one unit = Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Special pa0.1 mm
per)
156:
100
0 to 227, one unit = Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Envelop

0.1 mm
cassette pickup)
157:
0 to 14
Pickup timing adjustment
158:-164:
Not used
264
8. Service Mode
Item
#PRINT
NUMERIC
No.
Default
Setting range
165:
0 to 3
Fixing auto cleaning frequency setting
166:
0 to 14
Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode (Plain paper,

manual feed tray)
167: 170:
171:
Not used
EUR:0
OTHER:33
0 to 40
Set Bk pre-toner low alarm notice timing
173:
0 to 14
Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode (2nd page of

double-sided printing)
174:
0 to 1
Reduction in FCOT
172:
Not used
175:-177:
Not used
178:
Not used
179:
0 to 14
Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode (Envelop/

Postcard)
180:
0 to 14
Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode (Special

mode N)
Item1
#PRINT
CST
Function
Item2
CAS1
CAS2
CAS3
CAS4
Item3
Default
Setting range
Function
CAS1-U1
26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 36: A-OFI, Cassette 1paper size
24: FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 30: A-LTRR, 42:
group special, standardFA4, 34: G-LGL, 47: Indian-LGL (For cus- size paper entry
tomization), 0: default
CAS1-U2
32: G-LTR-R, 34: G-LGL, 23: K-LGL-R, 0:

default
CAS1-U3
CAS1-U4
CAS2-U1
26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 36: A-OFI, Cassette 2 paper size
24: FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 30: A-LTRR, 42:
CAS2-U2
32: G-LTR-R, 34: G-LGL, 23: K-LGL-R, 0:

default
CAS2-U3
CAS2-U4
CAS3-U1
26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 36: A-OFI, Cassette 3paper size
24: FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 30: A-LTRR, 42:
CAS3-U2
32: G-LTR-R, 34: G-LGL, 23: K-LGL-R, 0:

default
CAS3-U3
CAS3-U4
CAS4-U1
26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 36: A-OFI, Cassette 4 paper size
24: FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 30: A-LTRR, 42:
CAS4-U2
32: G-LTR-R, 34: G-LGL, 23: K-LGL-R, 0:

default
CAS4-U3
CAS4-U4
PRINT SW
SSSW-SW14
List of Functions
265
8. Service Mode
Bit
Function
Transfer bias pressure reduction mode
Enable
Disable
not used
Black belt addition mode
Enable
Disable
Post-rotation reduction mode
Enable
Disable
Flicker reduction mode
Enable
Disable
not used
not used
not used

Select whether to enable or disable transfer bias pressure reduction mode.
Select "Enable" to avoid image defects (black spots) produced by transfer bias leaks occurring in a low-pressure region, such as
one at a high altitude. This setting regulates the transfer bias to keep it from exceeding a predetermined level during printing.
Select whether to enable or disable black belt addition mode. If the user uses paper that causes fixed toner on paper to be fused
and adhered to drum, selecting "Yes" will clean the drum by forming a black band on the drum surface during the reverse rotation
which is performed after printing on 50 sheets.
CAUTION:
Implementation of this mode could result in a drum life falling short of its life expectancy.

Select whether to enable or disable post-rotation reduction mode. Selecting "Enable" will reduce the noise caused by the polygon
motor by stopping the motor immediately after postrotation.
Discussions of Bit 4
Select whether to enable or disable flicker reduction mode. Select "Enable" and enter a count to modify fusing temperature control
to cancel fluorescent flicking during printing.
CAUTION:
Implementation of this mode would degrade the throughput.
SSSW-SW15
List of Functions
Bit
0
Function
not used
1
-
0
-
Interruption of staple job when there is no staple Interrupted
Printing continued
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used

The operation when there is no staple during staple job processing can be set.
SSSW-SW18
List of Functions
266
8. Service Mode
Bit
Function
not used
not used
Thin postcard mode
Enable
Disable
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used

When the postcard size is selected, "Thin postcard" can be selected in addition to "Postcard",
"Return postcard", and "4 on 1card". Selecting "Enable" allows you to specify "Thin postcard".
PRINT NUMERIC
034: Left-end registration adjustment (manual feed tray)
Adjust the left-end registration margin of paper picked from a manual feed tray.
The larger the adjustment value, the wider the left-end margin of the image becomes.
035: Left-end registration adjustment (cassette 1)

Adjust the left-end registration margin of paper picked from cassette 1.



053: Margin adjustment at the leading edge of the copy

Adjust the margin at the leading edge of the copy.
Increasing the value makes the margin at the leading edge larger.
054: Margin adjustment at the trailing edge of the copy

Adjust the margin at the trailing edge of the copy.
Increasing the value makes the margin at the trailing edge larger.
055: Margin adjustment at the right edge of the copy

Adjust the margin at the right edge of the copy.
Increasing the value makes the margin at the right edge larger.
056: Margin adjustment at the left edge of the copy

Adjust the margin at the left edge of the copy. Increasing the value makes the margin at the left edge larger.
058: Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Manual feed tray)

If there is a registration loop noise and abrasion while feeding the paper from the manual feed tray, registration loop noise and
abrasion could be reduced by adjusting the volume of the registration loop.
By making the value larger, loop volume will become bigger.
267
8. Service Mode
059: Adjustment of the registration loop volume. (Cassette)

If there is a registration loop noise and abrasion while feeding the paper from the cassette, registration loop noise and abrasion
could be reduced by adjusting the volume of the registration loop.
061: Adjustment of the registration loop volume. (Duplex unit)

If there is a registration loop noise and abrasion while feeding the paper from the duplex unit, registration loop noise and abrasion
could be reduced by adjusting the volume of the registration loop.
062:Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode. (For plain paper)

The temperature adjustment offset relative to the target fixing temperature of plain paper can be changed in steps of 3C. Use
this parameter when the fixing performance is low or when it is necessary to prevent the paper from slipping or being curled.
Plain paper: Plain paper mode, thin paper mode, S thin paper mode, OHP mode
0 - 2: +15C
3 - 11: +12 to -15C (in steps of 3C)
12- 14: -15C
063: Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode. (For rough paper)

The temperature adjustment offset relative to the target fixing temperature of thick paper can be changed in steps of 3C. Use
this parameter when the fixing performance is low or when it is necessary to prevent the paper from slipping or being curled.
Thick paper: Thick paper mode, thick paper H mode, bond mode
0 - 2: +15C
3 - 11: +12 to -15C (in steps of 3C)
12 - 14: -15C
064: Mode for preventing the temperature rise of the end

User this parameter to reduce the frequency of entering the throughput down mode, suppress edge temperature rise, or prevent
soiling due to the high temperature offset.
Add/subtract the threshold of the difference in detection temperature between the sub thermistor 1 (2) that starts the full speed
operation of the end cooling fan and the sub thermistor 1 (2) that starts the down sequence to/from default threshold temperature.
0 - 4: +20 to -20C (in steps of 10C)
065: Mode for reducing sand image

Set when sand image *1 has occurred on the print image.
Restraining the scatter of the toner by increasing the electric current of the AC electrification; the sand image could be reduced.
Sand image *1: Multiple black dots and white dots appear on half tone. Or multiple black dots appear on white background.
0: Normal.
1 to 3: Reducing mode. (Same operation to set 1 to 3)
2: Make the print density lower. Set the initial rotation time for fixing to 3 seconds. Does not do it if the initial rotation elongation
time has been set to 3 seconds or longer in another service mode.
066: Temperature/ Humidity sensor fixed mode

Changing to high-pressure environment by using the temperature/ humidity sensor. But when there is an image trouble at the
point of changing the environment, fix the temperature and the humidity and do not allow the change of the high-pressure output.
0: Normal
1: Fixed environment of LL. (Temperature of 18 deg C and humidity of 20%)
2. Fixed environment of NN. (Temperature of 18-28 deg C and humidity of 20-75%)
3. Fixed environment of HH. (Temperature of 28 deg C and humidity of 80%)
4: Make the print density lower. Set the forward rotation time for fixing to 3 seconds. Does not do it if the forward rotation elongation
time has been set to 3 seconds or longer in another service mode.
136: Adjustment of the point to start writing in laser's main scanning direction (A)
When replacing the laser unit, enter the unit-specific delay value shown on the label affixed to the unit.
140: Left-end registration adjustment (double-sided small)

Adjust the left-end registration margin needed when the duplex feeding unit picks up paper (small paper). Incrementing the value
by 1 increases the left-end margin of the image by 0.1 mm.
268
8. Service Mode
141: Left-end registration adjustment (double-sided large)

Adjust the left-end registration margin needed when the duplex feeding unit picks up paper (large paper). Incrementing the value
by 1 increases the left-end margin of the image by 0.1 mm.
142: Adjustment of margin at leading edge at normal speed (230mm/ sec)

Adjust the margin at the leading edge (registration roller clutch ON timing) at normal speed.
Adjust the leading-edge registration margin needed at pickup. Increasing the value makes the margin at the leading edge of the
copy larger.
143: Adjustment of margin at leading edge at half speed (137mm/sec)

Adjust the margin at the leading edge (registration roller clutch ON timing) at half speed.
Adjust the leading-edge registration margin needed at pickup (large paper).
Increasing the value makes the margin at the leading edge of the copy larger.
*This mode is effective only when paper is fed from the manual feed tray of iR2545/2535.
144: Laser trail edge OFF adjustment

Laser trail edge OFF adjustment (input only).
145: Adjustment of the magnification to write image in laser's main scanning direction
(A-B)
Magnification between lasers A and B
Amount of adjustment of the magnification of laser B of the laser scanner unit.
Adjust the magnification of laser B with reference to that of laser A.
If the input value is inappropriate, the image quality is degraded.
(A-C)
Magnification between lasers A and C
Amount of adjustment of the magnification of laser D of the laser scanner unit.
Adjust the magnification of laser C with reference to that of laser A.
(A-D)
Magnification between lasers A and D
Amount of adjustment of the magnification of laser C of the laser scanner unit.
Adjust the magnification of laser D with reference to that of laser A.
148: Adjustment of the point to start writing in main scanning direction (A-B)
When replacing the laser, enter the delay value (laser main scanning adjustment).
149: Adjustment of the point to start writing in main scanning direction (A-C)
150: Adjustment of the point to start writing in main scanning direction (A-D)
151: Developing bias offset for DC

Enter the developing bias offset for DC.
When a fault in image occurs (foggy image or light density), enter the developing bias offset for DC.
Increasing the value makes the image darker.
152: Primary charge offset for DC

Enter the value to adjust the primary offset 1 for DC.
153: Primary charge offset for AC

Enter the value to adjust the primary offset 1 for AC.
269
8. Service Mode
154: Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Thick paper)

Incrementing the value by 1 feeds the paper 0.1 mm further and increases the registration loop volume.
155: Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Special paper)

156: Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Envelop cassette pickup)

157: Pickup timing adjustment

This setting is applied to the pickup permission temperature at job start irrespective of the fixing mode.
The pickup permission temperature is raised or lowered from the default temperature according to the setting value.
Use this parameter to reduce the FCOT or warm-up time.
0 - 2C+15C
3 - 11: 12 to -15C (in steps of 3C)
12 - 14: -15C
165: Fixing auto cleaning frequency setting

Use this parameter to increase the fixing auto cleaning frequency.
Incrementing the value increases the fixing auto cleaning frequency.
Add the threshold of the difference in detection temperature between the main thermistor (that triggers fixing auto cleaning) and
the sub thermistor 1 (2) to the default threshold.
0 - 3: 0 - +15C (in steps of 5C)
*Set "Fixing auto cleaning setting" (#PRINT> BitSwitch 178) to 1 (= ON).
166: Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode (Plain paper, manual feed tray)
The temperature adjustment offset relative to the target fixing temperature of plain paper fed from the manual feed paper can be
changed in steps of 3C. Use this parameter when the fixing performance is low or when it is necessary to prevent the paper from
slipping or being curled.
0 - 2: +15C
3 - 11: 12 to -15C (in steps of 3C)
12 - 14: -15C
171: Set Bk pre-toner low alarm notice timing

Set the timing (toner level) to notify the pre-toner low alarm for Bk-color.
When the toner level in the Toner Container reaches the setting value (%), the alarm (10-0020 (Bk)) is notified. Since toner level
is calculated based on the developing supply count, some errors may occur.
0 - 40 (Default value EUR:0, OTHER:33)
173: Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode (Second of 2-sided)

The temperature adjustment offset relative to the target fixing temperature in second of 2-sided can be changed in steps of 3C.
Use this parameter when the fixing performance is low or when it is necessary to prevent the paper from slipping or being curled.
0 - 2: +15C
3 - 11: 12 to -15C (in steps of 3C)
12 - 14: -15C
174: Reduction in FCOT

Set the pickup permission temperature (temperature adjustment for the fist page of printing) to -40C before fixing.
Use this parameter to reduce the FCOT.
0:OFF
1:ON
178: Fixing auto cleaning setting

Set this parameter to determine whether to perform fixing auto cleaning.
270
8. Service Mode
179: Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode (Envelop/Postcard)

The temperature adjustment offset relative to the target fixing temperature of the envelope/ postcard can be changed in steps of
3C. Use this parameter when the fixing performance is low or when it is necessary to prevent the paper from slipping or being
curled.
Envelop/postcard: Postcard mode, S postcard mode, Envelop mode
0 - 2: +15C
3 - 11: 12 to -15C (in steps of 3C)
12 - 14: -15C
180: Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode (Special mode N)

The temperature adjustment offset relative to the target temperature of fixing in special mode N can be changed in steps of 3C.
Use this parameter when the fixing performance is low or when it is necessary to prevent the paper from slipping or being curled.
0 - 2: +15C
3 - 11: 12 to -15C (in steps of 3C)
12 - 14: -15C
List of Functions(PRINT CST)

<#CST> CAS1> CAS1-U1>,<#CST> CAS2> CAS1-U1>,<#CST> CAS3> CAS1-U1>,<#CST>
CAS4> CAS1-U1>
Setting of paper name used for paper size group 'U1'
When setting the following special size paper for U1, U2, U3, and U4 which are specified for the paper name to be used in paper
size group, it becomes possible to treat the paper size in U1, U2, U3, and U4 as special size paper in universal size cassettes.
Settings 26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 36: A-OFI, 24: FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 30: A-LTRR, 42: FA4, 34: G-LGL, 47: Indian-LGL (For
customization), 0: default

CAS4> CAS1-U2>
Settings 32: G-LTR-R, 34: G-LGL, 23: K-LGL-R, 0: default

CAS4> CAS1-U3>
Settings 22: K-LGL, 31: G-LTR, 29: A-LTR, 0: default

CAS4> CAS1-U4>
Settings 228: B-OFI, 0: defaul
#NETWORK
Configuration
Item
#NETWORK
SW
SW No.
Bit
Setting ranges
SEND 1
0-2
Default value
Description
Not used
Not used
271
8. Service Mode
Item
#NETWORK
SW
SW No.
2
Bit
Setting ranges
Default value
0 or 1
0 (Disabled)
4-7
Description
Flag to enable mail header printing When "1" is set, mail header
is added to the print data at the time of e-mail reception.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Not used
SEND 2
0-2
0 or 1
4-6
0 or 1
Not used
1 (Not rotated)
Rotation transmission "No" flag

0: Rotated
1: Not rotated
Not used
0 (Not deleted)
Deletion of an error e-mail from the server at the time of POP reception
0: Not deleted
1: Deleted
SEND 3
0
0 or 1
1 (Enabled)
Flag to enable SMTP authentication algorithm (CRAM-MD5)

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1
1 (Enabled)
Flag to enable SMTP authentication algorithm (PLAIN)

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1
1 (Enabled)
Flag to enable SMTP authentication algorithm (LOGIN)

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3-7
Not used
MIB/SNMP
0 or 1
00 (Enabled to
obtain all the
billing counter
values)
Billing counter MIB function flag

bit0=0, bit1=0: Enabled to obtain all the billing counter values
bit0=0, bit1=1: Enabled to obtain only the billing counter values
displayed on UI
bit0=1, bit1=0: Disabled to obtain all the billing counter values
0 or 1
0 or 1
00 (RW)
SNMP (canon_admin) access rights

bit2=0, bit3=0: RW
bit2=0, bit3=1: RO
bit2=1, bit3=0: Disabled
bit2=1, bit3=1: OFF
0 or 1
0 or 1
00 (RW)
SNMP (canon_user) access rights

bit4=0, bit5=0: RW
bit4=0, bit5=1: RO
bit4=1, bit5=0: Disabled
bit4=1, bit5=1: OFF
0 or 1
6-7
Not used
Not used
SEND 4
0
0 or 1
1 (Rotation
Rotation specifications of I-Fax transmission
specifications of 0: Comply with rotation specifications of e-mail
fax)
1: Comply with rotation specifications of fax
1-7
Not used
Not used
10
Network Configuration
0-2
Not used
0 or 1
0 (Enabled)
Acquisition of host name by DHCP (Option 12)

0: Enabled
1: Disabled
272
8. Service Mode
Item
#NETWORK
SW
SW No.
Setting ranges
Default value
Description
10
0 or 1
0 (Enabled)
Registration of host name by DHCP (Option 81)

0: Enabled
1: Disabled
5-7
Not used
11
Network Configuration (IPv6)
12
0 or 1
0 (IPv6)
DNS inquiry priority transport

0: IPv6
1: IPv4
1-7
Not used
SEND 6 (Destination specified transmission)
13
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
6-7
000 (TIFF)
B/W image format at the time of destination specified transmission

000 (all values are "0"): TIFF
001 (only the value of bit2 is "1"): PDF
000 (JPEG)
Color image format at the time of destination specified transmission

000 (all values are "0"): JPEG
Not used
SEND 7 (Re-transfer after transfer error)

0
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
000 (TIFF)
B/W image format when performing transfer again after transfer

error
000 (all values are "0"): TIFF
000 (JPEG)
Color image format when performing transfer again after transfer

error
000 (all values are "0"): JPEG
6-7
Not used
14-40
Not used
41
Network debug switch
42-50
Item
#NETWORK
NUMERIC
Bit
No.
Not used
0 or 1
0 (Hour)
NTP polling interval When "1" is set, the unit of NTP polling time
set on UI is handled as minute.
0: Hour
1: Minute
2-7
Not used
Not used
Setting range
Default value
Description
1-7
Not used
0-255
Number of auto line feeds for text To set the number of bytes for
auto line feed when sending data with no line feed via e-mail. 0:
60 bytes 1 to 19: 20 bytes 20 and above: "setting value - 2" bytes
9-10
Not used
11
0-65535
To set the time from after POP before SMTP authentication to data
transmission. (Unit: 100msec) When the setting value is "0",
300msec is set.
12
0-65535
600
To set the termination timer when there is no reception data at the

time of POP reception/SMTP reception. (Unit: sec)
273
8. Service Mode
Item
No.
#NETWORK
NUMERIC
Setting range
Default value
Description
13-29
Not used
30
0-65535
80
To set wait time when buffer failed to be obtained with network

print. (Unit: msec)
31
0-65535
1000
To set the e-mail reception interval with POP when there are 2 or
more e-mails in the mail server.(Unit: msec)
32-33
Not used
34
0, 10-120
To set the timeout value at IEEE802.1X authentication. (Unit: sec)

When the setting value is "0", 30msec is set.
35-50
Not used
Confirmation of contents of CA certificate

Selecting the service mode "#NETWORK>#CERTIFICATE>#CA-CERTIFICATE" enables confirmation of the contents of the
installed CA certificate.
#CODEC
Configuration
Item
No.
Default
Setting range
Description
# BitSwitch
SW01- SW09
Not used
# Numeric
01: - 05:
Not used
06:
0-3
Control of attribute flag addition function at reception and printing of color JPEG or E-mail image
07:
1-7
Adjustment of black color recognition level at black text processing
08: - 50:
Not used
Details
06: Control of attribute flag addition function at reception and printing of color JPEG or
E-mail image
Set the type of the attribute flag to be added at reception of a color JPEG or E-mail image.
0: For PDL_text mode
1: For PDL_photo mode
2: For scan_text mode
3: For scan_photo mode
07: Adjustment of black color recognition level at black text processing

Adjust the black color recognition level at black text processing.
To improve chanses that the text color is judged as black, increase the setting value.
#SYSTEM
Configuration
Item
#SYSTEM SW
No.
Initial setting
SW01
SW02
00000000
Import/export via USB
SW03 - SW04
SW05
Not used
11001000
Prohibition of export of PWD in address

book
SW06- SW08
SW09
Description
Not used
Not used
00000000
Forcibly disabling of uniFLOW
SW10
Not used
274
8. Service Mode
Item
No.
#SYSTEM SW
Initial setting
SW11
Description
00000000
Item relating to secured print
SW12 - SW50
Item
Not used
No.
#SYSTEM NUMERIC
Initial setting
Setting range
01: - 38:
Description
Not used
39:
0-5
Switching of the default of LDAP detailed

search condition
40:
0 or 1
eLA card touch sound
41:
0-60
PS mode 1 (8bit)
42:
0-60
PS mode 2 (8bit)
43: - 56:
Not used
57:
0-4
58: - 100:
Not used
Item
Initial setting
#RMT-SW
Item
0-1
Initial setting
#PSWD-SW
Item
0
Description
Switch for enabling the remote UI service
mode function
Setting range
0-2
Initial setting
#SM-PSWD
Setting range
Description
Switch for initializing the system administrator password
Setting range
0-99999999
Description
Switch for initializing the service mode
password
Details of Bit Switch

SW02
List of Functions
Bit
Function
Startup in USB import/export mode
Normal startup
5
6
To import/export via USB

When "1" is set, startup is executed in USB import/export mode.
SW05
List of Functions
Bit
Function
275
8. Service Mode
Bit
7
Function
Inhibition of export of password in
address book
1
Inhibited
0
Not inhibited

Select whether to inhibit export of the password in the address book.
SW09
List of Functions
Bit
Function
PS > Display/hide data protocol

menu
Displayed
Hide
Long length setting
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
2
3
Forced invalidity of uniFLOW

You can select whether to disable export of PWD in the address book.
Default: 0
You can select whether to enable long length setting (to extend the range of user-defined size).
Default: 0
Select whether to set the forced invalidity of uniFLOW.
SW10
List of functions
Bit
Function
Set whether to display "Setting screen for date and time" of the Setup Guide
Displayed
Hide
Set whether to display "Registration of user telephone number" of the Setup Guide
Displayed
Hide
Set whether to display "Setting screen for user abbreviation" of the Setup Guide
Displayed
Hide
Set whether to display "Selection screen on a line type basis" of the Setup Guide
Displayed
Hide
Set whether to display "Selection screen for reception mode" of the Setup Guide
Displayed
Hide
Set whether to display "Setting screen for IP address" of the Setup Guide
Displayed
Hide
Details of [Bit 1]
To set whether to display "Setting screen for date and time" of the Setup Guide.
Initial value: 0
Details of [Bit 2]
To set whether to display "Registration of user telephone number" of the Setup Guide.
Initial value: 0
Details of [Bit 3]
To set whether to display "Setting screen for user abbreviation" of the Setup Guide.
Initial value: 0
276
8. Service Mode
Details of [Bit 4]
To set whether to display "Selection screen on a line type basis" of the Setup Guide.
Initial value: 0
Details of [Bit 5]
To set whether to display "Selection screen for reception mode" of the Setup Guide.
Initial value: 0
Details of [Bit 6]
To set whether to display "Setting screen for IP address" of the Setup Guide.
Initial value: 0
SW11
List of functions
Bit
Function
Secured print setting
Disabled
Enabled
To set operation when secured print is disabled.
Handled as a normal job
Resulting in #0853 error
Operation setting of secured print

when the uniFLOW is enabled
Disable the secured print
Follow the secured print setting

(SYSTEM>SW11 Bit0)
Operation setting
when a secured print job is canceled
Display the password entry

screen
Not display the password entry

screen
Display setting of Arabic
Displayed
Not displayed
Switching of sublog output of memory alloc/free log
Enabled
Disabled
The flag generated when the setting values of [Settings/ Initialized

Registration] menu and service mode are initialized
Not initialized
Not used
Details of [Bit 0]
You can select whether to enable the secured print.
Selecting "1" disables the setting.
Selecting "0" enables the setting. (Default)
Details of [Bit 1]
Select an operation when a secured print job is sent while secured print is disabled.
Selecting "1" handles it as a normal job.
Selecting "0" results in #0853 error. (Default)
Details of [Bit 2]
Select an operation of a secured print when uniFLOW is enabled.
Selecting "1" disables the secured print. (Default)
Selecting "0" follows the secured print setting (SYSTEM>SW11 Bit0).
Details of [Bit 3]
Select whether to allow canceling of a secured job without password entry
when canceling a secured job waiting for password entry.
Selecting "1" displays the password entry screen. (Default)
Selecting "1" does not display the password entry screen.
Details of [Bit 4]
Set whether to display in Arabic.
Selecting "1" displays in Arabic.
Selecting "0" does not display in Arabic.
Details of [Bit 5]
Switch sublog output of memory alloc/free log.
Selecting "1" performs the output.
Selecting "0" does not perform the output. (Default)
277
8. Service Mode
Details of [Bit 6]
The flag generated when the setting values of [Settings/Registration] menu and service mode are initialized.
"1" means that the setting values are initialized.
"0" means that the settings values are not initialized.
SW12
List of functions
Bit
Function
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not displayed
Displayed
Display of ON/OFF settings of auto sleep time to support Blue
The flag generated when the setting values of [Settings/Registration] menu and service Initialized
mode that have been added to support Blue Angel are initialized*1
Not initialized
The flag generated when the setting values of service mode that have been added to
support Lot26 are initialized*2
Initialized
Not initialized
Not used
Angel*1
Details of [Bit 4]
It is a function supporting Blue Angel.*1 When this function is enabled, ON/OFF setting of auto sleep time is hidden so auto sleep
cannot be disabled (OFF).
When "1" is selected, it is not displayed (Auto sleep is forcibly enabled (ON)).
When "0" is selected, it is displayed. (ON/OFF of auto sleep can be selected.) (Initial value)
Details of [Bit 5]
The flag generated when the setting values of [Settings/Registration] menu and service mode that have been added to support
Blue Angel are initialized*1
Details of [Bit 6]
The flag generated when the setting values of service mode that have been added to support Lot26 are initialized*2
SW17
List of functions
Bit
Function
Set whether to display/hide the menu to check connection of LADP server.
Displayed
Not displayed
To set ON/OFF of Pull Host From DNS function.
ON
OFF
Display setting of SSL setting for Kerberos authentication of "LDAP Authenti- Gray out SSL
cation Server Setting" in remote UI
Display SSL
Wording for selecting "login information" on "Register LDAP Server (For Authentication)" page in remote UI
Simple/Anonymous Bind- Use / Use (Security

ing / Kerberos Binding
Authentication)
Set whether to display/hide "Auto Reset Time" menu on the Control Panel.
Not displayed
Set the location to display "Auto Reset Time" menu in remote UI
Display under "Timer Set- Display under "Systings"

tem Settings"
Displayed
*1. An ecolable system initiated by German

*2. An EU directive obligating to design environmentally-friendly products (eco design) to facilitate energy saving
278
8. Service Mode
Bit
Function
Set whether to display/hide "Restart Device" menu in remote UI
Set whether to preset the e-mail address of login user to the destination when Preset
logging in by auSend
Displayed
Not displayed
Not preset
Not used
Not used
Details of [Bit 0]
To set whether to display the menu to check connection of LADP server.
Selecting "0" does not display the menu. (Initial value)
Details of [Bit 1]
To set whether to enable the Pull Host From DNS function.
When "0" is selected, the function is disabled. (Initial value)
Details of [Bit 2]
To set whether to display SSL setting for Kerberos authentication of "LDAP Authentication Server Setting" in remote UI and set
the wording for selecting "login information".
When "0" is selected, SSL setting is displayed for Kerberos authentication and "Use / Use (Security Authentication)" is set for the
wording for selecting "login information".
When "1" is selected, SSL is grayed out for Kerberos authentication and "Simple/Anonymous Binding / Kerberos Binding" is set
for the wording for selecting "login information". (Initial value)
Details of [Bit 3]
To set whether to display "Auto Reset Time" menu on the Control Panel and set the location to display "Auto Reset Time" menu
in remote UI.
When "0" is selected, "Auto Reset Time" menu is displayed on the Control Panel, and "Auto Reset Time" menu in remote UI is
displayed under "Timer Settings". (The same as the conventional specification) (Initial value)
When "1" is selected, "Auto Reset Time" menu is not displayed on the Control Panel, and "Auto Reset Time" menu in remote UI
is displayed under "System Settings".
Details of [Bit 4]
To set whether to display "Restart Device" menu in remote UI.
Selecting "0" does not display the menu. (The same as the conventional specification) (Initial value)
Details of [Bit 5]
To set whether to preset the e-mail address of login user to the destination when logging in by auSend.
When "0" is selected, it is not preset. (The same as the conventional specification) (Initial value)
When "1" is selected, it is preset.
SW18
List of functions
Bit
Function
Not used
Not used
IC card authentication mode initialization judgment switch
Initialized
Not initialized
279
8. Service Mode
Bit
Function
Waste Toner Container parts counter initialization judgment switch
Initialized
Not initialized
Initialization judgment switch for "Setup Guide", "FTP print", "DCM support", "remote access protection Initialized
support", and "DFU support"
Not initialized
Not used
Not used
Not used
Details of [Bit 2]
This switch is used to judge whether or not initialization of IC card authentication mode has been performed.
"0" means that the setting values are not initialized.
Details of [Bit 3]
This switch is used to judge whether or not initialization of the Waste Toner Container parts counter has been performed.
Details of [Bit 4]
This switch is used to judge whether or not initialization has been performed for the "Setup Guide", "FTP print", "DCM support",
"remote access protection support", and "DFU support" screens.
SW19
List of functions
Bit
0
Function
Setting for enabling/disabling DFU
function
OFF (Initial value)
ON
6
7
Details of [Bit 0]
Whether to enable the DFU function that realizes upgrading of system software in conjunction with iW EMC/MC DFU Plug-in can
be selected.
When "0" is selected, the function is disabled. (Default)
SW20
List of functions
Bit
Function
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Setting of display/hide of FTP print
Displayed
Not displayed
Bit 6
FTP print initialization judgment flag
Not initialized
Initialized
280
8. Service Mode
Bit
Bit 7
Function
0
-
Details of [Bit 5]
Whether or not to display FTP print can be set.
Hidden when "0" is set (default)
Displayed when "1" is set
Details of [Bit 6]
FTP print initialization judgment flag
Details of numeric parameter

No.
Function
Setting range
10
Set the reboot time monitoring time for 2 a.m. reset (at power-on). (Unit: time) 0 to 9999 (Default: 6)
15
Set the shift timer from energy saver mode to sleep. (Unit: second)
0 to 9999 (Default: 5)
16
Set the cool down timer. (Unit: second)
19
Set the sleep 2 shift timer. (Unit: second)
20
Set display/hide of Setup Guide (other settings).
0: Display, 1: Hide (Default: 0)
24
Set the print-related warning (no paper) alert wait timer. (Unit: second)
0 to 9999 (Default: 20)
25
Set the IMG1L initialization wait timer. (Unit: millisecond)
0 to 9999 (Default: 100)
26
Set the IMG1L mask setting wait timer. (Unit: millisecond)
0 to 9999 (Default: 10)
39
Set switching of the default of LDAP detailed search condition.
0: Contain
1: Not contain
2: Equal
3: Not equal
4: Begin with (Default)
5: End with
40
Set the eLA card touch sound.
0: OFF, 1: ON (Default)
41
Set the PS mode 1 (8bit).
42
Set the PS mode 2 (8bit).
57
Set the paper size group.
Setting values and groups are as follow:

1: AB configuration (PAPER_SIZE_GROUP_
AB)
2: A configuration (PAPER_SIZE_GROUP_A)
3: INCH configuration (PAPER_SIZE_
GROUP_INCH)
4: AB/INCH configuration (PAPER_SIZE_
GROUP_AB_INCH)
The timing of initialization is as follows.
CLEAR > ALL
CLEAR >TYPE
CLEAR > SERVICE DATA
CLEAR > TEL&USER DATA (because of
synchronizing the values of ATT_ID and
SYSTEM NUMERIC)
Select country at startup
58
Set the engine sleep (PPOWER HI) wait timer. (Unit: millisecond)
300 msec when the value is 0
59
Set the timer to delay the press/waiting state of the software switch key until 0 to 9999 (Default: 0)
the PPowerOn-enabled judgment flag is turned ON. (Unit: millisecond)
500 msec when the value is 0
60
Set the Secondary Battery charging completion wait timer. (Unit: minute)
120 minutes when the value is 0.
61
Set the pulse trickle charge set timer. (Unit: minute)

300 minutes when the value is 0
65
Set the inquiry wait time at the time of A/D checking (tick).
66
Set the RUI access delay timer. (Unit: second)

60 seconds when the value is 0
281
8. Service Mode
No.
Function
Setting range
67
Set the sleep 2 shift timer. (Unit: second)

12 seconds when the value is 0
76
Set the wait time after a cancellation (E853) processing by the secured print 0 to 9999 (Default: 0)
condition.
Wait for 500 msec when the setting value is 0 (default), and wait for [setting
value] msec when the setting value is other than 0.
77
Set the initial value of the redial interval. (Unit: minute)

Setting value when the clear key is pressed
0 to 9999
78
Set the initial value of the pause time. (Unit: minute)

0 to 9999
79
Set the ring start time of FAX/TEL switch (detailed setting). (Unit: second)
0 to 9999
80
Set the ring start time of FAX/TEL switch (detailed setting). (Unit: second)
0 to 9999
81
Set the shift time until automatic shutdown. (Unit: second)
0 to 9999
82
120 minutes when the value of the Secondary Battery charging completion
wait timer (Unit: minute) for compliance with Lot26 is 0*1
83
180 minutes when the value of the pulse trickle charge set timer (unit: minute) 0 to 9999 (Default: 0)
for compliance with Lot26 is 0*1
84
500 when the value of the recovery notification wait time at the time of re0 to 9999 (Default: 0)
covery from sleep [notification of recovery from SuperVisor to UI] (unit: msec)
is 0
85
Allow/prohibit access to remote UI service mode
1: Allow, 0: Prohibit (Default: 0)
86
Password level of remote UI service mode
Login level: 0 to 2 (Default: 0)
Remote UI Service Mode

RMT-SW
Set whether to allow connecting to service mode from remote UI.
Initial setting: 0
Setting range:
0: Not allow the connection from remote UI
1: Allow the connection from remote UI
PSWD-SW
To set the password level required at remote UI service mode authentication.
Initial value: 0
Setting range:
0: RUI service mode PW only
1: RUI service mode PW + Service mode password (setting value of SM-PSWD)
2 : RUI service mode PW + Service mode password (setting value of SM-PSWD) + User's system administrator ID and password
SM-PSWD
To set the service mode password.
Initial value: 0
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
#ACC
Configuration
The table below gives summary description of the accessories available.
*1. An EU directive obligating to design environment-friendly products (eco-design) to facilitate energy saving
282
8. Service Mode
Item1
#ACC
Item2
Explanation
CARD
Card reader installation setting Enter a card number to use.

(0 to 9999. One hundred cards are registered with the department ID beginning from the input card number in
sequence.) *1:1,000 cards if option ROM is mounted.
When a card number is entered, the following kinds of management information are initialized:
- Card name (department ID), beginning from the input card number.
- Password associated with the card
CC-SPSW
Control card I/F support setting Set whether to support the control card I/F (CC-V) or not.
0: Do not support.
1: Support.
COIN
Coin vendor change Set the control card set display appearing on the operator station for vendor use.
0: Control card use
1: Coin vendor use
CONTROL
Set the PDL printer output control where the control card I/F (CC-V) is supported.
0: Enable printing without a card mounted.
1: Enable printing with a card mounted in position.
#COUNTER
Counters
This copier is furnished with a maintenance/supplies counter set (DRBL-1), which can be used to gain rough measures of when
to replace supplies. The counter set increments by one on counting each sheet of small-sized paper (up to A4/LTR) and by two
on counting each sheet of large-sized paper (larger than A4/LTR).
Maintenance counter list
Item
TOTAL (Total counter)
PICK-UP (Paper pickup counter)
FEEDER (Feeder related counters)

SORTER (Finisher related counters)
JAM (Jam counters)
Counter
Explanation
SERVICE1
Service total counter 1
SERVICE2
Service total counter 2
TTL
Total counter
COPY
Total copy counter
PDL-PRT
PDL print counter
FAX-PRT
Fax print counter
MEDIA-PRT
Media print counter
RPT-PRT
Report print counter
2-SIDE
Double-sided copy/print counter
SCAN
Scan counter
C1
Cassette 1 jam counter
C2
C3
C4
MF
Manual feed tray pickup total counter
2-SIDE
Double-sided paper pickup total counter
FEED
Feeder pickup total counter
DFOP-CNT
ADF open/close hinge counter
SORT
Finisher sort path counter
SADDLE
Finisher saddle operation counter
SDL-STPL
Finisher saddle staple operation counter
TTL
Unit total jam count
FEEDER
Feeder total jam count
SORTER
Finisher total jam count
2-SIDE
Duplex unit jam counter
MF
Manual feed tray jam counter
C1
C2
C3
283
8. Service Mode
Item
Counter
Explanation
JAM (Jam counters)
C4
MISC (Other required counter)
WST-TNR
Waste toner counter
Parts counter list

Item
Counter
DRBL-1 (Unit supplies)
DRBL-2 (Unit supplies)
Explanation
Service life
TR-ROLL
Transfer roller high-voltage ON count
150,000
SP_SC_EL
Separation static charge eliminator high- 150,000

voltage ON count
DV-UNT-C
Developing assembly rotation count
M-PU-RL
Manual feed tray pickup roller paper pass 150,000

count
M-SP-PD
Manual tray separation pad paper pass

count
150,000
FX-UNIT
Fixing assembly paper pass count
iR2545/2535: 240,000
iR2530/2525/2520: 150,000"
PT-DRM
Photosensitive drum rotation count
WST-TNR
Waste toner count
C1-PU-RL
Cassette1 pickup roller paper pass count 250-sheet 1st cassette type: 150,000
250-sheet 1st cassette type: 120,000
C2-PU-RL
Cassette2 pickup roller paper pass count 150,000
C1-SP-RL
Cassette1 separation roller paper pass

count
120,000
C1-SP-PD
Cassette1 separation pad paper pass

count
120,000 (250-sheet 1st cassette type only)
C2-SP-RL

count
120,000
500,000
80,000
OZ-FIL1
not used
DF-PU-RL
ADF pickup roller paper pass count
80,000
DF-SP-PD
ADF separation pad paper pass count
80,000
C3-PU-RL
C4-PU-RL
C3-SP-RL

count
120,000
C4-SP-RL

count
120,000
FIN-STPR
Stapler assembly drive count
500,000
Clearing Counters
Maintenance/parts counter all clear
Execute service mode > CLEAR > COUNTER to clear all maintenance/parts counters.
Counter clear on parts replacement
Press the numeric keypad key 0 after displaying the counter for a part just replaced, and the counter will be cleared
individually.
#LMS
Configuration
Group
INACTIVE
Item
ST-SEND
Default
0
Setting
range
0-1
TR-SEND
ST-BRDIM
TR-BRDIM
Description
To display installation state of SEND function when transfer is displayed.
The 24 digits of license transfer numbers are displayed.
0-1
To display installation state of BarDIMM when transfer is disabled.

284
8. Service Mode
Group
INACTIVE
Item
ST-ERDS
Default
Setting
range
0-1
0-1
0-1
TR-ERDS
ST-PCL
0-1
0-1
0-1
To display installation state of transmission function for SEND searchable PDF

when transfer is disabled.
TR-PS
ERASE
To display installation state of ELA function when transfer is disabled.

TR-SPDF
ST-PS
To display installation state of EAM function when transfer is disabled.

TR-ELA
ST-SPDF
To display installation state of PCL function when transfer is disabled.

TR-EAM
ST-ELA
To display installation state of third party expansion function of E-RDS when

transfer is disabled.
TR-PCL
ST-EAM
Description
To display installation state of PS function when transfer is disabled

SEND
0-1
To display installation state of SEND function when non-transfer is displayed.
BRDIM
0-1
To display installation state of BarDIMM when non-transfer is disabled.
ERDS
0-1
To display installation state of third party expansion function of E-RDS when

non-transfer is disabled.
PCL
0-1
To display installation state of PCL function when non-transfer is disabled.
EAM
0-1
To display installation state of EAM function when non-transfer is disabled.
ELA
0-1
To display installation state of ELA function when non-transfer is disabled.
SPDF
0-1
To display installation state of transmission function for SEND searchable PDF

when non- transfer is disabled.
PS
0-1
To display installation state of PS function when non-transfer is disabled
Outline
1. Validate an optional function which has been installed but has not been validated based on the license key issued by a
license issue server (hereinafter called "LMS").
2. Invalidate the function for which a license has been already set up.
Details
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Validate a license by entering the license issued by LMS via the local UI.
The license key issued by LMS cannot be entered via the remote UI.
Invalidate a license (Set the function to OFF) via the service mode.
Validate a license via the service mode.
A license with restriction (with an expiration date, restriction in the number of licenses) is not supported. (Restriction
information is not read.)
6. Some optional functions installed are in dependent relationship with each other.
For example, when using [Function A], [Function B] should be available.
In this case, [Function B] is called a slave option of [Function A].
Installation of the slave option fails when it is found that the master option is not validated as a result of verification of the
dependent relationship.
7. Decoding and verifying a license key
Decode an entered license key and examine the validity of the license information obtained.
When an error occurs during verification, the error information is sent back to the local UI, which displays an error message
based on the information.Verification errors are assumed to occur in the following cases.
- When a license is installed in a non-licensed device
- When an optional function included in the license does not exist in the target device
- When an optional function included in the license is a slave option and a master option is not validated
- When an incorrect license key is entered
- When a license key is illegally altered
Method of confirming license option

Confirmation could be made whether the license option is active or not in the SACTIBAT FUNCTION item by outputting the SPEC
REPORT from the service mode.
285
8. Service Mode
Output method:
1. Enter the service mode.
Push [Additional Functions] Key > push 2, 8 Key > push [Additional Functions] Key.
2. Push cursors, and display [#REPORT].
Then press [OK].
3. Push cursors, and display [#REPORT OUT PUT].
Then press [OK].
4. Push cursors, and display [#SPEC LIST].
Then press [OK].
5. Check the items displayed under ACTIBAT FUNCTION in SPEC REPORT.
ACTIBAT FUNCTION >
- BW-SEND
- CL-SEND
Items for which ON/ON is displayed are validated.
A license option confirmation example
To check the validation of license option, see the SPEC REPORT. The details according to the list shown below.
Item Name
Color Universal SEND KIT
License Name
Status/Optional Setting
BW-SEND
ON/ON
CL-SEND
ON/ON
Inactivity of the transmitted license

Inactivity of the transmitted license
Situation of using this service mode
This service mode is used to invalidate a license under the assumption that, when a device is exceptionally replaced with another
one due to a trouble (caused by the device), the license is transferred to another device. This operation is called "invalidating
transfer of a license".
Since it is possible to select the same device as a destination of the transfer, this service mode can be also used to invalidate a
function on a temporary basis. Careful attention, however, is required because, if you invalidate a function by mistake, you need
to contact a sales company for recovery.
Take utmost precaution when inactivating the license
When invalidating transfer of a license, it is necessary to invalidate the license by entering the service mode and issue a function
invalidation certificate key, which certifies that the license has been invalidated. This operation can be executed for each optional
function. At the point when a function invalidation certificate key is issued, the function is invalidated and becomes unavailable.
When you report this function invalidation certificate key, the serial number of the transfer origination device, the serial number
of the transfer destination device, and the reason why you need to perform the transfer to a sales company, a new license key
is issued for installation for the transfer destination device. Be sure to write down the new license key when you receive it and,
when it is registered in the transfer destination device successfully, inform the user of the new license key and explain him/her
to keep it at hand.
Operation Procedure
1. Enter the service mode and display the following service mode.
(Press one key at once to enter the service mode in the order of "Main, 2, 8, Main".)
When you have entered the service mode, use the left and right arrow keys to display items,and press the OK key to fix the
setting.
2. Display [#LMS].
3. Press the OK key and display [#LMS INACTIVE].
4. Display [ST-SEND].
286
8. Service Mode
5. Press the OK key.
#SEND
001
Press '2' from the numeric

keypad and press 'OK'.
OK
6. Press 2 using the numeric key and press the OK key.
CAUTION:
The 24 digits of license transfer numbers are displayed, so you take the memo.
Because it cannot maintain the number displaying with the thing of this place limit.
If you do not take the memo, the indication contents are not held when you do OFF of the main power, it is impossible
for license transfer.
Even if you push the reset key and clear the indication, the indication is never display again.
License transfer example:
0743 5306 1326

8106 5575 0721
OK
7. Turn OFF/ON the power of the main unit.
For Reference:
When a license option is displayed in Procedure (4), 001 1 is displayed. The last "1" shows that the license is validated by
license authentication.
After the license is transferred, the last number is changed to "2".
When the option is standard, the last number shows "3" which means disable for license transfer.
Details about the last number:
1: The function is validated.
2: The function is invalidated, or the license is transferred.
3: The function is invalidated, or the license does not exist.
8. When you contact the contact section of the sales company and report a function invalidation certificate key required for
license transfer, the serial number of the transfer origination device, and the serial number of the transfer destination device,
a new license key that can be registered to the transfer destination device is issued.
9. Register the new license key to the transfer destination device and make sure that the function is validated.
Erasing a License
Erasing a License
When you invalidate a license option on a temporary basis or when you do not use it for a long period of time, you can invalidate
the function by erasing the license.
The license can be validated by registering the license number again.
Procedure to erase a license
You can erase a license by entering the service mode.
Operation Procedure:
287
8. Service Mode
1. Enter the service mode and display the following service mode.
When you have entered the service mode, use the right and left arrow keys to display items,and press the OK key to fix the
setting.
2. Display [#LMS].
3. Press the OK key and display [#LMS ERASE].
4. Display [SEND].
5. Press the OK key.
6. Turn OFF/ON the power of the main unit.
For Reference:
There is no function to display the license registration numbers in the main unit.
Therefore, when there is a possibility to restore the license after erasing it, make sure that a user has written down the license
registration number.
When a license option is displayed in Procedure (4), 001 1 is displayed.
The last "1" shows that the license is validated by license authentication.
After the license is erased, the last number is changed to "2".
When the option is standard, the last number shows "3" which means disable for license transfer.
Details about the last number:
1. The function is validated.
2. The function is invalidated, or a license is transferred.
3. The function is invalidated, or the license does not exist.
#E-RDS
Configuration
Settings related to e-RDS are described below.
Item
Default
E-RDS SWITCH 0
Setting range
0 or 1
Description
e-RDS OFF/ON setting (0:OFF / 1:ON)When used (ON), the counter information and error information are sent to UGW.Default: 0 (OFF)
RGW- ADDRESS
URL of UGW Character string length: URL of UGWDefault: URL of actual UGWCharacter string length: 129 bytes
129byte (including
(including NULL, one-byte codes only)
NULL, one-byte codes
only)
RGW-PORT
443
CNT-DATE
CNT-INTV
1-65535
Port No. of UGW Default: 443Setting range: 1 to 65535

Setting of the date of sending the counter information to the server (Valid
after input of license).
Set the start date of the schedule to send the counter information to the
server using a third party expansion function of E-RDS.
Refer to the user mode date setting.
(12 digits: YYYYMMDDHHMM)
YYYY: Year MM: Month
DD: Day
HH: Hour
MM: Minute
24
1-168 (on a weekly ba- Setting of the interval of sending the counter information to the server (Valid
sis)
after input of license).
Set the interval of sending the counter information to the server using a third
party expansion function of E-RDS.
COM-TEST
Execution of communication test An attempt is made to connect to UGW,

judges whether connection is successful, and displays "COM- TEST OK" or
"COMTEST NG" as the judgment result.
COM-LOG
Details of communication test result. The log of errors in communication with

UGW is displayed. The error information includes the error occurrence time,
error code, and details of the error.Maximum log count: 5Error information
length: Max. 128 characters (excluding NULL)
288
8. Service Mode
Item
Default
Setting range
SCALLCMP
Description
Repair completion process (call button function) Used when the service
personnel has completed the requested repair.
#REPORT
Configuration
The table below lists the kinds of reports that are supported.
Item
Explanation
SERVICE DATA LIST
"Service mode service soft switch output (SSSW, MENU, NUMERIC Param., SPECIAL, NCU, SCAN,
PRINT, SYSTEM, ROM, start date)"
SYSTEM DATA LIST
"Service mode service soft switch output (SSSW, MENU, NUMERIC Param., SPECIAL, NCU, SCAN,
PRINT, SYSTEM, ROM, start date) System dump list output"
SYSTEM DUMP LIST
Transmission count, reception count, record chart count, error count and other outputs
COUNTER LIST
Counter output
ERROR LOG LIST
Jam and error history output
SPEC LIST
Type setting, print speed, memory size, ROM indication, adjustment data and other outputs
SERVICE LABEL
Not used.
ERDS COM LOG LIST
Output of communication error log information related to e-RDS
Details
System Data List
Use it to check the settings associated with the service soft switch and service parameters.
001
16/10 2009 14:10

******************************
*** SYSTEM DATA LIST ***
******************************
#SSSW
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW06
SW07
SW08
SW09
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW18
SW19
SW20
SW21
SW22
SW23
SW24
SW25
SW26
SW27
SW28
SW29
SW30
SW31
SW32
SW33
SW34
SW35
SW36
SW37
SW38
SW39
SW40
SW41
SW42
SW43
SW44
SW45
SW46
SW47
SW48
SW49
SW50
#MENU
01:
02:
03:
04:
05:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
10000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00011000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00100000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
---------------------
0
0
0
0
0
System Dump List

Use it to check the history of communications, both successful and error.
289
8. Service Mode
10/16 2009 13:00
0001
CLEAR DATE
10/16/2009
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
TX
A4
RX
A4
33600
21600
9600
14400
14400
9600
STD
MH
G3
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
7
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
7
2
0
0
B4
A3
B4
31200
19200
7200
12000
12000
7200
FINE
MR
ECM
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
0
7
=
A3
28800 =
16800 =
4800 =
TC9600=
0
0
0
0
0
=
LTR
26400 =
14400 =
2400 =
TC7200=
0
0
0
0
0
4800 =
SUPER =
MMR =
0
0
7
2400 =
ULTRA =
JBIG =
0
0
0
LGL
=
24000 =
12000 =
0
0
0
JPEG =
[7]
PRINT
[8]
READ
TTL
C-S-TTL
K-S-TTL
SCAN
#000
=
=
=
=
0
0
0
[9]
63 /
0 /
51 /
43 /
63
0
51
43
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
*1: TX, number of total pages transmission.

*2: Total number of pages transmitted/received according to original size.
*3: RX, number of total pages reception.
*4: Total number of pages transmitted and received for each modem speed.
*5: Total number of pages transmitted/received in connection with different modem speeds
(Standard, Fine, Super Fine, Ultra Fine).
*6: Total number of pages transmitted and received for each coding method.
*7: Total number of pages transmitted and received in each mode .
*8: Total number of pages printed/scanned.
*9: Total number of occurrences for error code .
Indication sample
##280
##280number of errors
It provides error information on the 3 most recent communications.
290
8. Service Mode
2003 09/02 TUE 12:00
*1
0001
FAX
#1 LATEST
*2
*3
*4
*5
#000
START TIME
09/02 10:00
OTHER PARTY 12345678
MAKER CODE 10001000
MACHINE CODE
0100001 00000000
RCV V.8 FRAME
E0 81 85 D4 90 7E 00 00
SYMBOL RATE 3429 baud
DATA RATE
28.8
TX LVL REDUCTION
0
ERR ABCODE
0
ERR SECTXB
0
ERR SECRXB
0
Rx : ( bit 1 )
( bit 57 )
Tx : ( bit 1 )
( bit 57 )
*6
*7
*8
Rx : NSF CSI DIS
*8
Tx :
00000100
00000001
00000000
00000001
01110111 01011111 00100011 00000001 10101001 00000001 ( bit

00000001 00000100 00000000 00000000
( bit
01000010 00011111 00100001 00000001 00000001 00000001 ( bit
00000001 00000100 00000000 00000000
( bit
CFR
NSS TSI DCS
Rx : MCF
Tx :
MCF
PIX-288 PPS-NUL
MCF
PIX-288 PPS-NUL
#2
56 )
96 )
56 )
96 )
MCF
PIX-288 PPS-NUL
PIX-288 PPS-NUL
MCF
PIX-288 PPS-EOP
DCN
#000
START TIME
09/02 09:30
MAKER CODE 10001000
MACHINE CODE
0100001 00000000
RCV V.8 FRAME
E0 81 85 D4 90 7E 00 00
DATA RATE
28800 bps [V. 34]
TX LVL REDUCTION
0
ERR ABCODE
00
ERR SECTXB
00
ERR SECRXB
00
Rx : ( bit 1 )
( bit 57 )
Tx : ( bit 1 )
( bit 57 )
00000100
00000001
00000000
00000001
Rx : NSF CSI DIS

Tx :
CFR
NSS TSI DCS
Rx : MCF
Tx :
#3 OLDEST
01110111 01011111 00100011 00000001 10101001 00000001 ( bit

00000001 00000100 00000000 00000000
( bit
01000010 00011111 00100001 00000001 00000001 00000001 ( bit
00000001 00000100 00000000 00000000
( bit
MCF
PIX-288 PPS-NUL
MCF
PIX-288 PPS-NUL
MCF
PIX-288 PPS-NUL
PIX-288 PPS-NUL
MCF
PIX-288 PPS-EOP
DCN
#000
START TIME
09/02 09:00
MAKER CODE 10001000
MACHINE CODE
0100001 00000000
RCV V.8 FRAME
E0 81 85 D4 90 7E 00 00
DATA RATE
28800 bps [V. 34]
TX LVL REDUCTION
0
ERR ABCODE
00
ERR SECTXB
00
ERR SECRXB
00
*1: service error code.

*2: START TIME, date and time (in 24-hr notation).
*3: OTHER PARTY, telephone number sent by the other party.
*4: MAKER CODE, manufacturer code.
*5: MACHINE CODE, model code.
*6: bit 1 through bit 96 of DIS, DCS, or DTC that has been received.
*7: bit 1 through bit 96 of DIS, DCS, or DTC that has been transmitted.
*8: RX, procedural signal received; TX, procedural signal transmitted.
Counter List
Explanation: Maintenance/supplies counter output.
(For more detailed information about the maintenance/supplies counter output, refer to
#COUNTER on page 283)
291
56 )
96 )
56 )
96 )
8. Service Mode
Error Log List

07/12/2005 13:07 FAX
001
***************************************
*** JAM/ERR LOG REPORT ***
***************************************
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5] [6]
[7]
[8] [9] [10]
JAM
01 04/12 12:17 20:03 4
0012
000026 1 A4
20 04/12 12:17 20:03 4
0012
000026 1 A4
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
ERR
01 04/12 12:17 15:36 3
0010 0000 000691
20 04/12 12:17 15:36 3
0010 0000 000691
Jam history description (JAM)

No.
Item
Explanation
[1]
Number
The larger the number of a jam, the more recently it has occurred.
[2]
Jam date
Date of jam occurrence
[3]
Jam time
[4]
Jam recovery time
[5]
Location
3: Host machine, 4: ADF, 5: Finisher
[6]
Occurrence category
0: Host machine, 1: ADF, 2: Finisher
[7]
Jam code
For a definition of the code, see the Jam Code on page 210
[8]
Total counter display
[9]
Pickup stage position
[10]
Paper size
0: Manual feed tray, 1: Cassette 1, 2: Cassette 2, 3: Cassette 3, 4: Cassette 4, 7:

Duplex unit
Error history description (ERR)

No.
Item
Explanation
[1]
Number
The larger the number of an error, the more recently it has occurred.
[2]
Error date
Date of error occurrence
[3]
Error time
[4]
Error recovery time
[5]
Location
3: Main unit, 5: Finisher
[6]
Error code
Error code (4-digit code; for a definition of the code, Error Code on page 197)
[7]
Detail code
Detail code of the error code (4-digit code; for a definition of the code, see the
"Error Code" Chapter.)
[8]
Total counter display
Alarm history description(ALARM)
292
8. Service Mode
No.
Item
Explanation
[1]
Number
The larger the number of a alarm, the more recently it has occurred.
[2]
Alarm date
Date of alarm occurrence
[3]
Alarm time
[4]
Alarm recovery time
[5]
Location
[6]
Alarm code
Alarm code (4-digit code; for a definition of the code, see the "Alarm Code"Alarm
Code on page 214)
[7]
Detail code
Detail code of the alarm code (8-digit code; for a definition of the code, see the
"Error Code" Chapter.)
Spec List
2009 10/09 16:31
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
0001
*****************************
*** SPEC REPORT ***
*****************************
TYPE
LBP SPEED
TOTAL MEMORY
MAIN
OPTION
BOOT
LANG
LANG LIBRARY
LANG FILE
VIENTNAMESE
CHINESE(TRAD. )
TURKISH
SWEDISH
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
JAPAN
45cpm
256MB
WLaa-07-09
_____
_____
_____
_____
00000010
00000010
00000010
00000010
BULGARIAN
ECONT
OPT-CAS 1
OPT-CAS 2
OPT-CAS 3
OPT-DUP
OPT-FIN
MEDIA
ACTIBAT FUNCTION
BDL-IMAGE (1200)
FAX
NETWORK
PCL
PC-SCAN
BW-SEND
CL-SEND
PAF
BDL-IMAGE (600)
E-RDS
BAR-DIMM
SERCHABLE PDF
eAM
eLA
PS
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
00000010
0303
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
293
BOOT-V0023
00000010
8. Service Mode
07/12/2005 13:07 FAX
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
002
PARAM
TYPE
OPTION/ENABLE SW
BDL-IMAGE (1200)
FAX
NETWORK
PCL
PC-SCAN
BW-SEND
CL-SEND
PAF
BDSS
BDL-IMAGE (600)
COUNTER
E-RDS
BAR-DIMM
SERCHABLE PDF
eAM
eLA
PS
BODY No.
ENGINE CODE
SIZE TYPE
PRODUCT NAME
TOTAL
TTL
COPY
FAX-PRT
PDL-PRT
RPT-PRT
MEDIA-PRT
PICT-PRT
TONER-YELLOW
TONER-MAGENTA
TONER-CYAN
TONER-BLACK
OPTYION ROM
USB MEMORY
SD CARD
USB SERIAL No.
MAC ADDRESS
NUMBER OF LOGS
ACTIVITY (FAX)
ACTIVITY
PRINTJOB ACCOUNT
COPY
PDL PRINT
RX PRINT
REPORT
MEDIA/PICT BRIDGE
JAM
SERVICE CALL
ENVIROMENT
ALARM
COUNTER
_____
1 : JP
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
OFF / OFF
OFF / OFF
OFF / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
FUYxxxxx
20080042
1 : AB
XXX
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
000688
000685
000000
000000
000000
000000
000000
000000
000000
000000
000000
0MB
OFF
0MB
00XXXXXXXX
00 00 85 51 60 1C
_____
_____
0
0
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
ON
[14]
[1]
Type setting
[2]
Print speed
[3]
Memory size
[4]
ROM version (MAIN/BOOT/LANG*1(language liblary/language file version)ECONT/option cassette/duplex unit/finisher)
[5]
Activation function ON/OFF
[6]
Not used
[7]
Total counter (TOTAL/COPY/FAX/PDL/REPORT record counts)
[8]
Option ROM availability
[9]
USB memory availability
[10] SD card volume

[11] USB serial number
[12] MAC address
[13] output the number of histories (communication history, copy/print/report/JOB history of the reception print, jam history, E code
history, humidity log)
[14] Counter ON/OFF
#DOWNLOAD
Download
The following parts of this unit can be upgraded by executing download mode using the
service support tool (UST)
(for more information, see the "Overview on page 190
Main unit
294
8. Service Mode
ROM mounted on the main controller PCB (BOOT+PROGRAM)
ROM mounted on the DC controller PCB (DCON)
Accessory
ROM mounted on the finisher controller PCB(FIN_CON)
#CLEAR
Configuration
Item
Small Item
Description
TEL & USER DATA
To clear the entire area registered/set by the user.

TEL registration data and user data are cleared.
(TEL registration refers to registration of one-touch dialing, coded dialing and group dialing.)
SERVICE DATA
To clear service data. User data is not cleared.
COUNTER
To clear the maintenance and parts counters and counter for each mode. Counter (numerator) on the system dump list is cleared.
SOFT-CNT
Not used
TYPE
HST
To initialize user data and service data according to the country setting.
ACTIVITY
To clear description of communication management report.
ACCOUNT
To clear each print log.
JAM
To clear jam log description.
ERR
To clear error (error code) log description.
ALARM
To clear alarm log description.
ENVIROMENT
To clear environment log description.
CARD
ERR
To clear the department management information kept in the controller when removing the
Card Reader.
E719
To clear errors of the Card Reader.
PWD
To clear the password of the system administrator.
FILE SYSTEM
Not used
FORMAT
FMT-SD
USB MEMORY
To format a USB flash drive. (Perform formatting at occurrence of E744 due to a damaged
USB flash drive.)
LICENSE
DRIVE
To clear the drive for license files.
512
To format 512MB SD card.
1024
2048
CA-KEY
To initialize the installed CA certificate. (To be displayed only after activating the e-RDS
function)
ERDS-DAT
To clear the setting relating to e-RDS to return to the setting at factory shipment. (To be
displayed only after activating the e-RDS function)
DEPT_USER_CLEAR
To turn OFF the Dept ID management and user management.
SYSTEM_INFO_
CLEAR
To clear the password of the system administrator.
ENGIN
ERRCLR
To clear an engine error.
BKRAMCLR
To clear backup RAM of the engine.
TNRINST
To send toner to the Developing Assembly from the Toner Bottle at installation.
EAM-DAT
To initialize Flash/SRAM data for EAM.
ELA-DAT
To initialize Flash/SRAM data for ELA.
TONER-INSTALLED
ALL
ON
To set the flag generated when the toner stirring is done. (When this service mode is executed, the machine is automatically restarted.)
OFF
To clear the flag generated when toner stirring is done. (When this service mode is executed,
the machine is automatically restarted.)
To clear Settings/Registration data of counters except the counters for user data, service
data (excluding some of SCAN/PRINT parameters) and the number of prints on the system
dump list.
295
8. Service Mode
#DISPLAY
Configuration
An error code is displayed when a service error has occurred.
The E code is displayed in the upper step, and the detail code is displayed the bottom step.
Group
DISPLAY
Item
Description
ERR
The E code and detail code of the current system error are displayed.
(Multiple codes can be displayed with the left and right buttons. )
<Display example>
SYSTEM ERROR
xxx: Eyyy-zzzz Example) 001:E602-1105
xxx: History number
yyy: E Code
zzzz: Detail code
JAM
The current JAM code is displayed.

(Multiple JAM codes can be displayed with the left and right buttons.)
<Display example>
JAM ERROR
xxx:y-z-vvvv-wwww
xxx: History number
y: Description of position (3: Main unit (including the pickup assembly), 4: ADF, 5: Finisher)
z: Cassette level (01: Manual feed tray, 1: Cassette 1, 2: Cassette 2, 3; Cassette 3,4: Cassette 4, 7: Doublesided)
vvvv: JAM code
wwww: paper size
SPDTYPE Display of engine speed type on controller PCB

<Display example>
SPDTYPE (Line 1)
45cpm (Line 2)
#ROM
Configuration
The table below lists the items of ROM display mode that are supported.
Group
ROM
Item
Description
MAIN (Bootable)
Displays the version number of the PROGRAM ROM mounted on the main controller PCB.
MAIN2 (Boot)
Displays the version of the ROM (BOOT) mounted on the main controller PCB.
OPROM
Not used
ECONT
Displays the version number of the ROM mounted on the DC controller PCB.
OPTION CAS1
Not used
OPTION CAS2
Not used
OPTION CAS3
Not used
DUPLEX
Not used
FINISHER
Displays the version number of the Inner finisher
READER
Not used
#TEST MODE
Outline
Test mode must be executed by keeping track the flow of menu items appearing on the LCD.
Menu items in test mode are organized into seven blocks as described below.
Numerals enclosed in parentheses denote a numeric keypad key to be pressed each.
296
8. Service Mode
1. D-RAM test <(1) D-RAM TEST>
Checks to see if data can be correctly written to and read from D-RAM.
2. PG output <(3) PG>
Used to generate service test patterns.
3. MODEM test <(4) MODEM TEST>
Performs relay actuation, modem DTMF and tonal signal transmission/reception tests.
4. FUNCTION test <(6) FUNCTION TEST>
Used to verify the operations of microswitches, sensors, speakers and ADF functions.
Configuration
Numerals enclosed in parentheses denote a numeric keypad key to be pressed each.
Group
subgroup
Item 1
Explanation
TEST MODE [1] - [9]

(1) DRAM [1] - [2]
D-RAM data check
(1) D-RAM TEST
Write/read check
(2) D-RAM TEST
Read check
SELECT NO.01
Grid
SELECT NO.02
HT
SELECT NO.03
All-black output
SELECT NO.04
---(For R&D)
SELECT NO.05
---(For R&D)
SELECT NO.06
4dot-6space (vertical)
SELECT NO.07
dot-6space (horizontal)
SELECT NO.08
---(For R&D)
SELECT NO.09
16 gray levels (monochromatic)
(3) PG
(4) MODEM TEST [1] - [9]

(1) RELAY TEST [1] - [2]
(1) RELAY TEST 1
NCU relay (and switch) ON/OFF test
(2) RELAY TEST 2
230 V common NCU test
(2) FREQ TEST [0] - [6]
Frequency test
(0) FREQ TEST 462Hz
(1) FREQ TEST 1100Hz
(4) FREQ TSST 1650Hz
(4) G3 SIGNAL TX TEST [0] - [8]
G3 signal transmission test
(0) G3 SIGNAL TX TEST 300bps

(5) G3 SIGNAL TX TEST
TC7200bps
TC9600bps
12000bps
14400bps
(5) DTMF TEST [0] - [9], * , #
DTMF transmission test

297
8. Service Mode
Group
subgroup
Item 1
Explanation

TC7200bps
TC9600bps
12000bps
14400bps
TC9600bps
(*) G3 SIGNAL TX TEST 12000bps
(#) G3 SIGNAL TX TEST
14400bps
(6) MODEM TEST
Tonal sign reception test
(8) G3 V.34 Tx TEST
V34 G3 signal transmission test
(6) FUNCTION TEST [1] - [9]

(1) FUNCTION TEST G3 4800bps
G3 4800 bps signal transmission test
(2) SENS/SW CHECK
Sensor checks
FLAG
Sensor check with flag
CST
Cassette check
READER
Reader sensor check
A/D
Analog/digital computation output sensor
COPY
Copy confirmation sensor
ADF
ADF sensor check
(3) NCR sts
cardreader test
(9) LINE TEST [1] - [3]
Line signal reception test
Details
D-RAM Test <(1) D-RAM>
Press the numeric keypad key 1 on the test mode menu to select the D-RAM test.
Press numeric keypad keys 1 and 2 during the D-RAM test to carry out the individual tests described below.
Numeric keypad key 1
Checks to see if data can be correctly written to and read from all areas of D-RAM (SDRAM).
If an error occurs making this check, the test is aborted, with an error appearing on the touch panel (LCD).
Checks to see if data can be correctly read from all areas of D-RAM (SDRAM).
If an error occurs making this check, the test is aborted, with an error appearing on the touch panel (LCD).
298
8. Service Mode
D-RAMTEST
[1] - [2]
Press numeric keypad key 1
D-RAMTEST 29888KB
29888KBTotal size of D-RAM memory (byte)

:Size of written to memory
:Size of read from memory
Nomal end
D-RAMTEST 29888KB
complete (no error)
Press numeric keypad key 2

D-RAMTEST 29888KB
29888KBTotal size of D-RAM memory (byte)

:Size of read from memory
PG Output <(3) PG>

Press the numeric keypad key 3 on the test mode menu to select the PG output.
Press numeric keypad keys during the print test to generate test patterns as described below.
Nine kinds of service test patterns are available. Other test patterns are reserved for factory/ development purposes.
No.
Test pattern
SELECT NO.01
Grid
SELECT NO.02
HT
SELECT NO.03
All-black output
SELECT NO.04
---(For R&D)
SELECT NO.05
---(For R&D)
SELECT NO.06
4dot-6space (vertical)
SELECT NO.07
dot-6space (horizontal)
SELECT NO.08
---(For R&D)
SELECT NO.09
16 gray levels (monochromatic)
Procedure
1. Enter the PG number with numeric keys, then press the START key.
2. Select single-sided (SGL: 0) or double-sided (DBL: 1), then press the START key.
3. Enter the number of prints to be output (PG COUNT), then press the START key.
4. Specify the paper drawer (main unit), then press the START key.
Main unit cassette (ST_C: 0), 2nd cassette (OP_C: 1), Manual feed tray (MLT: 2)
5. Specify the paper eject slot, then press the START key.
Tray 1 (1_OUT: 0), Tray2 (2_OUT: 1)
6. Select a paper type, then press the OK key.
Plain paper (PLN: 0), Thick paper (TCK: 1),Thin paper (OHP: 2)
7. A test pattern is output.
MODEM Test <(4) MODEM TEST>

These tests test modem and NCU transmission and reception.
The modem tests check whether signals are sent correctly from the modem by comparing the sound of the signals from the
speaker with the sounds from a normal modem.
End this test by pressing the Stop key.
Keypad
Type
Description
Relay Test
Use it to turn on/off a selected relay to execute a switchover test.
Frequency test
The modem sends tonal signals from the modular jack and the speaker.
The modem sends G3 signals from the modular jack and the speaker.
DTMF signal reception test
Use it to generate the DTMF signal coming from the modem using the telephone
line terminal and the speaker.
299
8. Service Mode
Keypad
Type
Description
Tonal signal reception test
Use it to monitor a specific frequency and the DTMF signal received from the
telephone line terminal by causing them to be indicated on the LCD (i.e., the
presence/absence as detected). The reception signal is generated by the speaker.
V.34 G3 signal transmission test
The modem sends V.34 G3 signals from the modular jack and the speaker.
Relay Test
Press '1'or '2' on the keypad on the Modem test menu to select relay test mode.
Use the keypad to operate the various relays of the NCU. '2' on the keypad is used for 230V machine.
The input key and relay are shown below:
[1]
[2]
RELAY TEST1 OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1] [2]
Relay CML P
Keypad 0
1
[6]
[3]
S
2
[4]
H
3
[5]
D
4
[6]
R
5

The input key and relay are shown below:
[1]
[2]
RELAY TEST2 OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
[3]
[4]
Relay
Keypad
[5]
[6]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
CITS2 C1 NORG DCSEL DCLIM IPSEL1 IPSEL2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
CAUTION:
The touch panel (LCD) is turned on or off in relation to the transmission of the relay operation signal as is operated on the
keypad; for this reason, you cannot use the touch panel (LCD) to check a fault on a single relay.
Frequency Test
A press on '2' on the keypad from the MODEM test menu selects the frequency test.
In this test, signals of the following frequencies from the modem are transmitted using the telephone line terminal and the speaker.
To select a different frequency,
Keypad
Frequency
462Hz
1100Hz
1300Hz
1500Hz
1650Hz
1850Hz
2100Hz
300
8. Service Mode
NOTE:
The frequency and the output level of individual frequencies are in keeping with the output level set in service mode.
G3 Signal Transmission Test

A press on '4' on the keypad from the MODEM test menu selects the G3 signal transmission test.
In this test, the following G3 signals from the modem are transmitted using the telephone line terminal and the speaker.
To select a different transmission speed, use the keypad.
Keypad
Transmission speed
300bps
2400bps
4800bps
7200bps
9600bps
TC7200bps
TC9600bps
12000bps
14400bps
NOTE:
The output level of individual signals is in keeping with the setting made in service mode.
A press on '5' on the MODEM test menu selects the DTMF signal transmission test. In the test, the following DTMF signals from
the modem are transmitted using the telephone line terminal and the speaker. The number pressed on the keypad selects a
specific DTMF signal.
NOTE:
The output level of individual signals is in keeping with the setting made in service mode.
Tonal/DTMF Signal Reception Test

A press on '6' on the keypad from the MODEM test menu selects the tonal signal/DTMF signal reception 0 test. In this signal, the
tonal signal/DTMF signal received from the telephone line terminal can be checked to find out if it was detected by the modem.
Tonal signal reception test
MODEM TEST
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF

changes from '0' to '1' in response to detection of a signal of 46225Hz.
DTMF signal reception test
MODEM TEST
OFF OFF OFF 5
The received DTMF signals are indicated starting
from the right using the 2nd character of the display.
V.34 G3 Signal Transmission Test

A press on '8' on the keypad from the MODEM test menu selectes the V.34 G3 signal transmission test.
The V.34 G3 signals below are sent from the modem using the modular jack and the speaker by pressing the start key.
The Baud rate can be changed with the keypad, and the Speed can be changed with the left/right arrow key.
301
8. Service Mode
Keypad
Baud rate
3429baud
3200baud
3000baud
2800baud
2743baud
2400baud
Left/right arrow key
Transmission speed
<
>
2400bps
4800bps
7200bps
9600bps
12000bps
14400bps
16800bps
19200bps
21600bps
24000bps
26400bps
28800bps
31200bps
33600bps
FUNCTION Test <(6) FUNCTION TEST>

Press the numeric keypad key 6 on the test mode menu to select the function test.
Press numeric keypad keys 1 to 4 and 9 during the function test to enter the menus listed below.
Keypad
Type
Description
Transmits 4800-bps G3 signals to a telephone line and speaker
Sensor test
Sensor actuation test
Accessory
ADF test
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Line signal reception test
ADF operation test
NCU board signal sensor and frequency counter operation test
G3 signal transmission test (6-1: G3 480 bps Tx)

Press numeric keypad key 1 on the FUNCTION TEST menu to select the G3 signal transmission test.
This test transmits 4800-bps G3 signals from the telephone line connection terminal and speaker.
Sensor test (6-2: SENSOR)
This mode is used to verify the status of the unit sensors from the touch panel (LCD) indications.
Press numeric keypad key 3 on the FUNCTION TEST menu to select the sensor test.
To select a minor item, press the START key.
The touch panel (LCD) indications change as the associated sensors turn on and off.
Group
(2) SENS/ SW
CHECK
Item
FLAG
Description
(manual check)
Detail
CT: Waste Toner Full Sensor(S17)
0/Full
1/Available
TC: Toner Cover Open/Closed Sensor (S16)
1/Cover open
0/Cover closed
MW: Manual Feeder Paper Size Sensor (S8)
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
302
8. Service Mode
Group
(2) SENS/ SW
CHECK
Item
FLAG
CST
Description
(manual check)
Cassette check
Detail
DO: Front Cover Open/Closed Sensor (S18)
1/Cover open
0/Cover closed
F1: No.1 Delivery Full Sensor (S11)
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
F2: No. 2 Delivery Full Sensor (S41)
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
S: Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor (S1)
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
SU: Cassette 1 Paper Sensor (S2)
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
PE: Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A (S3)
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
ZA: Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B(S4)
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
S1: Cassette Size Detection Switch 1 (Width)

(SW6)
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
S2: Cassette Size Detection Switch 2 (Length) 0/Document presence

(SW7)
1/Document absenc
READER Reader sensor check
C0: Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor 0

(S21)
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
C1: Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor 11 0/Document presence

(S26)
1/Document absenc
HP: iR2545/2535: CCD Hp Sensor (S22)
iR2530/2525/2520: CIS Hp Sensor (S31)
0/besides HP
1/HP
SIZE: Document size: Paper size indicated in a

mix of document size sensors
Document size sensor 0/1/2/3
A/D
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
HOP: Developing unit toner sensor (TS1) output value

DEV: Sub hopper toner sensor (TS2) output
value
A/D
TEP: Temperature output value

HUM: Humidity output value
MTH: Fixing main thermistor (TH3) output value
STH1: Fixing sub Thermistor (rear) (TH1) output value
STH2: Fixing sub thermistor (front) (TH2) output value
COPY
Copy confirmation sensor MP: Manual Feeder Paper Sensor (S9)
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
RE: Pre-Registration Sensor (S5)
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
RP: Loop Sensor (S6)
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
FX: Fixing Outlet Sensor (S19)
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
D1/2:No.1 Delivery Sensor(S12)/No. 2 Delivery 0/Document presence

Sensor(S42)
1/Document absenc
ADF
ADF sensor check
TU: Reversal Sensor (S40)
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
DL: Duplex Feed Sensor (S7)
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
W1: Document width sensor 1
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
W2: Document width sensor 2
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
L1: Document length sensor 1
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
303
8. Service Mode
Group
(2) SENS/ SW
CHECK
Item
ADF
Description
ADF sensor check
Detail
L2: Document length sensor 2
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
LT: Last document detection sensor
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
EX: Delivery reversal sensor
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
DR: Read sensor
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
RG: Registration paper sensor
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
CV: Cover open/close sensor
0/Cover closed
1/Cover open
DS: Document set snsor
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
RK: Release motor HP sensor
0/besides HP
1/HP
TM: Timing sensor
0/Document presence
1/Document absenc
Card reader test <6-3: NCR sts>

Press numeric keypad key 3 on the FACULTY menu to select the card reader test.
In this test, verify the successful operations of the card reader.
Press numeric keypad key 3 [1]
NCR Sts: 12345678
DPT MGN OK RDY 1234
[2]
[3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[1] Card reader and card availability indication

Card available: Eight-digit card ID
No card: Card None
No card reader available: NCR None
[2] Card type and card reader status indication
DPT: Department card
PRC: Unit pricing card
MAX: Upper limit setting card
ERS: Erased card
SRV: Service card
(No indication): No card
[4] Can status

OK: Normal scan
ERR: Scan error
NG: Nonstandard error
(No indication): No card
[5] Equipment status
IN: Initialization in progress
RDY: Ready
[6] Card reader version indication
Four-digit number
[3] Card type

MGN: Magnetic card
OPT: Optical card
Line signal reception test <6-9: LINE DETECT>

Press numeric keypad key 9 on the FACULTY menu to select the line signal reception test.
In this test, verify the successful operations of the NCU signal sensor and the frequency counter.
Menu 1 detects the CI state, while menu 3 detects the CNG signal.
Test menu 1
304
8. Service Mode
Press numeric keypad key 1 on the LINE DETECT menu to select test menu 1. When CI is detected on the telephone line
connection terminal, the touch panel (LCD) display changes from OFF to ON, indicating the received frequency. The touch panel
(LCD) also displays the on-hook or off-hook state of an external telephone set as detected. The touch panel (LCD) displays, from
left to right, CI, CI frequency, hook port and FC with indications of 1:ON and 0:OFF.
Test menu 2
Press numeric keypad key 2 on the LINE DETECT menu to select test menu 2. When the CNG signal is detected on the telephone
line connection terminal, the touch panel (LCD) display changes from OFF to ON, indicating the received frequency. The touch
panel (LCD) displays the status of CML, CNG and FED detection, from left to right, with ON/OFF indications. Numeric keypad
key 2 turns on the CML relay to detect CNG.
Test menu 3
Press numeric keypad key 3 on the LINE DETECT menu to select test menu 3. When the CNG signal is detected on the telephone
line connection terminal, the touch panel (LCD) display changes from OFF to ON, indicating the received frequency. The touch
panel (LCD) displays the status of CML, CNG and FED detection, from left to right, with ON/OFF indications. Numeric keypad
key 3 turns off the CML relay to detect CNG
305
8. Service Mode
Remote UI Service Mode

Function Overview
It is possible to display, configure, and execute various service mode modes as well as restart the host machine by using remote
UI.
Main Specifications
Only English is available as the display language regardless of the language setting.
The screen design remains remote UI.
The following screen is displayed while accessing service mode from remote UI. When a user logs out from service mode,
it returns to the normal screen.
Remote service mode
The normal screen of remote UI can be accessed/used even while accessing service mode from the Control Panel or remote
UI.
Cache and favicon of the browser are disabled.
The session information to be retained when logging in service mode from remote UI is discarded in the following cases.
If the user logs out from service mode
If the user restarts the host machine
If the fixed time (3 minutes) has passed from the last access
If the browser is closed without logging out, the session information is not discarded. In that case, the user needs to wait for
a fixed time to let the session information is discarded.
Clicking [REBOOT] button restarts the machine.
Operating conditions
In order to operate service mode using remote UI, the following conditions must be met.
306
8. Service Mode
Service mode is not accessed from the Control Panel
The remote UI is enabled in the settings on the Control Panel
[Settings/Registration] > [System Settings] > [Remote UI Settings] > [Use Remote UI] > [ON]
The RMT-SW (remote UI service mode function) setting is enabled (set to 1) in service mode
SERVICE MODE > SYSTEM > RMT-SW
0: OFF, 1: ON (default)
How to Use
1. Activate the Web browser, and access the following URL:
http://<Host machine's IP address or host name>/servicemode.html
2. Enter the password, and click [LOGIN].
* Password required for authentication differs depending on the following service mode setting:
SERVICE MODE > OPTION GR. > PSWD-SW
Combinations of PSWD-SW setting value and password required for authentication
PSWD-SW
setting
value
Password required for authentication
Password of remote UI service mode

Service mode password
Authentication screen

User's system administrator ID
Password of system administrator
Service mode password
3. When finishing the operation, click [LOGOUT].

NOTE:
If the user logged in and then closed the browser without logging out, connection status remains as "logged in". If the user attempts
to log in to service mode while being logged in, exclusive control is executed so that the user cannot access service mode. In that
case, wait for a fixed time (3 minutes) from the last access to let the user be automatically logged out, or turn OFF/ON the power
of the machine to be forcibly logged off.
Report Display Function

In remote UI service mode, various reports that are usually checked from printouts can be checked by displaying them on screen
if the user access service mode from the Control Panel.
Reports that can be checked using this function are as follow:
Service Mode > SERVICE REPORT > OUTPUT > SERVICE DATA LIST
Service Mode > SERVICE REPORT > OUTPUT > SYSTEM DATA LIST
Service Mode > SERVICE REPORT > OUTPUT > SYSTEM DUMP LIST
Service Mode > SERVICE REPORT > OUTPUT > COUNTER LIST
Service Mode > SERVICE REPORT > OUTPUT > ERROR LOG LIST
Service Mode > SERVICE REPORT > OUTPUT > SPEC LIST
Service Mode > SERVICE REPORT > OUTPUT > ERDS COM LOG LIST
307
8. Service Mode
Example of report display
308
Installation
How to check this Installation
Procedure...................................... 310
Checking before Installation..............311
Unpacking......................................... 313
Checking the Contents......................314
Installation Procedure....................... 316
Document Tray-J1.............................325
Card Reader-F1................................ 328
Serial Interface Kit-J2........................336
Copy Control Interface Cable-A1...... 339
System Upgrade RAM-C1.................342
Cst Heater Kit-J1...............................345
Reader Heater Unit........................... 352
Cassette Heater Unit-37....................359
Drum Heater-C1................................372
9. Installation
How to check this Installation Procedure

Illustrations Used in This Procedure
Illustrations used in this procedure are those of ADF standard 2Cassette model unless otherwise specified.
Symbols in the Illustration

The frequently-performed operations are described with symbols in this procedure.
Screw
1x
Packaged Item
Unused Parts
Connector
Harness
(Common for Guides and Clamps)
1x
Install
Remove
Connect
Loosen
Power Cord
1x
1x
1x
Tighten
Remove
Install
1x
1x
1x
Disconnect
Connect
Disconnect
Power
ON
OFF
Check the sound Check visually
310
Check
Push
Cleaning
9. Installation
Checking before Installation

Following shows requirements for the installation site. Therefore, it is desirable to see the installation site in advance before
bringing in this equipment to the user's site.
Checking Power Supply

1. The host machine can singly connect to the outlet of rated +/-10V, 15A or more.
2. Install the Host Machine near the power outlet and leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged
easily in an emergency.
Checking the Installation Environment

1. The installation site must be in the following environment. Especially, avoid installing the machine near the faucet, water
boiler, humidifier, or refrigerator.
Operating environment: Temperature: 10.0 to 30.0oC Humidity: 20 to 80%
2. Avoid installing the machine near fire, in an area subject to dust or ammonia gas. When installing the machine in a place
exposed to direct rays of the sun, it is recommended that curtains be hung over the windows.
3. The amount of ozone generated during use of the machine is below the harmful level. However, if the machine is used for
a long time in a poor-ventilated room, ozone may smell. To keep the work environment comfortable, the room must be wellventilated properly.
4. None of the machine feet should float. The machine must be held level constantly.
5. The machine must be installed at least 10 cm away from the surrounding walls and there must be an adequate space for
operating the machine.
Checking Installation Space

The space required for installation and maintenance work is shown below.
100mm or more
500mm
or more
500mm
or more
1341mm
500mm
or more
565mm
1372mm
Points to Make Before Installation

Be sure to go through the following before starting the work.
1. Imaging faults can result due to dew condensation that occurs when the machine is moved from a cold place to a warm
place. Leave the unpacked machine as it is for at least two hours before installing it.
(Dew condensation: When a metallic object is brought from a low-temperature place to a high-temperature place, water vapor
around it is cooled abruptly and consequently water drops stick to the surface of the metallic object.)
2. The maximum weight of the machine is approx. 78.8 kg (double-cassette model supplied with a DADF). Accordingly, two or
more persons are required to lift the machine. Be sure to with a DADF). Accordingly, two or more persons are required to lift
the machine. Be sure to keep the machine in a horizontal position when lifting it.
3. This product was designed considering the potential connection to the Norwegian IT power distribution system.
311
9. Installation
Option Installation Sequence

When installing the options for this machine, keep the following in mind:
1. When installing the Card Reader-F1, Document Tray-J1, and USB Application 3-Port Interface Kit-A1 together, be sure to
install the USB Application 3-Port Interface Kit-A1 first.
2. When installing the Inner Finisher-B1 and 2 Way Unit-B1 together, be sure to install the 2 Way Unit-B1 first.
3. When installing the Inner Finisher-B1 and Drum Heater-C1 together, be sure to install the Drum Heater-C1 first.
4. iR2530/2525/2520 with 250-sheet cassette 1
When installing the Inner Finisher-B1 and the Cassette Heater Unit-37 for cassette 1 together, be sure to install the Cassette
Heater Unit-37 first.
312
9. Installation
Unpacking
5. Press the cassette release button to draw out the

cassette forward.
Unpacking the Machine and

Removing the Packaging
Materials
6. Remove the wire that secures the intermediate plate

of the cassette.
<550 sheets cassette>
NOTE:
When installing a cassette pedestal, be sure to place the
machine on the cassette pedestal. (For the procedure for
installing the cassette pedestal, refer to the Cassette
Pedestal Installation Procedure.)
1. Unpack the machine and remove the vinyl cover.
2. While holding four handles on the left and right sides

of the machine, lift the machine to take it down from
the palette.
CAUTION:
The maximum weight of the machine is approx. 78.8
kg (double-cassette model with a DADF). Two or more
persons are required to lift the machine.
3. Remove all pieces of fixing tapes and cushioning

materials.
4. For the iR2545/2535 Series, remove two optical

system fixing screws on the right side of the reader.
(Keep the removed screws because they may be
used later for machine relocation.)
2x
313
9. Installation
Checking the Contents

>@Toner bottle x 1
(excluding the models
for EU,US, Latin America,
HK, SP, and India)
>@Drum unit x 1
>@Subtray x 1
[@Reverse tray x 1
(only for the model
with a 2 way unit)
>@Power cord x 1
>@Power cord clamp x 1

(Besides India model)
>@TP screw (M3 x 6) x 1

(Besides Australia model
and India model)
>@Cassette size label x 1

(for the model with
one 550-sheet cassette) or
x 2 (for the model with
two 550-sheet cassettes)
>@Cassette size plate

(for 250-sheet cassette) x 1
(only for the model
with 250-sheet cassette 1)
>@Cassette size label

(for 250-sheet cassette)x 1
(only for the model
with 250-sheet cassette 1)
>@Handle cover x 2
[12] Copy inhibition label

For the model for US x 3
For the model for EU x 4
For the model for Australia,
Latin America, HK, SP,
and India x 1
>@Lamp caution label x 1

(for iR2545/2535 for
Latin America, HK, SP,
and India)
>@Lamp caution label x 1

(for iR2545/2535 for EU)
>@Glass cleaning/lamp
caution label x 1
(for iR2545/2545i/2535/
2535i for US)
314
9. Installation
[@Glass cleaning/lamp
caution label x 1
(for Australia and EU
supplied with an ADF
<A type>)
>@Glass cleaning/lamp
caution label x 1
(for Australia and EU
supplied with an ADF
<AB/INCH type>)
>@Document size label

x1
(only for iR2530/2525/
2520 supplied with an ADF)
>@Finger pinch
caution label 1 x 1
(only for the model
for EU with an ADF)
>@Finger pinch
caution label 1:x 1
(only for the model
for US with an ADF)
>@Finger pinch
caution label 2 x 1
(only for the model
for EU with an ADF)
>@Finger pinch
caution label 2 x 1
(only for the model
for US with an ADF)
>@TP screw (M3 x 6) x 1

(only for Australia model)
[24]High temperature
caution label x 1
(only for the model
for CN and
with 250-sheet cassette 1
and 550-sheet cassette 2)
>@Connecting Fixture x 1
(only for the model
and 550-sheet cassette 2)*1
>@RS tightening screw

(M3x8.5) x 1
(only for the model
and 550-sheet cassette 2)*1
*1: The connecting fixture is used for the following case. For attaching the fixture, see the CST. Feeding Unit-AE1 installation
procedure.
When the CST. Feeding Unit-AE1 is installed to the host machine after removing the lower cassette (550-sheet cassette)
from the host model which is equipped with the 250-sheet cassette, cassette spacer and 550-sheet cassette.
<Others>
Including guides
315
9. Installation
Installation Procedure
4. Insert the toner bottle into the machine.
Installing the Toner Bottle

1. Open the toner supply cover.
5. Lower the lock lever to secure the toner bottle.

CAUTION:
Turn the lock lever until it becomes level. If the lock
lever is stopped in the middle, toner cannot be supplied
normally.
2. Raise the lock lever.
6. Close the toner supply cover.
Installing the Drum Unit

3. Unpack the new toner bottle, and then remove the

cap.
316
9. Installation
5. Turn the lever as shown below to release the drum

unit.
2. Press the button on the right cover to open the right

cover.
CAUTION:
To prevent the drum unit from being damaged, keep
the right cover open at least 5 cm during the installation
procedure.
1x
6. Remove the drum cover. (Keep the drum cover

because it may be used later for machine relocation.)
3. Turn the lock lever as shown below to release the

collected toner container. And then take out the
collected toner container.
7. Unpack the new drum unit, remove packaging

materials, and then pull two orange rings to remove
the protective cover
CAUTION:
Do not touch the drum surface while at work.
Do not expose the drum surface to light for a long
period of time.
4. Remove one screw from the developer pressure

lever. The screw does not exist in some machine
versions by destination.
317
9. Installation
12. Lower the lock lever to lock the collected toner

container.
8. While holding the drum unit at the handle and the

position shown below, insert it into the body slowly
until it stops.
CAUTION:
When inserting the drum unit, check that the drum unit
fits precisely with the rail of the host machine.
13. Close the front cover.
14. Close the right cover

9. Turn the lever as shown below to lock the drum unit.
Installing Trays
10. Secure the developer pressure lever with the screw.
1. Install the supplied subtray.
1x
11. Place the collected toner container in the machine.
318
9. Installation
4. While nipping the side guide lever, slide the side

guide to the position corresponding to the
prescribed paper size.
2. Install the supplied reverse tray.

Side Guide Plate
Trail Edge Guide Plate Lever
Side Guide Plate Lever
Trail Edge Guide Plate

Side Guide Plate
Trail Edge Guide Plate Lever
Setting the Cassettes

NOTE:
For the procedure for installing the cassette pedestal, refer
to the Cassette Pedestal Installation Procedure.

cassette forward.
2. Confirm the type of paper used by the customer.
3. While nipping the trailing edge guide lever, slide the

trailing edge guide to the position corresponding to
the prescribed paper size.
319
Side Guide Plate Lever
9. Installation
Installing Other Parts
5. Set the supplied paper size label.
Attaching Handle Covers
<500-sheet cassette:>
Set the supplied paper size label as shown below so that
the indication of the label can be the size of the paper
loaded in the cassette.
1. Attach the two supplied handle covers.
<250-sheet cassette>
Affix the cassette size label corresponding to the size of
the paper to be loaded in the cassette to the cassette
size plate. Insert the cassette size plate into the cassette
as shown.
Affixing the ADF Label (only for the

standard model with an ADF)
CAUTION:
For the double-cassette (standard) model, load paper
in the other 550-sheet cassette and push in the
cassette in the same manner as for the first cassette.
1. If the following labels are supplied, go through the

steps described below.
Document size label
Finger pinch caution label 1
Finger pinch caution label 2
2. Align the side guide (rear) with the A4/A3 mark.

A4/A3
A4
6. Load paper in the cassette, and then push in the

cassette.
7. When a cassette pedestal is used, set up the

cassettes with reference to the Cassette Pedestal
Installation Procedure.
320
9. Installation
3. Affix the document size label [A] of the suitable

paper size series to the feeder cover in such a
manner that the marks on the side guide (front) are
aligned with the corresponding marks on the
document size label when viewed by the user.
TR
3 A
/11
6. Affix the supplied finger pinch caution label 2 written

in an appropriate language.
x17
/A
A4
Affixing Labels to the Reader

4. Affix the supplied finger pinch caution label 1 written
in an appropriate language.
1. If the following labels are supplied, go through the
steps described below.
Copy inhibition label
Glass cleaning/lamp caution label
Lamp caution label
2. Open the platen cover or DADF.
3. Affix the copy inhibition label [A] (written in an

appropriate language) to the existing label.
5. Open the DADF.

[A]
321
9. Installation
4. Affix the glass cleaning/lamp caution label or lamp

caution label [B] written in an appropriate language
to the existing label. (The label written in English is
factory-affixed.)
2. Affix the High Temperature Caution Label to the

specified area. (area between screw holes on the
Base Plate)
CAUTION:
The High Temperature Caution Label uses a label
corresponding to the language.
[B]
Affixing a high temperature caution

label (only for CN and the model with
250-sheet cassette 1)
High temperature Caution label

cassette forward.
3. Install the removed Cassettes.
Connecting the Cord

CAUTION:
The specified power must be supplied from outlet.
(Rated voltage 10% at the rated current)
NOTE:
Install an optionally available document glass cover or the
DADF on the machine. If the model is the one without the
DADF, install a document cover glass. For how to install
the DADF, refer to the DADF Installation Procedure.
322
9. Installation
Initial Settings (Start Setup

Guide)
1. Insert the connector of the supplied Power cord into

the AC inlet.
The Start Setup Guide screen appears when the power is

turned ON for the first time after the machine is installed.
Follow the instructions displayed on the display to configure
the settings of the Host Machine.
1. Turn ON the main power switch.
2. Perform the following basic setup items according

to the instructions displayed on the display.
2. Install the supplied power cord clamp with the

supplied screw except for India model. Insert the left
leg of the power cord clamp into the machine frame.
Language and country / region

Mixing the toner
Date & Time settings
Fax settings
IP address settings
NOTE:
The fax settings appear only when the optional Fax Board
is attached.
NOTE:
Besides Australia model, use the TP screw (M3 x 6). For
Australia model, use the stepped screw.
Checking the Print Image

1. Place a document on the document glass, copy it by
feeding paper from the cassette or manual-feed tray,
and then check the resultant print image.
TP
(M3x6)
Check that no abnormal noise is heard.

Check the image quality at respective
magnifications.
Check that the document is copied normally on the
specified number of sheets.
Stepped Screw
(M3)
1x
3. Plug the supplied Power cord in the wall outlet.
4. Peel off the protective seal from the operation panel.
323
9. Installation
Setting the Cassette Heater (if

equipping with the cassette
heater)
1. Depending on the customers request, turn the
cassette heater ON according to the climate
condition.
324
9. Installation
Document Tray-J1
Points to Note before Installation
CAUTION:
When installing this equipment and USB Application 3-Port Interface Kit-A1 simultaneously, install the USB Application
3-Port Interface Kit-A1 first.

[1] Document Tray x 1
[2] Washer x 1
[4] Stepped Screw (M4x17.6) x 2
[3] Stepped Screw

(RS tightening; M4x18) x 2
[5] Stepped Screw (M4x10.8) x 2
* Not used with this procedure.
325
9. Installation
3. Hook the cut-off of the Document Tray (Reinforcing

Plate) to the stepped screws tightened in the step 2).
In case of iR 2545/2535 Series

1. Remove the 2 Face Seals.
Stepped Screw
Stepped Screw
Cut-off
In case of iR 2530/2525/2520 Series

1. Remove the 2 Face Seals.
2. Tighten the 2 stepped screws (M4X10.8) to the
Reader Right Cover.
Stepped Screw ; M4x10.8
2x
326
9. Installation
When installing with USB

Application 3-Port Interface Kit-A1
simultaneously
2. Tighten the 2 stepped screws (RS tightening;

M4X18) to the Reader Right Cover.
1. Tighten the 2 stepped screws (RS tightening;

M4X18) to the USB Application 3-Port Interface Kit.
Stepped Screw
RS tightening ; M4x18
2x
Stepped Screw
RS tightening ; M4x18
2x


Stepped Screw
Stepped Screw
Cut-off
Stepped Screw
Cut-off
327
9. Installation
*2 Use only for iR2545/2535.
*3 Use for iR2530/2525/2520 or use for the installation of the
Card Reader-F1 and the USB.
*4 The 2 Harness covers are not used in this host machine.
Card Reader-F1
<Card Reader-F1>
[1]
[2]
Check Items when turning OFF the

Main Power
[3]
Check that the main power switch is OFF.

1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.
2. Be sure that control panel display and main power lamp
are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power
plug.
[1]Card readerx1
[2]Screw (RS Tightening; M4x10) x1 *1
[3]Toothed washerx1*1
*1 Not used in this host machine.
a. When Installing the card reader in
a simple substance
<Card reader attachment-D3>

[1]
[2]
[3]
3 Screws
2 Claws
3x
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[4]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[1]Card reader mountx1

[2]Card reader cover x1
[3]Harness cover (base + lid) )x3*4
[4]Relay harness Bx1
[5]Edge saddlex1
[6]Screw(TP ; M4X16) x2*3
[7]Screw( Binding ; M4X6) x4
[8]Cord retainerx1*1
[9]Reuse bandx1*1
[10]Relay harness Cx1
[11]Wire Saddlex1
[12]Screw(TP ; M4X6) x2*2
*1 Not used in this host machine.
328
9. Installation
4. Remove the Card Reader Fixation Plate [1] from the

Card Reader Unit.

2 Screws
2 Claws
1 Screw [2] (The removed screw will be used in step

6.)
[2]
2x
1x
[1]
3. Remove the Card Reader Lower Cover [1] from the

Card Reader Unit.
1 Screw [2]
5. Free the Grounding Wire [1] from the Card Reader

Unit. (The removed screw and toothed washer will
be used in step 7.)
1 Screw [2]
1 Toothed Washer [3]
[2]
1x
1x
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
329
9. Installation
8. Pass the Card Reader Harness [1] through the Edge

Saddle [2].
6. Install the Card Reader Lower Mounting Plate [1] on

the Card Reader Unit.
1 Screw [2] (Use the screw removed in step 4.)
1 Edge Saddle [3]
[1]
1x
[2]
1x
[3]
[1]
7. Install the Grounding Wire [1] on the Card Reader

Unit.
1 Screw [2] (Use the screw removed in step 5.)
1 Toothed Washer [3] (Use the toothed washer
removed in step 5.)
1x
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
330
[2]
9. Installation
9. Remove the two face seals from the reader left cover.
10. Attach the card reader to the reader.

If iR2545/2535 series : Screw (TP ; M4X6)x2
If iR2535/2530/2525 series : Screw (TP ; M4X16)
x2
TP ; M4x6 (iR2545/2535)
TP ; M4x16 (iR2530/2525/2520)
2x
iR2545/2535
11. Slide the card reader cover to attach it to the card

reader mount.
iR2530/2525/2520
CAUTION:
Route the card reader harness as shown below.
331
9. Installation
15. Attach the 2 Wire Saddle at the position shown in the

figure.
12. Secure the card reader cover.

1 Screw (Binding ; M4x6)
%LQGLQJ0[
1x
13. Remove the cover of Harness cover and then

remove the release paper.
16. Connect the relay harness B to the card reader

harness, and then connect the connector of the relay
harness B to the relay harness C so that the
connector without the protective tube of the relay
harness B can be connected.
1x
14. Affix the Harness Cover (bases) at the right rear of

the machine with it aligned with the bottom line of
the reader as the figure below.
332
9. Installation
19. Using the harness cover (lids), secure the relay

harness B to the harness covers (bases).
17. Connect the connector of the relay harness C to the

connector J8119 on the main controller PCB.
1x
20. Using a side cutters, remove the precut portion of

the rear cover (left) as shown below.
CAUTION:
When cutting off the part, be sure not to make burrs.
18. Secure the relay harness C to the 8 Wire Saddles

from the reader side, and route the relay harness C
shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Put the core between Wire Saddles shown in the
Figure.
21. Attach the rear cover(left). (2 Screws)

:LUH6DGGOH
8x
Core
333
9. Installation
22. Attach the rear cover(left). (3 Screws)
4. Attach the card reader.

2 Screws ( TP ; M4x16 )
CAUTION:
Put the relay harness through the cut portion of the rear
cover(right).
730[
2x
b. When Installing the Card Reader

and the USB Application 3-Port
Interface Kit-A1 at the same time.
5. Perform steps 11) to 12) of " a. When installing the

card reader in a simple substance ".
6. Route the cable to the USB cable guide.

1. Install the USB Application 3-Port Interface Kit-A1.
2. Remove the harness cover of the USB Application 3Port Interface Kit-A1.
2 Claws
&ODZ
&ODZ
7. Perform steps 15) to 18) and steps 20) to 22) of " a.

When installing the card reader in a simple
substance ".
3. Perform steps 1) to 9) of "a. When installing the card

reader in a simple substance ".
8. Attach the cable cover of USB Application 3-Port

Interface Kit-A1.
Registering the Card IDs

After installing the Card Reader, register the card numbers
to be used in the service mode of the host machine.
If they are not registered, cards will not be recognized when
inserted.
334
9. Installation
1)Plug the power cord into the outlet.
2)Turn on the main power switch.
3)Enter the Service Mode.
4)Get in Service Mode (# ACC> CARD) and enter the card
number to use (1 to 2000).
Enter the smallest card number of the cards used by the user.
From the entered number, up to 1000 cards can be used.
5)Turn main power switch off and on again.
6)Press Additional Functions to enter user mode.
7)Select System Settings > Department ID Management >
ON, and perform various settings.
8) Insert the card with registered valid number to check it's at
standby state.
335
9. Installation
Serial Interface Kit-J2
NOTE:
Keep the removed fixing materials as they are used to
transport for relocation.

Check Items When Turning OFF the
Main Power
1. Remove the Power Supply Retainer and Power plug.

1 Screw

2. Be sure that the control panel display and the main
power lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect
the power plug.
1x

[1] RS Conversion
PCB x 1
[2] RS232C Support

Plate x 1
2. Remove the Rear Cover (right).

[3] CV-Serial Relay
Cable x 1
3 Screws
2 Claws
[4] NCU-MJB Cable

(CV accessory) x 1
3x
[5] TP Screws (M3X6) x 6
Claws
* NCU-MJB Cable (CV accessory) is not used with this

equipment.
CAUTION:
Check that the main power switch is OFF and the
power plug is disconnected from the outlet.
336
9. Installation
5. Remove the Controller Cover.
3. Remove the Left Rear Cover, and cut off the part of
the Left Rear Cover indicated in the figure below with
side cutters.
3 Screws
4 Screws
3x
CAUTION:
When cutting off with side cutters, be sure to cut it off
fully.
4x
6. Insert the CV-Serial Relay Cable included in the

package to the 2 connectors on the PCB of the host
machine.
2x
4. Install the RS Conversion PCB on the RS232C

Support Plate.
4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
TP ; M3X6
4x
337
9. Installation
7. Connect the RS Conversion PCB and the CV-Serial

Relay Cable, and install the RS232C Support Plate
by aligning the 2 Protrusions on the plate with the
holes on the host machine.
10. Install the Rear Cover (Right).
11. Install the Power Plug.
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)

2 Protrusions
2 Holes
12. Install the Power Supply Retainer.

TP ; M3X6
Protrusion
2x
Hole
1x
Hole
Protrusion
8. Be sure to put the harness [A] between the RS

Conversion PCB and the plate [B] with the tie-wrap
[C] of it on the front side.
[A]
[A]
[B]
[B]
[B]
[C]
[C]
9. Install the Controller Cover.
338
9. Installation
Copy Control Interface CableA1

3 Screws
2 Claws

3x

Main Power
the power plug.
Claws

[1] Control card cable x1
2. Remove the left rear face cover.

1 Screw
1x
CAUTION:
NOTE:

3 Screws
3x
339
9. Installation
6. Cut the cable ties, and then remove the core of the
control card cable.
4. Remove the controller cover.

3 Screws
3x
5. To remove the core, cut the cable holder at the

position shown below using the side cutters.
7. Connect the connector of the control card cable to

the connector on the image processor PCB as
shown in the figure.
1x
340
9. Installation
8. Route the harness as shown in the figure.
11. Pass the control card cable through the hole made
in the step 9, and then install the left rear cover.
1 Clamp
1x
12. Install the removed cover.
9. Cut the face cover from the left rear cover using the
side cutters.
Left rear face cover

Rear cover (right)
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove the remaining edges with care not
to damage the harness.
10. Install the controller cover.
341
9. Installation
System Upgrade RAM-C1

3 Screws
2 Claws

Main Power
3x

the power plug.
Claws
[1] 512MB RAM x1
2. Remove the controller cover.

3 Screws
3x
CAUTION:
NOTE:
342
9. Installation
3. Push the SW3 on the controller PCB and confirm

LED10 has gone OFF (This action is to cut the
secondary power OFF).
4. Release the 2 hooks to detach the 256MB RAM.
343
9. Installation
5. Insert the system upgrade RAM in the slot where the

256MB RAM has been detached.
9. Checking the Connection.
NOTE:
Be sure the upgrade memory has firmly been inserted and
the hooks are in the hole of the memory as shown in the
figure.
10. Enter the service mode.
11. Use left or right cursor [< / >] key and press [OK]
when [REPORT] has appeared.
when [REPORT OUTPUT] has appeared.
when [SPEC LIST] has appeared.
14. SPEC REPORT is printed out. Confirm TOTAL

MEMORY is [512MB] on the report.
6. Install the controller cover.

3 Screws (TP; M3x6)
7. Install the rear cover (right).

3 Screws (RS tightening; M3x8)
8. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the

power outlet and turn its main power switch ON.
344
9. Installation
Cst Heater Kit-J1

3 Screws
2 Claws
Checking Before Installation

Check Items when Turning OFF the
Main Power
3x

2. Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power
Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the
power plug from the outlet.
Claws

Make sure that none of the following parts are missing.
[1] Heater PCB x1
[2] Heater SW Harness x1
2. Cut off the face cover of the rear cover (right) by a

side cutters as shown in the figure.
[3] Heater AC Harness x1
[4] Heater DC Harness x1
[5] High Temperature

Caution Label x1 *1
[6] Cassette Heater Sheet

x1 *1
[7] Screw
(RS Tightening; M3x8) x1
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove the face cover properly so that no
burr is formed.
*1: These items are used only when install the cassette
heater to the 250 sheets cassette. Also, save these even
when the cassette heater is not installed.
CAUTION:
345
9. Installation
1 Screw
1 Screw
1x
1x
6. Remove the rear lower cover.
1 Screw
1 Claw
3 Screws
3x
1x
Claw
346
9. Installation
8. Remove the screw of the left cover, and then distort

it to remove the inside base cover.
9. Remove the left cover.

1. Except for Europe model
1 Screw
1 Screw
2 Bosses
2 Hooks
2 Protrusions
CAUTION:
There is the link rod behind the left cover, which is
engaged to the switch on the power supply unit. So
carefully remove the left cover not to give an excessive
load on the link rod.
1x
Link rod
1x
NOTE:
When reinstalling the left cover, surely insert the link rod
in the switch on the power supply unit so that the switch
can link to the main power switch of the host machine.
347
9. Installation
2. Only for Europe model
2 Screws
11. Put the longer harness of the Heater SW Harness out

of two through the hole of the rear frame.
2x
10. Install the Heater SW Harness firmly in the power

cord bracket.
12. Connect the connector of the longer harness of the

Heater SW Harness to J108 of the power supply unit.
1 Connector
1x
NOTE:
Install the Heater SW harness in the correct direction
referring to the figure in the power cord bracket.
348
9. Installation
15. Unlock the wire saddles and stretch the folded

harness as shown in the figure. Then connect the
connector to the Heater PCB.
13. Install the Heater PCB.

1 Screw (RS Tightening; M3x8)
2 Wire saddles
1 Connector
RS Tightening; M3x8
2x
1x
1x
14. Connect the connector of the shorter harness of the

Heater SW Harness to the Heater PCB.
1 Connector
1x
349
9. Installation
16. Connect the connector of the Heater DC Harness,

which is closer to the protective tube of the harness
to J1102 of the Heater PCB. Clamp the 3 harnesses
as shown in the figure.
17. Clamp the Heater DC Harness in the 4 wire saddles,

and then connect the connector of the Heater DC
harness to J113B on the power supply unit.
4 Wire saddles
1 Connector
1 Connector
1 Edge Saddle
2 Wire saddles
CAUTION:
Scatter the slack of the harness and confirm that the
harness do not touch the part of the primary circuit.
CAUTION:
Scatter the slack of the harness and confirm that the
harness do not touch the part of the primary circuit.
1x
3x
4x
350
1x
9. Installation
18. Install the Heater AC Harness as shown in the figure.

Attach the connector of the longest branch of the
Heater AC Harness to the cassette junction bracket
and connect the shortest branch of the Heater AC
Harness to J1106 of the Heater PCB.
19. In case the Cassette Heater is not installed,

disconnect the connector of the Heater AC Harness
from the Heater PCB and clamp it as shown in the
figure.
1 Wire saddle
1 Connectors
3 Wire saddles
1x
3x
1x
20. Install each heater.

NOTE:
After installing each heater, attach the followings;
Left cover (1 Screw) (Except for Europe model)
Left cover (2 Screws) (Only for Europe model)
Inside base cover (1 Screw (Attach it to the left cover.))
Rear lower cover (1 Screw)
Connector cover (1 Screw)
Left rear cover (3 Screws)
Left rear face cover (1 Screw)
Rear cover (right) (3 Screws)
Checking after Installation

Disposal Parts Check
1. Following disposal parts are remained after
installation procedure.
[1] Removed face cover 1pc.
351
9. Installation
Reader Heater Unit
Checking the Parts to be

Installed (For 120V)
Each parts of the Reader Heater Unit are provided as service

parts, order as necessary to prepare the parts below.

Main Power
No.

the power plug.
Points to Note on Installation

The Heater Kit must be installed before installing the Reader
Heater Unit.
Parts name
Parts Number.
Q'ty
Reader Heater
(120V)
FK2-9468
2 pcs.
Heater harness
FM4-2929
1 pc.
Wire saddle (small)
WT2-0507
3 pcs.
Screw (Binding;
M4x6) *1
XB2-8400-609
2 pcs.
Wire saddle (large)
WT2-5719
3 pcs.
*1; Only for use in iR2545/2535 series model.
Checking the Contents (For

230V)
CAUTION:
Reader Heater Unit-H1

[1] Reader Heater x2
Installation of Heater Harness
[2] Heater Harness x1

3 Screws
2 Claws
[3] Wire Saddle (middle)
x4
[4] Wire Saddle (small)

x3 *1
3x
[5] Screw x2
[6] Heater Harness B x1
Claws
[7] Wire Saddle (large) x3
*1: Only for use in iR2545/2535 series model.
352
9. Installation
2 Screws
2 Claws
3 Screws
3x
2x
Claws
1 Screw
1 Screw
1x
1x
353
9. Installation
6. Remove the rear lower cover.
8. Connect the connector of the Heater Harness to

J1105 of the Heater PCB.
1 Screw
1 Claw
1 Connector
1x
J1105
Claw
1x
7. Install the 3 Wire Saddle (large) in the frame at rear
left side.
354
9. Installation
9. Put 2 connectors through each hole as shown in the

figure.
10. Clamp the harness as shown in the figure.

9 Wire saddles
CAUTION:
Pay attention not to give damages on the flexible cable.
9x
Removing the Parts from Reader

1. Open the ADF (or platen cover).
355
9. Installation
3. Install the Reader Heater (left side).
2. Remove the glass retainer (right), and then remove

the platen glass.
1 Connector
1 Screw
2 Screws
2x
Binding; M4x6
1x
1x
Installation of Reader Heater (For

iR2530/2525/2520 series)
1. Move the drive belt in the arrow direction to shift the
CIS unit to the center.
4. Install the Reader Heater (right side).

1 Connector
1 Screw
2. Turn up the sheet.
Binding; M4x6
1x
1x
5. Attach the following removed parts.

Platen glass
Glass retainer (right) (2 Screws)
Left face cover (1 Screw)
Rear cover (left) (2 Screws)
356
9. Installation

outlet.
3. Install the 1 Wire Saddle (small), and then install the

Reader Heater (right side).
1 Connector
1 Screw
1 Wire saddle
8. Turn ON the heater switch.

Binding; M4x6
Installation of Reader Heater (For

iR2545/2535 series)
1x
1. Move the drive belt in the arrow direction to shift the

CCD unit to the center.
1x
1x

Platen glass
Glass retainer (right) (2 Screws)
Left face cover (1 Screw)
2. Install the 2 Wire Saddles (small), and then install the

Reader Heater (left side).
1 Connector
1 Screw
2 Wire saddles

outlet.
Binding; M4x6
1x
1x
2x
357
9. Installation

[1] Wire saddle (middle) 4pcs. (For Reader Heater
Unit-H1)
[2] Heater harness B 1pc. (For Reader Heater UnitH1)
358
9. Installation
Cassette Heater Unit-37
CAUTION:

Check Items when Turning OFF the
Main Power
In case of Upper Cassette for 550

Sheets Cassette


The Heater Kit must be installed before installing the

Cassette Heater Unit.
1 Screw
3 Connectors

1x

[1] Cassette Heater
Unit x 1
[2] Heater Connector

Cover x 1 *1
[3] Wire Saddle x 1 *1
[4] Screw ( Sems

Round End; M3X6) x 1
[5] Screw (P Tightening;

M3x8) x 1 *1
3x
*1: These items are not used for CST. Feeding Unit.
NOTE:
When installing the cassette heater to the 250 sheets
cassette, prepare the Cassette Heater Sheet and High
Temperature Caution Label included to Cst Heater Kit-J1.
359
9. Installation
5. Remove the Heater PCB.
1 Screw
1 Claw
4 Connectors
1 Screw
1 Claw
1x
Claw
4x

3 Screws
2 Claws
3x
Hole
Claw
Claws
Screw
1x
360
9. Installation
8. If a screw has been fixed to the bottom of the

Cassette Base, remove the screw. (The removed
screw will not be used.)
6. Install the Wire Saddle to Heater Connector Cover.
1x
7. Install the Heater Connector Cover to the connector

of Cassette Heater Unit.
1 Wire saddle
1 Screw (P Tightening; M3x8)
9. Install the Cassette Heater Unit by fitting the 3 hooks

to the holes of base plate. At that time, put the
connector through the square hole.
Cassette Heater Unit
P Tightening; M3x8
Base plate
361
9. Installation

outlet.
10. Attach the screw with the stubby driver.

1 Screw (W sems round end; M3x6)

W sems round end; M3x6
1x
In case of 250 Sheets Cassette


2 Screws
4 Connectors
2x
11. Connect the connector of Cassette Heater Unit to the

Heater AC Harness.
1 Connector
1x
4x
1 Claw
1 Screw
4 Connectors

Connector cover (3 Connectors, 1 Screw)
14. Attach the cassette.
362
9. Installation
5. Remove the Heater PCB.
4 Connectors
1 Screw
1 Claw
1 Screw
1 Claw
1x
Claw
4x

3 Screws
2 Claws
3x
Hole
Claw
Claws
Screw
1x
363
9. Installation
11. Remove the delivery tray.
6. Open the Front cover.
1 Screw
4 Bosses
1 Hook
7. Open the Toner supply cover.
Boss
1x
8. Open the Right cover.
9. Remove the support cover.

2 Screws
2x
Boss
Hook
1 Screw
2 Bosses
2 Hooks
2 Protrusions
Boss
1x
Hook
Protrusion
364
9. Installation
13. Affix the Cassette Heater Sheet (supplied with the

Heater Kit-J1) on the cassette heater, and then install
the CST Heater Connector Cover to the connector of
Cassette Heater Unit.

Cassette Base, put a long screwdriver through the
hole on the plate and remove the screw. (The
removed screw will not be used.)
1 Wire saddle
P tightening; M3x8
1x
Cassette Heater Sheet

Base plate
365
9. Installation
18. Affix the High Temperature Caution Label (supplied

with the CST Heater Kit-J1) in the appropriate
language to the specified area. (area between screw
holes on the Base Plate)
16. Attach the screw with a long screwdriver by putting

it through a hole on the plate.
High Temperature Caution Label

1 Claw
1 Screw
4 Connectors
1x

Connector cover (4 Connectors, 1 Screw)
Delivery tray (1 Screw)
Inside base cover (1 Screw (Attach it to the left
cover.))
Support cover (2 Screws)

Heater AC Harness.
21. Close all the covers.
1 Connector
1x
outlet.
In case of Cassette Module or Lower

Cassette for 550 Sheets Cassette
366
9. Installation
2. Remove the connector cover and then disconnect

the connector.
4. If the heater plate has been installed at rear side of

the Cassette Module, remove it. (The removed heater
connector plate will not be used.)
2 Screws
4 Connectors
NOTE:
When performing this procedure, it is not necessary to
remove the Host Machine. However, the following figure
shows the condition without the Host Machine to show
clearly.
2x
1 Screw
1x
4x
3. Remove the lower rear cover of the Cassette Module.

3 Screws
3x
367
9. Installation

6. Install the Heater Connector Cover to the connector

of Cassette Heater Unit.
1 Wire saddle
P Tightening; M3x8
Base plate

Cassette Base, remove the screw. (The removed
screw will not be used.)
9. Attach the screw with the stubby driver.

1x
1x
368
9. Installation
12. Put the cable of the heater through a hole of the

plate.

cable of the heater.
NOTE:
clearly.
1 Connector
1 Wire saddle
1x
1x
13. Install the lower rear cover of the Cassette Module.
14. Connect the connector on the heater to the host

machine.
1 Connector
1x
11. Unlock the wire saddles to free the harness.

2 Wire saddles
2x
15. Install the Connector Cover.

4 Connectors
1 Screw

outlet.
369
9. Installation
In case of CST. Feeding Unit

3. Fit the claws on the Cassette Heater Unit into the
holes on the Base Plate, and then move it toward the
front.
1. Draw out the 2 cassettes.
3 Claws
2. Remove the Heater Connector Cover using a flat
head screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the claws are fit into the holes of the Base
Plate properly.
NOTE:
clearly.
1 Claw
2 Protrusions
Claw
Protrusions
Base Plate
Heater Connector Cover

Base Plate
370
9. Installation
4. Attach the screw with the stubby driver, and then

connect the connector of Cassette Heater Unit to the
Connector of CST. Feeding Unit.

In case of Upper Cassette for 550 Sheets Cassette
or 250 Sheets Cassette
[1] Screw 1pc. (When removing the screw from
the Cassette Base.)
In case of Cassette Module or Upper Cassette for
550 Sheets
[1] Screw 1pc. (When removing the screw from
the Cassette Base.)
[2] Heater connector plate
In case of CST. Feeding Unit
[1] Heater Connector Cover
1x
Connector
1x
[2] Wire Saddle
5. Attach the Heater Connector Cover
6. Attach the 2 cassettes.

outlet.
371
9. Installation
Drum Heater-C1

Main Power

2. Push the button to open the right cover.
The Heater Kit must be installed before installing the Drum

Heater.
CAUTION:
To avoid any damage on the drum unit, keep the right
cover opening by 5 cm or more during installation.

[1] Drum Heater Unit x1
[2] Wire Saddle x 2
[3] Edge Saddle x 1
[4] Relay Cable x 1
3. Turn the lock lever as shown in the figure and

remove the waste toner container.
CAUTION:
4. Remove 1 screw from the developing pressure lever.

(The screw does not exist in some machine versions
by destination.)
1 Screw
372
9. Installation
5. Turn the developing pressure lever as shown in the

figure to release the developing unit.
8. Remove the toner replenish cover.

2 Screws
1 Claw
1x
Claw
2x
6. Slowly draw out the drum unit by half as shown in

the figure while gripping the lever beneath the drum
unit handle.
9. Draw the developing unit out.

1 Connector
1x
7. Hold the drum unit as shown in the figure. Pull up
the unit a little and draw it out completely.
373
9. Installation
10. Remove the developing stay. (Removed developing

stay is no longer used.)

1 Screw
1 Wire saddle
2 Screws
1x
1x
2x
13. Disconnect all the connectors at the place shown in

the figure. (This is performed only when the optional
cassette unit is installed.)
Connectors (All)

3 Screws
2 Claws
3x
Claws
374
9. Installation
17. Remove the Left rear face cover.
1 Screw
1 Claw
1 Screw
1x
1x
Claw
15. Draw out the cassette(s).

3 Screws
16. Remove the left cover (lower).

1. For 550sheets cassette
2 Screws
3x
2x
2. For 250sheets cassette

3 Screws
1 Claw
3x
Claw
375
9. Installation
20. Remove the left cover.

1. Except for Europe model
1 Screw
1 Screw
2 Bosses
2 Hooks
2 Protrusions
CAUTION:
There is the link rod behind the left cover, which is
engaged to the switch on the power supply unit. So
carefully remove the left cover not to give an excessive
load on the link rod.
1x
Link rod
1x
NOTE:
When reinstalling the left cover, surely insert the link rod
in the switch on the power supply unit so that the switch
can link to the main power switch of the host machine.
376
9. Installation
2. Only for Europe model
2 Screws
22. Install 2 Wire Saddles and 1 Edge Saddle on the rear

frame.
2x
21. Disconnect all the connectors on the power supply

unit and then remove power supply unit.
Connectors (All)
3 Screws
3x
NOTE:
In case of the Europe model, the following procedure is
necessary.
1 Connector
2 Wire saddles
1x
2x
377
9. Installation
24. Fix the harness on the harness guide of the drum

heater unit as shown in the figure.
23. Install the drum heater unit in the host machine.

2 Protrusions
2 Screws
1 Wire saddle
CAUTION:
Do not damage the pre-transfer guide when installing
the drum heater unit.
1x
25. Fix the drum heater harness.

2 Wire saddles
1 Edge saddle
NOTE:
Insert the positioning pins of the drum heater unit to the
holes of rear frame.
3x
26. Connect the connector of the drum heater harness

to J1104 on the Heater PCB.
1 Connector
2x
1x
378
9. Installation
30. Turn the developing pressure lever to set the

developing unit.

Power supply unit (2 Screws, Connectors (ALL))
Left cover (1 Screw) (Except for Europe model)
Left cover (2 Screws) (Only for Europe model)
Inside base cover (1 Screw (Attach it to the left
cover.))
Left rear face cover (1 Screw)
Left cover (lower) (2 Screws) (For 550 sheets cassette
model)
Left cover (lower) (3 Screws) (For 250 sheets cassette
model)
Toner replenish cover (2 Screws)
31. The screw is not necessary if it is not removed at the

step 4.
1x
28. Insert the developing unit.

1 Connector
32. Attach the waste toner container.
1x
29. Hold the drum unit handle and the part shown in the
figure. Slowly insert it until it stops.
33. Turn the lock lever to fix the container.
CAUTION:
Confirm that the drum unit engages to the rail of the
host machine.
34. Close all the covers.

outlet.
379
9. Installation

1. Following disposal part is remained after installation
procedure.
[1] Relay Cable 1pc.
380
APPENDICES
Service Tools.................................... 382
General Circuit Diagram....................383
Service Tools
Service Tools
Special Tools
Tool name
Tool No.
Digital multimeter
FY9-2002
Rank (*)
Shape
For making electrical checks.
Uses
Tester extension pin
FY9-3038
As an addition when making an electrical check.
Tester extension pin

(L-shipped)
FY9-3039
As an addition when making an electrical check.
NA-3 Test Chart
FY9-9196
For checking and adjusting images.
Mirror cleaning tool
FL2-9842
--
Used for cleaning the mirror in the CCD unit.

This part is installed in the reader unit.
(Not a service tool)
*
A: each service engineer is expected to carry one.
B: each group of 5 service engineers is expected to carry one.
C: each workshop is expected to carry one.
Oils and Solvents

Name
Uses
Composition
Remarks
Alcohol
cleaning;
e.g.,
glass, plastic, rubber;
external covers
fluoride-family
hydrocarbon
alcohol
surface activating agent water
Do not bring near fire.

Procure locally.
IPA (isopropyl alcohol) may be
substituted.
Lubricant
scanner rail
stream reading glass
silicone oil
KF96SS (300CS)
FY9-6011 (50 cc)
382
General Circuit Diagram

10
P_GND
9 10 11 12 13 14
Control Panel CPU PCB (1/2)

1
9 10
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
J0003
4
QVGA_UD3
QVGA_UD2
QVGA_UD1
QVGA_UD0
QVGA_XCLK*
GND
+5R
GND
+5R
GND
+3.3R
RESET_UI*
GND
+3.3V
Counter
ROM
PCB
Soft-ID
PCB
GND
SPD_DAT
SPD_CLK
FRAM_WP
8
7
6
5
GND
+3.3V
LASER_DETECT*
GND
DDI_PPRTST*
ECO_CS
L_GND
ECO_SCK
DDI_RXD
GND
DDI_TXD
ECO_DIN
DDI_RTS*
ECO_DOUT
Main Controller PCB (1/3)

J8115
DDI_CTS*
GND
L_GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
J0001
DDI_PPRDY*
J9903
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
DDI_CPRDY*
DDI_POWER*
DDI_RESET*
L_GND
IMG_SYS_RST*
DDI_DOWNLOAD*
J8114
DDI_PI0
QVGA_LATCHP
BKLTON
+3.3V
UI_SOFTSW*
BD
+3.3V
GND
QVGA_STARTP
+5V
QVGA_LCDEN
GND
UI_RXD
PWM
GND
CTRL0_0
J8142
UI_TXD
CTRL0_1
13 12 11 10
9 10 11 12 13 14
GND
CTRL0_2
GND
CTRL1_0
CTRL1_1
GND
CTRL1_2
DATA_B+
DATA_D-
DATA_B-
DETECT
GND
DATA_D+
DATA_C-
GND
DATA_C+
DATA_A+
GND
DATA_A-
DETECT
HAND_SET*
J8125
3
GND
GND
ESS1
+3.3V
GND
GND
+5VC
+5R
L-GND
P-GND
+24R
P-GND
+24U_LOCK
+24VR
+5VR
11 10
+5VR
L_GND
GND
POLYGON_M_BD*
J8112
DDI_LIVEWAKE*
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
J8116
L_GND
IMG1L_RXD
IMG1L_TXD
L_GND
J201
IMG1L_IMAGE_END*
J230(Only the Europe Model)
DDI_ITOP_OUT*
L_GND
DC Controller
PCB (1/4)
J2
J602
2
J8143
J210
J208
J601
POLYGON_M_DEC*
+24R
POLYGON_M_ACC*
POLYGON_M_FG*
Laser Scanner Unit
J1
5
J103
J507
11 10
Front Door Switch

SW2
J104
+24VR
J107
1
J108
2
1
2
3
SW4
Environment Switch
1
2
3
J12
10
J2000
L1
FT112
FT114
L2
Heater PCB
(1/2)
SOLD6
SOLD4
FT111
FT113
SOLD7
SOLD5
Main Power Switch

SW11(Only the Europe Model)
J1101
1
3
4
J105
GND
GND
Power Supply
PCB (1/3)
+24V
J106
+24V
Reader Relay
PCB (1/2)
P.1
383

8
7
Power Supply
Cooling Fan
FAN6
Fixing Motor
M2
Main Motor
M1
HVT PCB
+24U_LOCK
+24U_LOCK
M
5
J301
DIS_DC_ON
L-GND
+3.3R
P-GND
P-GND
+24VU_LOCK
+24VU_LOCK
9 10 11 12 13
CHRG_DC_ON
J203
DEV_AC_ON*
CHRG_AC_DRV
CHRG_I_SNS
L-GND
HVT_ENB
ENV_HEATER_PRINT*
TR_CC_CTRL
PSU_FAN_LOCK*
J205
TR_CHG
PSU_FAN_ON
P-GND
DEV_DC_CTRL
P_POWER_ESS2
CHRG_AC_CTRL
HEATER2_ON*
CHRG_DC_CTRL
RELAY_DRIVE*
HEATER1_ON*
DEV_AC_DRV*
ZERO_CROSS
4
J1103
FIX_N_DRV
DOOR_MSW
3
FIX_CTRL
PSU_DETECT2*
2
DIS_CTRL
PSU_DETECT1*
1
TR_P_DRV*
DC_CLK
N.C.
GND
MAIN_M_FG*
MAIN_M_DEC*
FIX_M_DEC*
FIX_M_ACC*
GND
+24U_LOCK
J202
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
to Heater PCB
J2003
J2002
TR_N_DC_ON
J2001
DEV_DC_ON
1 2 3
J101
GND
Power Supply
PCB (2/3)
MAIN_M_ACC*
FIX_M_FG*
10
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
J204
DC Controller PCB (2/4)

D
J206
J207
5
+5R
LOOP_SNS
L_GND
L_GND
+5R
L_GND
DUPLEX_SNS
+5R
+5R
L-GND
+5R
TONER_COVER_SNS
MP_WIDE_SNS
+5R
L_GND
L-GND
+24R
WASTE_TONER_FULL_SNS
MP_PAPER_SNS
DEVELOP_LEVEL_SNS
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
FAN_F_ON
MP_SL_ON
P-GND
FAN_R_ON
FAN_F_LOCK*
FAN_R_LOCK*
P-GND
FREE
+24R
BOTTLE_M_ON
P-GND
BOTTLE_M_LOCK*
HOPPER_LEVEL_SNS
+24R
L-GND
HOPPER_M_ON
P-GND
HOPPER_M_LOCK*
N.C.
L-GND
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
J2501
9
1
1
3
2
3
7
2
8
1
9
J2502
J2506
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
J2561
J2590
J2016
4
1
TS2
Sub Hopper
Toner Sensor
9
J2014
4
1
J2012
S17
Waste Toner
Full Sensor
J2015
M7
Hopper Motor
10
J2011
J2010
S16
Toner Cover
Open/Closed
Sensor
FAN3
Exhaust Fan
(Rear)
J2013
Developing Unit
Toner Sensor
7
J2009
J2008
TS1
3 2 1
M6
Bottle Motor
384
3 2 1
FAN4
Exhaust Fan
(Front)
SL
J2007
S9
Manual Feeder
Paper Sensor
J2006
J2005
S7
Duplex Feed
Sensor
J2004
S6
Loop Sensor
S8
Manual Feeder
Paper Size Sensor
SL2
Manual Feed
Pickup Solenoid
P.1

10
Cassette Size
Cassette Size
Detection Switch 2 Detection Switch 1
F
Front Cover
Open/Closed
Sensor
S18
Environment Sensor
HU1
SW7
4
J2034
J2021
J2022
J2023
Pickup Solenoid
SL1
SL
1
2
5
3
4
4
3
J2025
J2026
CL
J2024
1
Developing
Cylinder
Clutch
CL3
Registration
Clutch
CL1
2
1
Cassette 1
Pickup Motor
M3
1
J2020
3
Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Cassette 1

Paper
Paper Level Paper Level
Sensor A
Sensor
Sensor B
S2
S4
S3
Cassette 1
Pickup
Sensor
S1
Pre-Registration
Sensor
S5
SW6
J2019
5
Manual Feed
Pickup Clutch
CL2
CL
CL
F
Duplex Feed
Motor
M4
J2017
1
J2027
J2028
J2029
N.C.
N.C.
DUPLEX_M_A
DUPLEX_M_B*
DUPLEX_M_A*
MULTI_CL_ON
DUPLEX_M_B
SLEEVE_CL_ON
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
J211
+24R
J2533
REGIST_CL_ON
L-GND
+5R
CST_FEED_SNS
L-GND
+5R
+24R
+24R
PAPER_LEVEL_B_SNS
FEED_M_B
L-GND
FEED_M_B*
+5R
FEED_M_A
FEED_M_A*
9 10 11 12 13 14
+24R
PAPER_LEVEL_A_SNS
CST_FEED_SL_ON
14 13 12 11 10
L-GND
+5R
CST_PAPER_SNS
9 10
REGIST_SNS
C_SIZE_W1
L-GND
+5R
L-GND
L-GND
DOOR_SNS
C_SIZE_W2
+5R
C_SIZE_W3
L-GND
C_SIZE_L1
+3.3R
1
10
C_SIZE_W4
ENV_SNS_DATA
L-GND
L-GND
J209
C_SIZE_L2
ENV_SNS_DETECT*
ENV_SNS_CLK
J2532
C_SIZE_L3
C_SIZE_L4
J2545
J2030
J2018
9 10 11 12
J212

J299
8
J215
13 12 11 10
J213
10
EXIT1_M_A*
EXIT1_M_A
EXIT1_M_B*
EXIT1_M_B
+5R
L-GND
EXIT1_FULL_SNS
+5R
L-GND
EXIT1_SNS
EDGE_FAN_ON
P-GND
EDGE_FAN_F_LOCK*
EDGE_FAN_ON
P-GND
EDGE_FAN_R_LOCK*
SHUTTER_M_A
SHUTTER_M_B
SHUTTER_M_A*
SHUTTER_M_B*
+5R
SHUTTER_HP_SNS
L_GND
J2507
J2039
1
J2032
J2033
1
J2037
J2036
J2035
J2031
S10
Shutter HP
Sensor
A
M8
Shutter HP
Motor
10
3 2 1
3 2 1
S12
S11
No.1 Delivery
Sensor
No.1 Delivery
Full Sensor
M9
No.1 Delivery
Motor
A
FAN2
Paper Edge
Cooling Fan
(Front)
FAN1
Paper Edge
Cooling Fan
(Rear)
385
P.1

8
P-GND
to Cassette 1
2
J9910
OP1_DETECT
+5R
OP1_EX_LOAD
OP1_EX_CLK
OP1_EX_SEND
L-GND
L-GND
OP1_M1_CLK
15 14 13 12 11 10
OP1_READY
RESET*
J9909
L-GND
J9908
P-GND
J9907D
J9911
+24R
OP2_DETECT
+5R
L-GND
L-GND
OP2_EX_LOAD
ESS
OP2_EX_SEND
GND
L-GND
GND
+24VR2
OP2_EX_CLK
to Cassette 2
11 10
P-GND
+24R
J701
J704
+24R
Finisher Controller PCB
J703
Option Power Supply

PCB
J9914
10
11 10
N.C.
H
to Reader Heater
J9915
L-GND
OP2_M1_CLK
L-GND
OP2_M2_CLK
RESET*
OP2_READY
L-GND
L-GND
FIN_RxD
FIN_BIT
L-GND
FIN_TxD
ET1
FIN_ENABLE
ET2
FIN_DL_RESET
L-GND
L-GND
L-GND
FIN_MODE
J9916
J113A
1
J113B
9 10 11
J226
J109
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
J223
J222
J221
9 10 11
J224
J1105
J1102
Power Supply
PCB (3/3)

D
D
J110
Heater PCB
(2/2)
J214
7
J220
1
2
3
J2505
MT6
J1106
J2510DWH
N.C.
N.C.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
J2504
to 2 Way Unit
MT5
N.C.
N.C.
10
N.C.
J9913
J2510LB
J2510LA
N.C.
J2510LWH
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
J2510DB
J2510DA
7
N.C.
N.C.
9 10
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
L-GND
REVERSE_SNS
EXIT2_FULL_SNS
EXIT2_SNS
REVERSE_SL_ON
REVERSE_M_I0
M_STANDBY*
EXIT2_DETECT*
+3.3R
L-GND
+5R
L-GND
+24R
P-GND
P-GND
+5R
L-GND
L-GND
FIX_OUT_SNS
MAIN_TH
L-GND
SUB1_TH
SUB2_TH
L-GND
L-GND
TH_DETECT*
J1104
EXIT2_SL_ON
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
REVERSE_M_CWCCW
COM
REVERSE_M_CLK
H2
REVERSE_M_I1
H1
11 10
ET3
ET4
N.C.
N.C.
J9912
MT3
UNIT1
Fixing Sub Fixing Sub Fixing Main

Thermistor Thermistor Thermistor
(Front)
(Rear)
7
J2046
J2063
TH3
N.C.
N.C.
TH2
to Cassette Heater
10
TH1
J2101
MT2
J9911
MT4
H1
MT8
H2
TP1
TP
J2100
Fixing Heater 1
ET6
Fixing Heater 2
MT7
ET5
S19
Fixing Outlet Sensor
386
P.1

10

J8141
64
J8113
18
21
20
22
24
27
26
28
31
30
35
32
34
37
36
39
38
41
40
43
42
47
49
46
42
40
43
38
41
36
39
34
37
32
35
33
30
31
28
29
26
27
24
25
22
20
23
21
18
19
16
17
14
12
15
10
13
11
48
50
11
15
12
17
14
16
18
21
20
23
22
25
29
26
31
28
30
32
35
34
37
36
38
41
40
43
42
45
44
47
46
49
48
51
53
50
52
55
54
57
56
58
61
60
GND
OP_FFC_OUT
GND
5V
59
GND
5V
5V
SIZE_ON
SIZE0
SIZE2
SIZE1
SIZE3
HP_SENS
CVR_OPEN_S0
CVR_OPEN_S1
GND
24V_WATCH
OPM_STANBY
MOT_CLK
MOT_CWB
MOT_ENB
N.C
N.C
39
N.C
GND
OPM/RKMOT_CLK
OPM/RKMOT_CWB
OPM/RKMOT_ENB
OPM/RKMOT_VREF1
N.C
33
RKMOT_VREF2
GND
MOT_PWM
RKMOT_STANBY
STMP_SOL
27
24
RIKAN_SOL
PICK_CL
REG_CL
SET_LED
FAN
MOT_VREF
ADF_JOINT
GND
19
FAN_LOCK
DF_SIZE_W1
DF_SIZE_L1
DF_SIZE_W2
DF_SIZE_L2
GND
13
10
LAST_SENS
READ_SENS
REG_SENS
EXIT_SENS
TIMING_SENS
DF_COVER_SENS
EMPTY_SENS
N.C
RKMOT_HP
N.C
5
63
62
+5V
64
SIZE0
GND
3
J512
J501
3.3V
GND
GND
3.3V
GND
*RESET
EEP_TX
45
44
OP_FFC_IN
EEP_CLK
EEP_CS0
GND
FFC_IN
EEP_RX
8
9
AF_SIO_DO
AF_SIO_XCE
11
AF_SIO_CLK
13
10
AF_SIO_DI
12
SH_R
15
CLK_SEL
TX0-
33
14
GND
17
TX0+
TX1-
29
16
19
GND
21
18
GND
20
GND
GND
TX2-
25
22
23
GND
25
TX2+
GND
23
24
TX1+
26
27
GND
29
TCLK-
GND
GND
19
28
44
45
16
31
TCLK+
LED1_ON
GND
N.C
14
17
30
46
47
12
15
33
LED2_ON
N.C
13
35
32
48
49
10
3.3V
5V
GND
N.C
5V
11
37
34
50
51
39
36
52
53
41
38
54
55
N.C
GND
43
40
56
57
45
42
58
59
44
60
61
J509
47
GND
GND
FFC_OUT
49
46
GND
48
GND
50
GND
62
63
S24
Original Size
Sensor 0
(AB/INCH)
P
1
3
2
1
3
2
3
4
S29
(A/AB)
S25
Original Size
Sensor 1
(AB/INCH)
J508
J573
GND
J513
SIZE0
J559
J574
+5V
S28
(A/INCH)
GND
SIZE1
+5V
GND
SIZE1
J514
J569
+5V
6
3
2
1
GND
HP_SENS
4
3
2
CVR_OPEN_S0
GND
+3.3V
J575
5
9
S22
CCD HP
Sensor
S21
Copyboard
Cover Open/
Closed Sensor 0 C
S26
Copyboard
Cover Open/
Closed Sensor 1
+3.3V
1
J505
Reader Relay PCB (2/2)
J565
3
2
1
GND
CVR_OPEN_S1
+3.3V
J555
28
26
24
25
22
23
20
21
18
19
16
17
14
15
12
13
10
11
8
9
J504
1
2
3
J503
2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
/A
J506
M21
Scanner
Motor
/B
B
A
J511
9 10
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
J502
50
+24V
GND
RKMOT_HP
+5VS
COVER
GND
EMPTY
EXIT
TIMING
REG
READ
GND
LAST
OPM/RKMOT_CLK
MOT_CLK
OPM/RKMOT_CWB
MOT_CWM
OPM/RKMOT_ENB
MOT_EMB
OPM/RKMOT_VREF1
GND
RKMOT_VREF2
MOT_PWM
RKMOT_STB
RIKAN_SOL
STMP_SOL
PICK_CL
REG_CL
SET_LED
GND
FAN
FAN_LOCK
ADF_JOINT
DF_SIZE_W1
DF_SIZE_W2
DF_SIZE_L1
DF_SIZE_L2
GND
FFC_IN
*RESET
EEP_RX
EEP_TX
GND
EEP_CLK
EEP_CS0
AF_SIO_DI
AF_SIO_DO
AF_SIO_XCE
AF_SIO_CLK
SH_R
CLK_SEL
TX0-
GND
GND
TX0+
GND
GND
TX1-
GND
TX1+
TX2-
GND
GND
GND
TX2+
TCLK-
GND
GND
TCLK+
GND
3.3V
GND
5V
5V
GND
12V
GND
GND
+24VS
+24VS
+24VU
+24VU
LED_BAR_1
LED_BAR_1
LED_BAR_2
LED_BAR_2
FFC_OUT
J556
2
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
49
50
47
48
45
46
43
44
41
42
39
40
37
38
35
36
33
34
31
32
29
30
27
28
25
26
23
24
21
22
19
20
17
18
15
16
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
10
J561
J553
J554
J552
ADF Driver PCB
CCD PCB
10
P.1
387

10
Card Reader
5
GND
+5V
CARD_READER_COUNT
CARD_READER_TX
+24V
GND
USB
CARD_READER_RX
J9901
J8111
LAN
J8110
SDcard
J8104
USB(D)
J8103
USB(H)
USB hub PCB
J9999
J2
J8119
6
5
GND
+5V
CCVI_CP_ENB
CCVI_KYU_COUNT
Control Interface
Cable
J9904
CCVI_CL_BW_L
J112
CCVI_LARGE_SMALL_B
MODEM PCB
J8117
CCVI_OPTION
USB(H)
J8103
to Power Supply PCB
B_PRDY
B_CRDY
C_PRDY
C_CRDY
GND
COIN_TX
COIN_RX
GND
D
to Coin Vendor
J8140
GND
VCC(5Vor3.3V)
J0002
J8118
GND
SP1
Speaker (Option)
9 10 11
VOUT1
J8149
VOUT2
J8134
1
J8147
21
2
6
22
19
20
17
18
15
16
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
J8127
J8124
(+)
(-)
J8146
3
N.C.
GND
21
22
J3
CT1
CT2
2
J4
T1
T2
4
N.C.
VH(-)
NCU PCB
VH(+)
L2
L1
Modular
PCB
Secondary
Battery
20
IPSEL
19
18
17
16
+5V
LPL2
HOOK1
15
14
LPL1
HOOK2
N.C.
13
12
11
10
CI2
CAIDD
CI1
CMLD
9
7
6
LPRD
HRD
DCLIM
5
PRD
N.C.
3
2
J1
J004
SRD
J02
CIVS
+3.3V
GND
AGND
+12V
SNOOP
+5V
TX_OUT
RX_IN
1
J002
GND
GND
+24V
GND
J001
J003
CICNT_OUT
FFC3
FAX BOX
10
388
P.1

10
to Main Controller PCB

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Contorol Panel
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
J3
1
2
-24VEE
3
D2
4
5
2
1
J7
D1
D0
-24VEE
L-GND
8
9
+5R
XSCL
10
11
LP
LCD
YD
12
13
Control Panel CPU PCB
D3
SOLDER
J4
VLCD
N.C.
14
DOFF*
CCFL
3
TTP-R
TTP-L
TTP-D
J5
Touch Panel
TTP-U
+5R
1/4 Inverter PCB
27
-24VEE
ESS-KEY
L-DGT2
L-RTN0
26
25
VLCG
24
23
VLCD
22
21
L-DGT0
K-RTN0
K-DGT1
20
19
L-DGT1
18
17
K-DGT0
L-RTN1
L-DGT4
L-DGT5
16
15
K-DGT2
14
13
POWER-LED
12
11
K-RTN4
K-RTN3
K-RTN1
10
9
L-DGT3
8
7
K-DGT7
K-DGT5
K-DGT4
K-DGT3
6
5
K-RTN2
4
3
K-DGT6
2
1
P-GND
J955
BKLT_ON*
J6
J1
SOLDER
J1
Key Top PCB Assembly
10
389
P.1

imageRUNNER+25452535+series+Service+Manual en 9.0 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

imageRUNNER+25452535+series+Service+Manual en 9.0 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

imageRUNNER+25452535+series+Service+Manual en 9.0 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Revision 9.

Insert the claw.

Push the part.

Disconnect the connector.

Connect the power cable.

Connect the connector.

Disconnect the power cable.

Remove the cable/wire from the

Turn on the power.

Install the cable/wire to the cable

Turn off the power.

Remove the screw.

Loosen the screw.

Tighten the screw.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery............................................................................................. 4

Original Exposure System.................................................................................................................21

Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................... 49

Image Formation System.................................................................................................................. 56

3. Periodical Service........................................................................................ 105

External / Internal Cover..................................................................................................................123

Main Unit......................................................................................................................................... 132

Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts................................................................. 143

Clutch / Solenoid............................................................................................................................. 148

Adjustment when Replacing the Parts............................................................................................ 177

Test Print......................................................................................................................................... 184

Version Upgrade............................................................................................................................. 190

Service Call Request Function........................................................................................................ 194

Jam Code........................................................................................................................................ 210

Alarm Code..................................................................................................................................... 214

8. Service Mode................................................................................................ 216

Details of Service Mode.................................................................................................................. 220

Remote UI Service Mode................................................................................................................ 306

Checking before Installation............................................................................................................ 311

Checking the Contents.................................................................................................................... 314

Card Reader-F1.............................................................................................................................. 328

Serial Interface Kit-J2...................................................................................................................... 336

Copy Control Interface Cable-A1.................................................................................................... 339

System Upgrade RAM-C1...............................................................................................................342

Cst Heater Kit-J1............................................................................................................................. 345

Reader Heater Unit......................................................................................................................... 352

Cassette Heater Unit-37..................................................................................................................359

Drum Heater-C1.............................................................................................................................. 372

General Circuit Diagram..................................................................................................................383

Handling of Laser System

Turn Power Switch ON

Main power switch

Toner on Clothing or Skin

Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery

Notes Before Servicing

Points to Note at Cleaning

Host machine configuration

Target machine: imageRUNNER 3235/3225/2030/2025 Series

imageRUNNER 2545 / 2535

Remarks and condition

Inner Finisher Additional Tray-B1

Built-in finisher Power Supply Unit-U1 is required.

Reader Heater Unit-H1

Cst Heater Kit-J1 is required.